diff options
Diffstat (limited to '23117.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 23117.txt | 11441 |
1 files changed, 11441 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/23117.txt b/23117.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ec8941 --- /dev/null +++ b/23117.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11441 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Island Home, by Richard Archer + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Island Home + +Author: Richard Archer + +Illustrator: Dalziel + +Release Date: October 20, 2007 [EBook #23117] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ISLAND HOME *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +The Island Home, the Adventures of six Young Crusoes, by Richard Archer. + +________________________________________________________________________ +This book should be a bit more of a classic than it actually is. It is +thought that Ballantyne used it as the inspiration for his famous "The +Coral Island", for there is good evidence for it. In the 1830s the +Washington left New York, the passengers including some of the young +members of the owners' families and some of their friends. Destination +Canton via the Straits of Magellan. Crossing the Pacific, they land on +various of the islands, such as those in the Fiji and Kingsmill Groups. +Sometimes they encountered particularly nasty inhabitants. One day they +were on the beach of an island, when it became necessary for the +Washington to up anchors and away, leaving the shore party with the +ship's boat. Murders occur among the seamen. The boys set sail in the +boat, hoping to regain contact with some vessel, but never do. + +The rest of the book is a story of survival, and of the good humour of +the boys. The real problem with the book is the long paragraphs of +description which nowadays would be much shorter or omitted altogether, +but it was written in the 1850s, and it was Ballantyne's luck that he +was able to write a book along the same lines but far easier to read. + +Still, it's worth a quick skim, if nothing more. Your reviewer has +listened to the book several times, and enjoyed it each time. + +________________________________________________________________________ +THE ISLAND HOME, THE ADVENTURES OF SIX YOUNG CRUSOES, BY RICHARD ARCHER. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + "A wet sheet and a flowing sea, + A breeze that follows fast, + That fills the white and rustling sail, + And bends the gallant mast. + And bends the gallant mast, my boys, + Our good ship sound and free, + The hollow oak our palace is, + Our heritage the sea." + +It is now some twenty years ago, that the goodly ship Washington, +commanded by Mr Erskine, left the port of New York, on a trading voyage +to the East Indian archipelago. With a select few good seamen, the +owners had also placed on board some youths of their own families and +immediate connections. + +Having passed through the Straits of Magellan in safety, they were then +on their way to Canton, where the young men were to be settled; and +meanwhile the ship was to visit any of the isles in the Pacific Ocean +that lay in their path. After some little delay on the part of the +captain among the numerous groups of isles, the purpose of the voyage +was frustrated by the events narrated in the volume. The extreme beauty +of the wild loveliness of nature that these islets exhibited, tempted +the young men, accompanied by Mr Frazer, one of the officers, to land +on one that presented great charms of scenery, as well as having a +convenient and easily accessible landing-place, and from that point the +narrative commences. + +It is not necessary for the elucidation of the narrative, to name more +of the crew than those whose adventures are hereafter related by one of +the party. The names of these castaways were John Browne, the son of a +Glasgow merchant; William Morton, and Maximilian Adeler, of New York; +Richard Archer, from Connecticut, the journalist; John Livingstone, from +Massachusetts; Arthur Hamilton, whose parents had settled at Tahiti; and +to them was joined Eiulo, prince of Tewa, in the South-Seas. + +The narrative commences from the time of the party landing, and although +in some parts prolix and unequal, being evidently from an unpractised +hand, it bears all the characteristics of a boyish mind, and thus to a +certain extent confirms its genuineness. The sayings and doings of the +young adventurers are recorded with the minuteness that to older heads +seems tedious. This disposition to dwell upon, and to attach importance +to things comparatively trivial, is peculiar to the youthful mind, and +marks that period of freshness, joyousness, and inexperience, when every +thing is new, and possesses the power to surprise and to interest. + +What became of the ship and crew we are not informed; but we may +conclude, that insubordination would lead to neglect and carelessness, +and that the vessel was wrecked and plundered by the native; and the +wretched crew murdered or detained. + +The South Pacific Ocean abounds with thousands of islands, of a vast +many of which we have no account; but those mentioned in these pages +appear to be the _Samoas_, the _Kingsmill_, and the _Feejee Groups_ of +islands, which lie nearly under the equator, and they are described by +Captain Charles Wilkes, in his narrative of the United States Exploring +Expedition between the years 1838 and 1842. These islands were all +visited by the different vessels engaged in the expedition; many of them +appear to be of volcanic formation, others are of coral origin; they are +all characterised as possessing an exceedingly fertile soil; they abound +with a picturesque beauty of scenery, and luxuriant vegetation, which +excites the most painful feelings when we learn, that where nature has +bestowed so much bounty, the inhabitants are, it is greatly to be +feared, cannibals. In some two or three islands, a solitary white man +was found, one of whom, Paddy Connell, (an Irishman, of course), a +short, wrinkled old man, with a beard reaching to his middle, in a rich +Milesian brogue, related his adventures during a forty years' residence +at Ovolan, one of the Feejees. Paddy, with one hundred wives, and +forty-eight children, and a vast quantity of other live stock, expressed +his content and happiness, and a determination to die on the island. In +other cases, the white men expressed an earnest desire to quit the +island, and were received on board the expedition, to the great grief of +their wives and connections. + +The _Samoan Islands_ are of volcanic structure, with coral reefs, and +the harbours are generally within these reefs; and one of them was +discovered by Commodore Byron in 1765, who reported it as destitute of +inhabitants. Their character is variable, and during the winter months +they have long and heavy rains, and destructive hurricanes sometimes +occur. The air is generally moist, and light winds and calms during the +summer, render vegetation luxuriant. + +The woods in the interior of these islands are very thick, and are +composed of large and fine trees; there are pandanus, palms, tree ferns, +and a remarkable species of banyan, whose pendant branches take root to +the number of thousands, forming steps of all dimensions, uniting to the +main trunk, more than eight feet above the ground, and supporting a vast +system of horizontal branches, spreading like an umbrella over the tops +of other trees. The bread-fruit is the most abundant of all the trees, +and grows to a very large size; the cocoa-nut, the wild orange, and the +lime, are all to be found. Bamboos, wild sugar-cane, wild nutmeg, +besides many others, only require cultivation. Caoutchouc, gum arabic, +castor beans, ginger, orris root, and coffee, will in time be added to +these productions. Lemons and sweet oranges have already been planted, +and promise a large product. + +Swine are abundant and cattle rapidly increasing. Poultry of all kinds +is very plentiful, and fish are taken in abundance. + +The beneficent effects of missionary labours are very evident amongst +the Samoans; they are not now subject to wars, and for crimes they have +punishment. + +Their habits are regular; they rise with the sun, and after a meal, +bathe and oil themselves, and then go to their occupations for the day; +they eat at one o'clock, and again at eight, retiring to rest about +nine. The men do all the hard work, even to cookery. The women are +held in much consideration, and are treated with great kindness and +attention. They take care of the house and children, prepare the food +for cooking, and manufacture the mats, etcetera. + +Their houses are carefully constructed, generally occupying eighteen +months in building; the floor is paved with small round stones, and +divisions or separate apartments formed. In some villages, broad walks +and paths are kept in nice order. The females generally wear a kind of +robe, similar to the poncho of the South Americans; and although not +what may be termed pretty, they have some degree of bashfulness, which +renders them interesting in appearance; when young, they are but little +darker than a brunette, or South American Spaniard. + +The entire population of the group is estimated at 60,000, of whom more +than one-fourth have embraced Christianity, and it is understood that +more than two-thirds of the population are favouring the progress of the +gospel. Many thousands attend the schools of the missionaries, and the +habit of reading is fast obliterating the original religion and +superstitions of the race. + +Of the _Kingsmill Group_, we possess a very sad account; one named +Drummond's Island, which is of coral formation, is about thirty miles +long, and about three-quarters of a mile in width. The island is +covered with cocoa-nut and pandanus trees, but not a patch of grass was +seen. The character of these islanders is of the most savage kind; +their ferocity led to the belief that they are cannibals; one seaman of +the expedition was carried off, and all attempts to rescue him were +unavailing. Clad in coats of mail, and helmets made of the skin of a +horny kind of fish, with weapons of the most frightful character, formed +from the teeth of some of the voracious monsters of the deep, they +appeared to the number of more than five hundred, prepared for +resistance; their numbers continuing to increase. The officer in +command, considered it both useless and dangerous to continue on the +land. Failing to procure the desired end, prior to returning, the +commanding officer determined to show the power of their arms, and +having shot the leader of the savages dead, by a rocket and a volley, +set their town, which was close to the beach, in flames; and the houses +being formed of easily combustible material, a very short time sufficed +to reduce the whole to ashes. The number of houses was supposed to be +about three hundred. + +The people appear to be under no control whatever, and possess little of +the characteristic hospitality usually found among other savage tribes. + +It was observed that their treatment of each other exhibited a great +want of feeling; and in many instances their practices were indicative +of the lowest state of barbarism. Their young girls are freely offered +for sale by their fathers and brothers, and without concealment; and to +drive a bargain is the principal object of their visits to a ship. + +The _Kingsmill Group_, which consists of fifteen islands, are all of +coral formation--every one appears a continuous grove of cocoa-nut and +pandanus trees--they are all densely inhabited. From one of these +islands, John Kirby, a deserter from an English whaler, was taken, who +had resided there three years. He stated that the natives do sometimes +eat human flesh; but their general food is fish. That these islands +have been peopled at a period not very remote is tolerably certain, as +the natives state that only a few generations back, the people were +fewer than at present, and that then there were no wars. + +The islanders of this group differ from other Polynesians, and they more +nearly resemble the Malays. They are of a dark copper colour, are of +middle size, well-made, and slender. Their hair is fine, black, and +glossy--their beards and moustaches black, and fine as the hair of their +heads. The average height of the men is five feet eight inches. The +women are much smaller--they have delicate features, slight figures, and +are generally pretty. + +The _Feejee Group_ excel all other islands of Polynesia in their +luxuriant and picturesque beauty--they produce all kinds of tropical +fruits and vegetables--the bread-fruit, of which there are nine kinds, +flourishes in great perfection; the banana, cocoa-nut, and chestnut, the +orange, the lemon, and the guava, the pine-apple, and the nutmeg, are +all to be found; and the yam, which attains the length of above four +feet, is the principal food of the inhabitants; besides these, the +sugar-cane and turmeric are largely cultivated, and different varieties +are found growing wild. Although the Feejeeans have made considerable +progress in several useful arts, they are in many respects the most +barbarous and savage race now existing upon the globe. Having had +considerable intercourse with white men, some effect has been produced +in their political condition, but it has had no effect in mitigating the +ferocity of their character. Messrs. Lythe and Hunt, missionaries at +Vuna, one of the Feejees, have given a circumstantial account of a +cannibal feast, for the preparation of which they were eye-witnesses. +The missionaries having heard rumours that the king had sent for some +men belonging to a refractory town not far from the capital, with the +intention of killing them, and afterwards feasting on their bodies, they +went to the old king to urge him to desist from so horrid and barbarous +a repast, and warned him that a time would come when he would be +punished for it. The king referred them to his son; but the savage +propensities of the latter rendered it impossible for them to turn the +savage from his barbarous purpose. They afterwards saw the bodies cut +up and cooked. On two of these islands, however, the efforts of +missionaries have been rewarded with some success; for the Reverend Mr +Calvert, belonging to the Wesleyan society, assured the officers of the +expedition, that in those islands heathenism was fast passing away, and +that cannibalism was there extinct; but it must be observed that many of +the residents on those two islands were Tongese, among whom it is well +known the light of the gospel of Christ has long prevailed. + +On one of those isles are five hot springs, the temperature of which is +200 degrees; the rocks in the neighbourhood is of volcanic creation-- +there is no smell of sulphur unless the head is held close to the water; +but the water has a very strong bitter saline taste. These springs are +used by the natives to boil their yams, which it does simply by putting +them into the springs, and covering them with grass and leaves, and, +although the water had scarcely any appearance of boiling before, rapid +ebullition ensues. The yams are well done in fifteen minutes. + +The population of the Feejee Group is supposed to be about 130,000. +Their towns are all on the sea-shore, as the chief food is fish. The +Feejeeans are very ingenious at canoe-building and carpentry, and, +curious enough, the barber is a most important personage, as they take +great pains and pride in dressing their hair. Their houses are from +twenty to thirty feet in length, and about fifteen feet in height--all +have fireplaces, as they cook their food, which is done in jars, very +like an oil jar in form. + +All these isles are girt by white encircling reefs, which, standing out +at some distance from the shore, forms a natural harbour, so that when a +vessel has once entered, it is as secure as in an artificial dock. +There is generally but one entrance through the reef, and the difficulty +of discovering it is well described by the Young Crusoes. Each one has +its own peculiar beauty; but Ovolan exceeds all others; it is the +highest, the most broken, and the most picturesque. + +Having thus introduced our readers to the scene of these adventures, we +proceed to give the narrative in the words of the journalist of the +Young Castaways. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +THE TROPICAL ISLAND. + +A COCOA-PALM--VIEWS OF DESERT ISLAND LIFE. + + "O had we some bright little isle of our own, + In the blue summer ocean, far-off and alone." + +Wandering along the shore, (taking care to keep in sight of Mr Frazer, +under whose convoy, in virtue of his double-barrelled fowling-piece, we +considered ourselves), we came to a low and narrow point, running out a +little way into the sea, the extremity of which was adorned by a stately +group of cocoa-nut trees. + +The spot seemed ill adapted to support vegetation of so magnificent a +growth, and nothing less hardy than the cocoa-palm could have derived +nourishment from such a soil. Several of these fine trees stood almost +at the water's edge, springing from a bed of sand, mingled with black +basaltic pebbles, and coarse fragments of shells and coral, where their +roots were washed by every rising tide: yet their appearance was thrifty +and flourishing, and they were thickly covered with close-packed bunches +of tassel-like, straw-coloured blossoms, and loaded with fruit in +various stages of growth. + +Johnny cast a wistful glance at the compact clusters of nuts, nestling +beneath the graceful tufts of long leaves that crowned each straight and +tapering trunk; but he had so recently learned from experience, the +hopelessness of undertaking to climb a cocoa-nut tree, that he was not +at present disposed to renew the attempt. Max, however, who greatly +valued himself upon his agility, and professed to be able to do any +thing that could be done, in the way of climbing, manifested an +intention to hazard his reputation by making the doubtful experiment. +After looking carefully around, he selected for the attempt, a young +tree near the shore, growing at a considerable inclination from the +perpendicular; and clasping it firmly, he slowly commenced climbing, or +rather creeping, along the slanting trunk, while Johnny watched the +operation from below, with an interest as intense as if the fate of +empires depended upon the result. + +Max, who evidently considered his character at stake, and who climbed +for "glory," rather than for cocoa-nuts, proceeded with caution and +perseverance. Once he partly lost his hold, and swung round to the +under side of the trunk, but by a resolute and vigorous effort he +promptly recovered his position, and finally succeeded in establishing +himself quite comfortably among the enormous leaves that drooped from +the top of the tree. Here he seemed disposed to rest for a while, after +his arduous and triumphant exertions, and he sat, looking complacently +down upon us from his elevated position, without making any attempt to +secure the fruit which hung within his reach in abundant clusters. + +"Hurrah!" cried Johnny, capering about and clapping his hands with glee, +as soon as this much desired consummation was attained, "Now, Max, pitch +down the nuts!" + +Having teased Johnny, and enjoyed the impatience caused by the +tantalising deliberation of his own movements, Max detached two entire +clusters of nuts from the tree, which furnished us an abundant supply. + +Selecting a pleasant spot beside the beach, we sat down to discuss the +cocoa-nuts at our leisure, which occupied us some little time. Upon +looking round, after we had finished, we discovered that our convoy had +disappeared, and Johnny, whose imagination was continually haunted by +visionary savages and cannibals, manifested considerable uneasiness upon +finding that we were alone. + +As the sun was already low in the west, and we supposed that the party +engaged in getting wood had, in all probability, finished their work, we +concluded to return, and to wait for Mr Frazer, and the rest of the +shore party at the boats, if we should not find them already there. + +As we skirted the border of the grove, on our return, Johnny every now +and then cast an uneasy glance towards its darkening recesses, as though +expecting to see some wild animal, or a yelling troop of tattooed +islanders rush out upon us. The forest commenced about two hundred +yards from the beach, from which there was a gradual ascent and was +composed of a greater variety of trees than I had observed on the other +islands of a similar size at which we had previously landed. Arthur +called our attention to a singular and picturesque group of +Tournefortias, in the midst of which, like a patriarch surrounded by his +family, stood one of uncommon size, and covered with a species of fern, +which gave it a striking and remarkable appearance. The group covered a +little knoll, that crowned a piece of rising ground, advanced a short +distance beyond the edge of the forest. It was a favourable spot for a +survey of the scene around us. The sun, now hastening to his setting, +was tingeing all the western ocean with a rich vermilion glow. The +smooth white beach before us, upon which the long-rolling waves broke in +even succession, retired in a graceful curve to the right and was broken +on the left by the wooded point already mentioned. + +As you looked inland, the undulating surface of the island, rising +gradually from the shore, and covered with the wild and luxuriant +vegetation of the tropics, delighted the eye by its beauty and variety. +The noble Bread-fruit tree--its arching branches clothed with its +peculiarly rich and glossy foliage; the elegantly shaped Casuarina, the +luxuriant Pandanus, and the Palms, with their stately trunks, and green +crests of nodding leaves, imparted to the scene a character of oriental +beauty. + +"Why do they call so lovely a spot as this a desert island, I wonder?" +exclaimed Johnny, after gazing around him a few moments in silence. + +"Did you ever hear of a desert island that wasn't a lovely spot!" +answered Max. "Why, your regular desert island should combine the +richest productions of the temperate, torrid, and frigid zones--a choice +selection of the fruits, flowers, vegetables, and animal; of Europe, +Asia, and Africa. This would by no means come up to the average +standard. I doubt if you could find upon it so much as a goat or a +poll-parrot much less an `onager,' a buffalo, or a boa-constrictor, some +of which at least are indispensable to a desert island of any +respectability." + +"Why, then, do they call such delightful places desert islands!" +repeated Johnny. "I always thought a desert was a barren wilderness, +where there was nothing to be seen but sand, and rocks, and Arabs." + +"I believe they are more properly called _desolate_ islands," said +Arthur; "and that seems proper enough; for even this island with all its +beauty, is supposed to be uninhabited, and it would be a very lonely and +_desolate_ home. Would you like to live here, Johnny, like Robinson +Crusoe, or the Swiss family?" + +"Not all alone, like Robinson Crusoe. O no! that would be horrible; but +I think we might all of us together live here beautifully a little +while, if we had plenty of provisions, and plenty of arms to defend +ourselves against the savages; and then of course we should want a house +to live in, too." + +"Nonsense," said Max, "what should we want of provisions?--the sea is +full of fish, and the forest of birds; the trees are loaded with fruit; +there are oysters and other shell-fish in the bays, and no doubt there +are various roots, good for food, to be had by digging for them. As to +a house, we might sleep very comfortably, in such weather as this, under +these Tournefortias, and never so much as think of taking cold; or we +could soon build a serviceable hut, which would be proof against sun and +rain, of the trunks and boughs of trees, with a thatch of palm-leaves +for a roof. Then in regard to arms, of course, if it should be our fate +to set up for desert islanders, we should be well supplied in that line. +I never heard of any one, from Robinson Crusoe down, being cast away on +a desert island, without a good store of guns, pistols, cutlasses, +etcetera, etcetera. Such a thing would be contrary to all precedent, +and is not for a moment to be dreamed of." + +"But we haven't any arms," said Johnny, "except those old rusty +cutlasses that Spot put into the yawl, and if we should be cast away, or +left here, for instance, where should we get them from?" + +"O, but we are not cast away yet," replied Max. "This is the way the +thing always happens. When people are cast away, it is in a ship, of +course." + +"Why, yes; I suppose so," said Johnny, rather doubtfully. "Well--the +ship is always abundantly supplied with every thing necessary to a +desert island life; she is driven ashore; the castaways--the future +desert islanders--by dint of wonderful good fortune, get safely to land; +the rest of course are all drowned, and so disposed of; then, in due +time, the ship goes to pieces, and every thing needful is washed ashore +and secured by the islanders--that's the regular course of things--isn't +it, Arthur!" + +"Yes, I believe it is, according to the story-books, which are the +standard sources of information on the subject." + +"Or sometimes," pursued Max, "the ship gets comfortably wedged in +between two convenient rocks, (which seem to have been designed for that +special purpose), so that the castaways can go out to it on a raft, or +float of some kind, and carry off every thing they want--and singularly +enough, although the vessel is always on the point of going to pieces, +that catastrophe never takes place, until every thing which can be of +any use is secured." + +"Do you suppose, Arthur," inquired Johnny, "that there are many +uninhabited islands, that have never been discovered!" + +"There are believed to be a great many of them," answered Arthur, "and +it is supposed that new ones are constantly being formed by the labours +of the coral insect. A bare ledge of coral first appears, just at the +surface; it arrests floating substances, weeds, trees, etcetera; soon +the sea-birds begin to resort there; by the decay of vegetable and +animal matter a thin soil gradually covers the foundation of coral; a +cocoa-nut is drifted upon it by the winds, or the currents of the sea; +it takes root, springs up, its fruit ripens and falls, and in a few +years the whole new-formed island is covered with waving groves." + +"Mr Frazer says he has no doubt that these seas swarm with such +islands, and that many of them have never been discovered," said Max; +besides, here's poetry for it:-- + + "`O many are the beauteous isles, + Unseen by human eye, + That sleeping 'mid the Ocean smiles, + In happy silence lie. + The ship may pass them in the night, + Nor the sailors know what lovely sight + Is sleeping on the main;' + +"But this poetical testimony will make Arthur doubt the fact +altogether." + +"Not exactly," answered Arthur, "though I am free to admit that without +Mr Frazer's opinion to back it your poetical testimony would not go +very far with me." + +"Hark! There go Mr Frazer's two barrels," cried Max, as two reports in +quick succession were heard, coming apparently from the grove, in the +direction of the spring; "he has probably come across a couple of `rare +specimens,' to be added to his stuffed collection." + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +THE ALARM AND THE CONFLICT. + +THE MUTINEERS--THE RACE FOR LIFE--THE CORAL LEDGE--A FINAL EFFORT--A +BRIEF WARNING--THE STRANGE SAIL. + + "Now bend the straining rowers to their oars; + Fast the light shallops leave the lessening shores, + No rival crews in emulous sport contend, + But life and death upon the event depend." + +The next moment we were startled by a quick, fierce shout, followed +immediately by a long, piercing, and distressful cry, proceeding from +the same quarter from which the reports of fire-arms had been heard; and +before we had time to conjecture the cause or meaning of these frightful +sounds, Morton bounded like a deer from the grove, about a hundred yards +from the spot where we were standing, and ran swiftly towards us, crying +out--"To the boats! for your lives to the boats!" + +Our first thought was, that the party at the spring had been attacked +and massacred by the natives. Arthur seized Johnny by one hand, and +motioned to me to take the other, which I did, and without stopping to +demand any explanations, we started at a rapid pace, in the direction of +the yawl, Max taking the lead--Arthur and myself, dragging Johnny +between us, coming next, and Morton a few paces behind us, bringing up +the rear. It took but a few moments to enable us to reach the spot +where the yawl lay, hauled up upon the beach. There was no one in her, +or in sight, except Browne, who was comfortably stretched out near the +boat sound asleep, with an open book lying beside him. + +Morton aroused the sleeper by a violent shake. "Now, then," cried he, +"let us get the boat into the water; the tide is down, and the yawl is +heavy; we shall want all the strength we can muster." + +By a united effort we got the yawl to the edge of the surf. + +Browne, though not yet thoroughly awake, could not but observe our pale +faces and excited appearance, and gazing from one to another in a +bewildered manner, he asked what was the matter; but no one made any +answer. Morton lifted Johnny into the boat and asked the rest of us to +get in, except Arthur, saying that they two would push her through the +surf. + +"Hold!" cried Arthur, "let us not be too fast; some of the others may +escape the savages, and they will naturally run this way--we must not +leave them to be murdered." + +"There are no savages in the case," answered Morton, "and there is no +time to be lost; the men have killed the first officer, and Mr Frazer, +too, I fear; and they will take the ship and commit more murders, unless +we can get there before them, to warn those on board." + +This was more horrible than any thing that we had anticipated; but we +had no time to dwell upon it: the sound of oars rattling in the +row-locks, was heard from beyond the point. + +"There are the mutineers!" cried Morton; "but I think that we have the +advantage of them; they must pull round yonder point, which will make at +least a quarter of a mile's difference in the distance to the ship." + +"There is no use in trying to get to the ship before them," said Max, +"the long-boat pulls eight oars, and there are men enough to fill her." + +"There _is_ use in trying; it would be shameful _not_ to try; if they +pull most oars, ours is the lightest boat," answered Morton with +vehemence. + +"It us out of the question," said Browne; "see, is there any hope that +we can succeed?" and he pointed to the bow of the long-boat just +appearing from behind the point. + +"O, but this is not right!--Browne! Max! in the name of all that is +honourable, let us make the attempt," urged Morton, laying a hand in an +imploring manner on the arm of each. "Shall we let them take the ship +and murder our friends, without an effort to warn them of their danger? +You, Arthur, are for making the attempt, I know--this delay is wrong: +the time is precious." + +"Yes, let us try it," said Arthur, glancing rapidly from the long-boat +to the ship, "if we fail, no harm is done, except that we incur the +anger of the mutineers. I, for one, am willing to take the risk." + +Max sprang into the boat, and seized an oar without another word. + +"_You_ know well, that I am willing to share any danger with the rest, +and that it was not the danger that made me hesitate," said Browne, +laying his hand on Morton's shoulder, and looking earnestly into his +face; and then, in his usual deliberate manner, he followed Max's +example. + +Morton, Arthur, and myself now pushed the boat into the surf and sprang +in. At Arthur's request, I took the rudder; he and Morton seized the +two remaining oars, and the four commenced pulling with a degree of +coolness and vigour, that would not have disgraced older and more +practised oarsmen. As I saw the manner in which they bent to their +work, and the progress we were making, I began to think our chance of +reaching the ship before the crew of the long-boat, by no means +desperate. + +Morton, in spite of his slender figure and youthful appearance, which +his fresh, ruddy complexion, blue eyes, and brown curling locks, +rendered almost effeminate, possessed extraordinary strength, and +indomitable energy. + +Browne, though his rather heavy frame and breadth of shoulders gave him +the appearance of greater strength than he actually possessed, was +undoubtedly capable, when aroused, of more powerful temporary exertion +than any other of our number; though in point of activity and endurance, +he would scarcely equal Morton or Arthur. Max, too, was vigorous and +active, and, when stimulated by danger or emulation, was capable of +powerful effort. Arthur, though of slight and delicate frame, was +compact and well knit, and his coolness, judgment and resolution, +enabled him to dispose of his strength to the best advantage. All were +animated by that high and generous spirit which is of greater value in +an emergency than any amount of mere physical strength; a spirit which +often stimulates the feeble to efforts as surprising to him who puts +them forth, as to those who witness them. + +Browne had the bow-oar, and putting his whole force into every stroke, +was pulling like a giant. Morton, who was on the same side, handled his +oar with less excitement and effort but with greater precision and equal +efficiency. It was plain that these two were pulling Max and Arthur +round, and turning the boat from her course; and as I had not yet +succeeded in shipping the rudder, which was rendered difficult by the +rising and falling of the boat, and the sudden impulse she received from +every stroke, I requested Browne and Morton to pull more gently. Just +as I had succeeded in getting the rudder hung, the crew of the long-boat +seemed to have first observed us. They had cleared the point to the +southward, and we were, perhaps, a hundred yards nearer the long point, +beyond which we could see the masts of the ship, and on doubling which, +we should be almost within hail of her. The latter point, was probably +a little more than half a mile distant from us, and towards the head of +it, both boats were steering. The long-boat was pulling eight oars, and +Luerson, the man who had had the difficulty with the first officer at +the Kingsmill Islands, was at the helm. As soon as he observed us, he +appeared to speak to the crew of his boat, and they commenced pulling +with greater vigour than before. He then hailed us,--"Holloa, lads! +where's Frazer? Are you going to leave him on the island!" + +We pulled on in silence. + +"He is looking for you now, somewhere along shore; he left us, just +below the point, to find you; you had better pull back and bring him +off." + +"All a trick," said Morton; "don't waste any breath with them;" and we +bent to the oars with new energy. + +"The young scamps mean to give the alarm," I could hear Luerson mutter +with an oath, as he surveyed, for a moment, the interval between the two +boats, and then the distance to the point. + +"There's no use of mincing matters, my lads," he cried, standing up in +the stem; "we have knocked the first officer on the head, and served +some of those who didn't approve of the proceeding in the same way; and +now we are going to take the ship." + +"We know it, and intend to prevent you," cried Morton, panting with the +violence of his exertions. + +"Unship your oars till we pass you, and you shall not be hurt," pursued +Luerson in the same breath; "pull another stroke at them, and I will +serve you like your friend, Frazer, and he lies at the spring with his +throat slit!" + +The ruffian's design, in this savage threat, was doubtless to terrify us +into submission; or, at least, so to appal and agitate us, as to make +our exertions more confused and feeble. In this last calculation he may +have been partially correct, for the threat was fearful, and the danger +imminent; the harsh, deep tones of his voice, with the ferocious +determination of his manner, sent a thrill of horror to every heart. +More than this, he could not effect; there was not a craven spirit among +our number. + +"Steadily!" said Arthur, in a low, collected tone; "less than five +minutes will bring us within hail of the ship." + +But the minutes seemed hours, amid such tremendous exertions, and such +intense anxiety. The sweat streamed from the faces of the rowers; they +gasped and panted for breath; the swollen veins stood out on their +foreheads. + +"Perhaps," cried Luerson, after a pause, "perhaps there is some one in +that boat who desires to save his life; whoever drops his oar shall not +be harmed; the rest die." + +A scornful laugh from Morton was the only answer to this tempting offer. + +Luerson now stooped for a moment and seemed to be groping for something +in the bottom of the boat. When he rose, it was with a musket or +fowling-piece in his hands, which he cocked, and, coming forward to the +bow, levelled towards us. + +"Once more," he cried, "and once for all, drop your oars, or I fire +among you." + +"I don't believe it is loaded," said Arthur, "or he would have used it +sooner." + +"I think it is Frazer's gun," said Morton, "and he fired both barrels +before they murdered him; there has been no time to reload it." + +The event showed the truth of these suspicions; for, upon seeing that +his threat produced no effect, Luerson resumed his seat in the bows, the +helm having been given to one of the men not at the oars. + +We were now close upon the point, and, as I glanced from our pursuers to +the ship, I began to breathe more freely. They had gained upon us; but +it was inch by inch, and the goal was now at hand. The long-boat, +though pulling eight oars, and those of greater length than ours, was a +clumsier boat than the yawl, and at present heavily loaded; we had +almost held our own with them thus far. + +But now Luerson sprang up once more in the bow of the long-boat, and +presented towards us the weapon with which he had a moment before +threatened us; and this time it was no idle menace. A puff of smoke +rose from the muzzle of the piece, and, just as the sharp report reached +our ears, Browne uttered a quick exclamation of pain, and let fall his +oar. + +For a moment all was confusion and alarm; but Browne, who had seized his +oar again almost instantly, declared that he was not hurt; that the ball +had merely grazed the skin of his arm; and he attempted to recommence +rowing; before, however, he had pulled half-a-dozen strokes, his right +hand was covered with the blood which streamed down his arm. + +I now insisted on taking his oar, and he took my place at the helm. + +While this change was being effected, our pursuers gained upon us +perceptibly. Every moment was precious. Luerson urged his men to +greater efforts; the turning point of the struggle was now at hand, and +the excitement became terrible. + +"Steer close in; it will save something in distance," gasped Morton, +almost choking for breath. + +"Not too close," panted Arthur; "don't get us aground." + +"There is no danger of that," answered Morton, "it is deep, off the +point." + +Almost as he spoke, a sharp, grating sound was heard, beneath the bottom +of the boat, and our progress was arrested with a suddenness that threw +Max and myself from our seats. We were upon a ledge of coral, which at +a time of less excitement we could scarcely have failed to have observed +and avoided, from the manner in which the sea broke upon it. + +A shout of mingled exultation and derision, as they witnessed this +disaster, greeted us from the long-boat, which was ploughing through the +water, but a little way behind us, and some twenty yards further out +from the shore. + +"It is all up," said Morton, bitterly, dropping his oar. + +"Back water! Her stern still swings free," cried Arthur, "the next +swell will lift her clear." + +We got as far aft as possible, to lighten the bows; a huge wave broke +upon the ledge, and drenched us with spray, but the yawl still grated +upon the coral. + +Luerson probably deemed himself secure of a more convenient opportunity, +at no distant period, to wreak his vengeance upon us: at any rate there +was no time for it now; he merely menaced us with his clenched fist, as +they swept by. Almost at the same moment a great sea came rolling +smoothly in, and, as our oars dipped to back water, we floated free: +then a few vigorous strokes carried us to a safe distance from the +treacherous shoal. + +"One effort more!" cried Arthur, as the mutineers disappeared behind the +point; "we are not yet too late to give them a warning, though it will +be but a short one." + +Again we bent to the oars, and in a moment we too had doubled the point, +and were in the wake of the long-boat. The ship lay directly before us, +and within long hailing distance. + +"Now, comrades, let us shout together, and try to make them understand +their danger," said Browne, standing up in the stern. + +"A dozen strokes more," said Arthur, "and we can do it with more certain +success." + +Luerson merely glanced back at us, as he once more heard the dash of our +oars; but he took no farther notice of us: the crisis was too close at +hand. + +On board the ship all seemed quiet. Some of the men were gathered +together on the starboard bow, apparently engaged in fishing; they did +not seem to notice the approach of the boats. + +"Now, then!" cried Arthur, at length, unshipping his oar, and springing +to his feet, "one united effort to attract their attention--all +together--now, then!" and we sent up a cry that echoed wildly across the +water, and startled the idlers congregated at the bows, who came running +to the side of the vessel nearest us. + +"We have got their attention; now hail them," said Arthur, turning to +Browne, who had a deep powerful voice; "tell them not to let the +long-boat board them." + +Browne put his hands to his mouth, and in tones that could have been +distinctly heard twice the distance, shouted--"Look-out for the +long-boat--don't let them board you--the men have killed the first +officer, and want to take the ship!" From the stir and confusion that +followed, it was clear that the warning was understood. + +But the mutineers were now scarcely twenty yards from the vessel, +towards which they were ploughing their way with unabated speed. The +next moment they were under her bows; just as their oars flew into the +air, we could hear a deep voice from the deck, sternly ordering them to +"keep off," and I thought that I could distinguish Captain Erskine +standing near the bowsprit. + +The mutineers gave no heed to the order; several of them sprang into the +chains, and Luerson among the rest. A fierce, though unequal struggle, +at once commenced. The captain, armed with a weapon which he wielded +with both hands, and which I took to be a capstan-bar, struck right and +left among the boarders as they attempted to gain the deck, and one, at +least of them, fell back with a heavy plunge into the water. But the +captain seemed to be almost unsupported; and the mutineers had nearly +all reached the deck, and were pressing upon him. + +"Oh, but this is a cruel sight!" said Browne, turning away with a +shudder. "Comrades, can we do nothing more?" + +Morton, who had been groping beneath the sail in the bottom of the boat +now dragged forth the cutlasses which Spot had insisted on placing there +when we went ashore. + +"Here are arms!" he exclaimed, "we are not such boys, but that we can +take a part in what is going on--let us pull to the ship!" + +"What say you!" cried Arthur, glancing inquiringly from one to another; +"we can't, perhaps, do much, but shall we sit here and see Mr Erskine +murdered, without _trying_ to help him!" + +"Friends, let us to the ship!" cried Browne, with deep emotion, "I am +ready." + +"And I!" gasped Max, pale with excitement, "we can but be killed." + +Can we hope to turn the scale of this unequal strife? shall we do more +than arrive at the scene of conflict in time to experience the vengeance +of the victorious mutineers?--such were the thoughts that flew hurriedly +through my mind. I was entirely unaccustomed to scenes of violence and +bloodshed, and my head swam, and my heart sickened, as I gazed at the +confused conflict raging on the vessel's deck, and heard the shouts and +cries of the combatants. Yet I felt an inward recoil against the +baseness of sitting an idle spectator of such a struggle. A glance at +the lion-hearted Erskine still maintaining the unequal fight, was an +appeal to every noble and generous feeling: it nerved me for the +attempt, and though I trembled as I grasped an oar, it was with +excitement and eagerness, not with fear. + +The yawl had hardly received the first impulse in the direction of the +ship, when the report of fire-arms was heard. + +"Merciful heavens!" cried Morton, "the captain is down! that fiend +Luerson has shot him!" + +The figure which I had taken for that of Mr Erskine, was no longer to +be distinguished among the combatants, some person was now dragged to +the side of the ship towards us, and thrown overboard; he sunk after a +feeble struggle; a triumphant shout followed, and then two men were seen +running up the rigging. + +"There goes poor Spot up to the foretop," said Max, pointing to one of +the figures in the rigging; "he can only gain time at the best but it +can't be that they'll kill him in cold blood." + +"Luerson is just the man to do it," answered Morton; "the faithful +fellow has stood by the captain, and that will seal his fate--look! it +is as I said," and I could see some one pointing, what was doubtless Mr +Frazer's fowling-piece, at the figure in the foretop. A parley seemed +to follow; as the result of which, the fugitive came down and +surrendered himself. The struggle now appeared to be over, and quiet +was once more restored. + +So rapidly had these events passed, and so stunning was their effect, +that it was some moments before we could collect our thoughts, or fully +realise our situation; and we sat, silent and bewildered, gazing toward +the ship. + +Max was the first to break silence; "And now, what's to be done?" he +said, "as to going aboard, that is of course out of the question: the +ship is no longer our home." + +"I don't know what we can do," said Morton, "except to pull ashore, and +stand the chance of being taken off by some vessel, before we starve." + +"Here is something better," cried Max eagerly, pointing out to sea; and, +looking in the direction indicated, we saw a large ship, with all her +sails set, steering directly for us, or so nearly so, as to make it +apparent that if she held on her present course, she must pass very near +to us. Had we not been entirely engrossed by what was taking place +immediately around us, we could not have failed to have seen her sooner, +as she must have been in sight a considerable time. + +"They have already seen her on board," said Morton, "and that accounts +for their great hurry in getting up anchor; they don't feel like being +neighbourly just now, with strange vessels." + +In fact, there was every indication on board of our own ship, of haste, +and eagerness to be gone. While some of the men were at the capstan, +getting up the anchor, others were busy in the rigging, and sail after +sail was rapidly spread to the breeze, so that by the time the anchor +was at the bows, the ship began to move slowly through the water. + +"They don't seem to consider us of much account anyway," said Max, "they +are going without so much as saying good-bye." + +"They may know more of the stranger than we do," said Arthur, "they have +glasses on board; if she should be an American man-of-war, their hurry +is easily explained." + +"I can't help believing that they see or suspect more, in regard to her, +than appears to us," said Morton, "or they would not fail to make an +attempt to recover the yawl." + +"It is rapidly getting dark," said Arthur, "and I think we had better +put up the sail, and steer for the stranger." + +"Right," said Morton, "for she may possibly tack before she sees us." + +Morton and myself proceeded to step the mast, and rig the sail; +meantime, Arthur got Browne's coat off, and examined and bandaged the +wound on his arm, which had been bleeding all the while profusely; he +pronounced it to be but a trifling hurt. A breeze from the south-east +had sprung up at sunset, and we now had a free wind to fill our sail, as +we steered directly out to sea to meet the stranger, which was still at +too great a distance to make it probable that we had been seen by her +people. + +It was with a feeling of anxiety and uneasiness, that I saw the faint +twilight fading away, with the suddenness usual in those latitudes, and +the darkness gathering rapidly round us. Already the east was wrapped +in gloom, and only a faint streak of light along the western horizon +marked the spot where the sun had so recently disappeared. + +"How suddenly the night has come upon us," said Arthur, who had been +peering through the dusk toward the approaching vessel, in anxious +silence; "O, for twenty minutes more of daylight! I fear that she is +about tacking." + +This announcement filled us all with dismay, and every eye was strained +towards her with intense and painful interest. + +Meantime, the breeze had freshened somewhat and we now had rather more +of it than we desired, as our little boat was but poorly fitted to +navigate the open ocean in rough weather. Johnny began to manifest some +alarm, as we were tossed like a chip from wave to wave, and occasionally +deluged with spray, by a sea bursting with a rude shock over our bow. I +had not even in the violent storm of the preceding week, experienced +such a sense of insecurity, such a feeling of helplessness, as now, when +the actual danger was comparatively slight. The waves seemed tenfold +larger and more threatening than when viewed from the deck of a large +vessel. As we sunk into the trough of the sea, our horizon was +contracted to the breadth of half-a-dozen yards, and we entirely lost +sight of the land, and of both ships. + +But it was evident that we were moving through the water with +considerable velocity, and there was encouragement in that, for we felt +confident that if the stranger should hold on her present course but a +little longer, we should be on board of her before our safety would be +seriously endangered by the increasing breeze. + +If, however, she were really tacking, our situation would indeed be +critical. A very few moments put a period to our suspense by confirming +Arthur's opinion, and our worst fears; the stranger had altered her +course, her yards were braced round, and she was standing further out to +sea. Still, however, there would have been a possibility of reaching +her, but for the failure of light, for she had not so far changed her +course, but that she would have to pass a point, which we could probably +gain before her. But now, it was with difficulty, and only by means of +the cloud of canvass she carried, that we could distinguish her through +the momently deepening gloom; and with sinking hearts we relinquished +the last hopes connected with her. Soon she entirely vanished from our +sight, and when we gazed anxiously around the narrow horizon that now +bounded our vision, sky and water alone met our view. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +AT SEA. + +A NIGHT OF GLOOM--MORTON'S NARRATIVE--VISIONARY TERRORS--AN ALARMING +DISCOVERY. + + "O'er the deep! o'er the deep! + Where the whale, and the shark, and the sword-fish sleep." + +Even in open day, the distance of a few miles would be sufficient to +sink the low shores of the island; and now that night had so suddenly +overtaken us, it might be quite near, without our being able to +distinguish it. + +We were even uncertain, and divided in opinion, as to the direction in +which it lay--so completely were we bewildered. The night was one of +deep and utter gloom. There was no moon; and not a single star shed its +feeble light over the wilderness of agitated waters, upon which our +little boat was tossing. Heavy, low-hanging clouds, covered the sky; +but soon, even these could no longer be distinguished; a cold, damp +mist, dense, and almost palpable to the touch, crept over the ocean, and +enveloped us so closely, that it was impossible to see clearly from one +end of the yawl to the other. + +The wind, however, instead of freshening, as we had feared, died +gradually away. For this, we had reason to be thankful; for though our +situation that night seemed dismal enough, yet how much more fearful +would it have been, if the rage of the elements, and danger of immediate +destruction, had been added to the other circumstances of terror by +which we were surrounded? + +As it was, however, the sea having gone down, we supposed ourselves to +be in no great or pressing peril. Though miserably uncomfortable, and +somewhat agitated and anxious, we yet confidently expected that the +light of morning would show us the land again. + +The terrible and exciting scenes through which we had so recently +passed, had completely exhausted us, and we were too much overwhelmed by +the suddenness of our calamity, and the novel situation in which we now +found ourselves, to be greatly disposed to talk. Johnny sobbed himself +asleep in Arthur's arms; and even Max's usual spirits seemed now to have +quite forsaken him. After the mast had been unstepped, and such +preparations as our circumstances permitted were made, for passing the +night comfortably, Morton related all that he knew of what had taken +place on shore, previous to the alarm which he had given. + +I repeat the narrative as nearly as possible in his own words, not +perhaps altogether as he related it on that night, for the circumstances +were not then favourable to a full and orderly account, but partly as I +afterwards, in various conversations, gathered the particulars from him. + +"You recollect," said he, "that we separated at the boats; Mr Frazer +and the rest of you, going along the shore towards the point, leaving +Browne declaiming Byron's Address to the Ocean, from the top of a coral +block, with myself and the breakers for an audience. Shortly +afterwards, I strolled off towards the interior, and left Browne lying +on the sand, with his pocket Shakespeare, where we found him, when we +reached the boats. I kept on inland, until the forest became so dense, +and was so overgrown with tangled vines and creeping plants, that I +could penetrate no farther in that direction. In endeavouring to +return, I got bewildered, and at length fairly lost, having no clear +notion as to the direction of the beach. The groves were so thick and +dark as to shut out the light almost entirely; and I could not get a +glimpse of the sun so as to fix the points of the compass. At last I +came to an opening, large enough to let in the light, and show which way +the shadows fell. Knowing that we had landed on the west side of the +island, I could now select my course without hesitation. It was getting +late in the afternoon, and I walked as fast as the nature of the ground +would allow, until I unexpectedly found myself at the edge of the grove, +east of the spring where the men were at work filling the breakers. The +moment I came in sight of them, I perceived that something unusual was +taking place. The first officer and Luerson were standing opposite each +other, and the men, pausing from their work, were looking on. As I +inferred, Mr Nichol had given some order, which Luerson had refused to +obey. Both looked excited, but no words passed between them after I +reached the place. There was a pause of nearly a minute, when Mr +Nichol advanced as if to lay hands on Luerson, and the latter struck him +a blow with his cooper's mallet, which he held in his hand, and knocked +him down. Before he had time to rise, Atoa, the Sandwich Islander, +sprang upon him, and stabbed him twice with his belt-knife. All this +passed so rapidly, that no one had a chance to interfere--" + +"Hark!" said Browne, interrupting the narration, "what noise is that? +It sounds like the breaking of the surf upon the shore." + +But the rest of us could distinguish no sound except the washing of the +waves against the boat. The eye was of no assistance in deciding +whether we were near the shore or not, as it was impossible to penetrate +the murky darkness, a yard in any direction. + +"We must be vigilant," said Arthur, "the land cannot be far-off, and we +may be drifted upon it before morning." + +After listening for some moments in anxious silence, we became satisfied +that Browne had been mistaken, and Morton proceeded. + +"Just as Atoa sprang upon Mr Nichol and stabbed him, Mr Knight, who +was the first to recover his presence of mind, seized the murderer, and +wrenched the knife from his hand, at the same time calling on the men to +secure Luerson; but no one stirred to do so. A part seemed confused and +undecided; while others appeared to me, to have been fully prepared for +what had taken place. One man stepped forward near Luerson, and +declared in a brutal and excited manner, that `Nichol was a bloody +tyrant, and had got what he deserved, and that no man could blame +Luerson for taking his revenge, after being treated as he had been.' +For a moment all was clamour and confusion; then Luerson approached Mr +Knight in a threatening manner, and bade him loose Atoa, instead of +which, he held his prisoner firmly with one hand, and warning Luerson +off with the other, called on the men to stand by their officers. Just +at this moment, Mr Frazer, with his gun on his shoulder, came out of +the grove from the side toward the shore, and to him Mr Knight eagerly +appealed for assistance in securing the murderers of Mr Nichol. +Pointing from the bleeding corpse at his feet, to Luerson, he +said--`There is the ringleader--shoot him through the head at once, and +that will finish the matter--otherwise we shall all be murdered--fire, I +will answer for the act?' + +"Frazer seemed to comprehend the situation of things at a glance. With +great presence of mind, he stepped back a pace, and bringing his gun to +his shoulder, called on Luerson to throw down his weapon, and surrender +himself, declaring that he would shoot the first man who lifted a hand +to assist him. His manner was such as to leave no doubt of his +sincerity, or his resolution. The men had no fire-arms, and were +staggered by the suddenness of the thing; they stood hesitating and +undecided. Mr Knight seized this as a favourable moment, and advanced +upon Luerson, with the intention of securing him, and the islander was +thus left free. At this moment I observed the man who had denounced Mr +Nichol, and justified Luerson, stealing round behind Frazer. I called +out to him at the top of my voice to warn him; but he did not seem to +hear. I looked for something which might serve me for a weapon; but +there was nothing, not so much as a broken bough within reach, and in +another instant, the whole thing was over. As Knight grappled with +Luerson, he dropped the knife which he had wrested from Atoa, his +intention evidently being to secure, and not to kill him. + +"Atoa immediately leaped forward and seized the knife, and had his arm +already raised to stab Mr Knight in the back, when Frazer shot him +dead. At almost the same instant, Luerson struck Mr Knight a +tremendous blow on the head with his mallet, which felled him to the +earth, stunned and lifeless. He next rushed upon Frazer, who had fairly +covered him with the muzzle of his piece, and would inevitably have shot +him, but just as he pulled the trigger, the man whom I had seen creeping +round behind him, sprang upon him, and deranged his aim; two or three of +the others, who had stood looking on, taking no part in the affair, now +interposed, and by their assistance Frazer was overpowered and secured. +Whether they murdered him or not, as Luerson afterwards declared, I do +not know. As soon as the struggle was over, the man who had seconded +Luerson so actively throughout, (the tall dark man who goes by the name +of `the Boatswain,') shouted out, `Now, then, for the ship!' `Yes, for +the ship!' cried Luerson, `though this has not come about just as was +arranged, and has been hurried on sooner than we expected; it is as well +so as any way, and must be followed up. There's no one aboard but the +captain, and four or five men and boys, all told: the landsmen are all +ashore, scattered over the island. We can take her without risk--and +then for a merry life at the islands!' + +"This revealed the designs of the mutineers, and I determined to +anticipate them if possible. As I started for the beach I was observed, +and they hailed me; but without paying any attention to their shouts, I +ran as fast, at least, as I ever ran before, until I came out of the +forest, near where you were standing." + +From the words of Luerson which Morton had heard, it was clear that the +mutiny had not been a sudden and unpremeditated act; and we had no doubt +that it had grown out of the difficulties at the Kingsmills, between him +and the unfortunate Mr Nichol. + +It was quite late before we felt any disposition to sleep; but +notwithstanding the excitement and the discomforts of our situation, we +began at length to experience the effects of the fatigue and anxiety +which we had undergone, and bestowing ourselves as conveniently as +possible about the boat, which furnished but slender accommodations for +such a number, we bade each other the accustomed "good night," and one +by one dropped asleep. + +Knowing that we could not be far from land, and aware of our liability +to be drifted ashore during the night, it had been decided to maintain a +watch. Arthur, Morton, and I had agreed to divide the time between us +as accurately as possible, and to relieve one another in turn. The +first watch fell to Arthur, the last to me, and, after exacting a +promise from Morton, that he would not fail to awaken me when it was +fairly my turn, I laid down upon the ceiling planks, close against the +side of the boat between which, and Browne, who was next me, there was +barely room to squeeze myself. + +It was a dreary night. The air was damp, and even chilly. The +weltering of the waves upon the outside of the thin plank against which +my head was pressed, made a dismal kind of music, and suggested vividly +how frail was the only barrier that separated us from the wide, dark +waste of waters, below and around. + +The heavy, dirge-like swell of the ocean, though soothing, in the +regularity and monotony of its sluggish motion, sounded inexpressibly +mournful. + +The gloom of the night, and the tragic scenes of the day, seemed to give +character to my dreams, for they were dark and hideous, and so terribly +vivid, that I several times awoke strangely agitated. + +At one time I saw Luerson, with a countenance of supernatural malignity, +and the expression of a fiend, murdering poor Frazer. At another, our +boat seemed drawn by some irresistible, but unseen power, to the verge +of a yawning abyss, and began to descend between green-glancing walls of +water, to vast depths, where undescribed sea-monsters, never seen upon +the surface, glided about in an obscurity that increased their +hideousness. Suddenly the feeble light that streamed down into the gulf +through the green translucent sea, seemed to be cut off; the liquid +walls closed above our heads; and we were whirled away, with the sound +of rushing waters, and in utter darkness. + +All this was vague and confused, and consisted of the usual "stuff that +dreams are made of." What followed, was wonderfully vivid and real: +every thing was as distinct as a picture, and it has left an indelible +impression upon my mind; there was something about it far more awful +than all the half-defined shapes and images of terror that preceded it. + +I seemed to be all alone, in our little boat, in the midst of the sea. +It was night--and what a night! not a breath of wind rippled the glassy +waters. There was no moon, but the sky was cloudless, and the stars +were out, in solemn and mysterious beauty. Every thing seemed +preternaturally still, and I felt oppressed by a strange sense of +loneliness; I looked round in vain for some familiar object, the sight +of which might afford me relief. But far, far as the eye could reach, +to the last verge of the horizon, where the gleaming sapphire vault +closed down upon the sea, stretched one wide, desolate, unbroken +expanse. I seemed to be isolated and cut off from all living things: + + "Alone--alone, all, all alone! + Alone on the wide, wide sea; + So lonely 'twas, that God himself + Scarce seemed there to be." + +And there was something in this feeling, and in the universal, +death-like silence, that was unutterably awful. I tried to pray--to +think of God as present even there--to think of Him as "Our Father"--as +caring for and loving his creatures--and thus to escape the desolating +sense of loneliness that oppressed me. But it was in vain; I could not +pray: there was something in the scene that mocked at faith, and seemed +in harmony with the dreary creed of the atheist. The horrible idea of a +godless universe came upon me, bidding me relinquish, as a fond +illusion, the belief in a Heavenly Father,-- + + "Who sees with equal eye, as Lord of all, + A hero perish, or a sparrow fall." + +Language cannot express the desolation of that thought. + +Then the scene changed once more. We were again on board the ship, and +in the power of the enraged mutineers, about to suffer whatever their +vengeance might impel them to inflict. Poor Spot was swinging, a livid +corpse, at one of the yard-arms. Browne was bound to the main-mast, +while Luerson and his fiendish crew were exhausting their ingenuity in +torturing him. The peculiar expression of his mild, open countenance, +distorted by pain, went to my heart, and the sound of that familiar and +friendly voice, now hoarse and broken, and quivering with agony, +thrilled me with horror. As he besought his tormentors to kill him at +once, I thought that I kneeled to Luerson, and seconded the entreaty-- +the greatest favour that could be hoped from him. The rest of us were +doomed to walk the plank. Morton was stern and silent; Max pale and +sorrowful; his arm was round my neck, and he murmured that life was +sweet, and that it was a hard and terrible thing to die--to die so! +Arthur, calm and collected, cheered and encouraged us; and his face +seemed like the face of an angel, as he spoke sweetly and solemnly, of +the goodness and the love of God, and bade us put our whole trust and +hope in Christ our Saviour. His earnest words and serene look, soothed +and strengthened us; we also became calm and almost resigned. There was +no abject fear, no useless cries, or supplications to our foes for +mercy; but the solemn sense of the awfulness of death, was mingled with +a sweet and sustaining faith in God, and Christ, and Immortality. Hand +in hand, like brothers, we were preparing to take the fearful plunge-- +when I started and awoke. + +Even the recollection of our real situation was insufficient to impair +the deep sense of relief which I experienced. My first impulse was to +thank God that these were but dreams; and if I had obeyed the next, I +should have embraced heartily each of my slumbering companions; for in +the first confusion of thought and feeling, my emotions were very much +what they would naturally have been, had the scenes of visionary terror, +in which we seemed to have just participated together, been real. + +Morton was at his post, and I spoke to him, scarcely knowing or caring +what I said. All I wanted, was to hear his voice, to revive the sense +of companionship, and so escape the painful impressions which even yet +clung to me. + +He said that he had just commenced his watch, Arthur having called him +but a few moments before. The night was still lowering and overcast, +but there was less wind and sea than when I first laid down. I proposed +to relieve him at once, but he felt no greater inclination to sleep than +myself and we watched together until morning. The two or three hours +immediately before dawn seemed terribly long. Just as the first grey +light appeared in the east, Arthur joined us. A dense volume of vapour +which rested upon the water, and contributed to the obscurity in which +we were enveloped, now gathered slowly into masses, and floated upward +as the day advanced, gradually clearing the prospect; and we kept +looking out for the island, in the momentary expectation of seeing it +loom up before us through the mist. But when, as the light increased, +and the fog rolled away, the boundaries of our vision rapidly enlarged, +and still no land could be seen, we began to feel seriously alarmed. A +short period of intense and painful anxiety followed, during which we +continued alternately gazing, and waiting for more light, and again +straining our aching eyes in every direction, and still in vain. + +At last it became evident that we had in some manner drifted completely +away from the island. The appalling conviction could no longer be +resisted. There we were, lost and helpless, on the open ocean, in our +chip of a boat, without provisions for a single day, or, to speak more +definitely, without a morsel of bread or a drop of water. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +THE CONSULTATION. + +OUT OF SIGHT OF LAND--SLENDER RESOURCES--WHAT'S TO BE DONE? + + "How rapidly, how rapidly, we ride along the sea! + The morning is all sunshine, the wind is blowing free; + The billows are all sparkling, and bounding in the light, + Like creatures in whose sunny veins, the blood is running bright." + +Morton alone still refused to relinquish the hope, that by broad +daylight, we should yet be able to make out the island. He persisted in +pronouncing it wholly incredible that we had made during the night, a +distance sufficient to sink the land, which was but three or four miles +off at the utmost, when we were overtaken by darkness; he could not +understand, he said, how such a thing was possible. + +Arthur accounted for it, by supposing that we had got into the track of +one of the ocean currents that exist in those seas, especially among the +islands, many of which run at the rate of from two to three miles an +hour. + +This seemed the more probable, from the fact, that we were to the west +of the island, when we lost sight of it, and that the great equatorial +current, which traverses the Pacific and Indian oceans, has a prevailing +westerly course, though among the more extensive groups and clusters of +islands, it is so often deflected hither and thither, by the obstacles +which it encounters, or turned upon itself, in eddies or +counter-currents, that no certain calculations can be made respecting +it. Morton, however, did not consider this supposition sufficient to +explain the difficulty. + +"I should judge," said he, "that in a clear day, such an island might be +seen fifteen or twenty miles, and we cannot have drifted so great a +distance." + +"It might perhaps be seen," said Arthur, "as far as that, from the +mast-head of a ship, or even from her deck, but not from a small boat +hardly raised above the surface of the water. At our present level, +eight or ten miles would be enough to sink it completely." + +At length, when it was broad day, and from the appearance of the eastern +sky, the sun was just about to rise, Morton stepped the mast and climbed +to the top, in the hope that from that additional elevation, slight as +it was, he might catch a glimpse of land. There was by this time light +enough, as he admitted, to see any thing that could be seen at all, and +after making a deliberate survey of our whole horizon, he was fully +convinced that we had drifted completely away from the island. "I give +it up," he said, as he slid down the mast, "we are at sea, beyond all +question." + +Presently Max awoke. He cast a quick, surprised look around, and at +first seemed greatly shocked. He speedily recovered himself, however, +and after another, and closer, scrutiny of the horizon, thought that he +detected an appearance like that of land in the south. For a moment +there was again the flutter of excited hope, as every eye was turned +eagerly in that direction; but it soon subsided. A brief examination +satisfied us all, that what we saw, was but a low bank of clouds lying +against the sky. + +"This really begins to look serious," said I; "what are we to do?" + +"It strikes me," replied Morton, "that we are pretty much relieved from +the necessity of considering that question; our only part for the +present seems to be a passive one." + +"I can't fully persuade myself that this is real," said Max; "it half +seems like an ugly dream, from which we should awake by-and-by, and draw +a long breath at the relief of finding it no more than a dream." + +"We are miserably provisioned for a sea voyage," said Morton; "but I +believe the breaker is half full of water; without that we should indeed +be badly off." + +"There is not a drop in it," said Arthur, shaking his head, and he +lifted the breaker and shook it lightly--it was quite empty. + +He now proceeded to force open the locker, in the hope of finding them +something that might be serviceable to us; but its entire contents +consisted of a coil of fine rope, some pieces of rope-yarn, an empty +quart-bottle, and an old and battered hatchet-head. + +Meanwhile, Browne, without a trace of anxiety upon his upturned +countenance, and Johnny, who nestled close beside him, continued to +sleep soundly, in happy unconsciousness of our alarming situation. + +"Nothing ever interferes with the soundness of Browne's sleep, or the +vigour of his appetite," said Max, contemplating his placid slumbers +with admiration. "I should be puzzled to decide whether sleeping, +eating, or dramatic recitation, is his forte; it certainly lies between +the three." + +"Poor fellow!" said Morton, "from present appearances, and the state of +our supplies, he will have to take it all out in sleeping, for some time +to come, as it is to be presumed he'll hardly feel like spouting." + +"One would think that what happened yesterday, and the condition of +things as we left them last night, would be enough to disturb one's +nerves somewhat; yet you see how little it affects him--and I now +predict that the first thing he will say on opening his eye; will be +about the means of breaking his long fast." + +"I don't understand how you can go on in that strain, Max," said Arthur, +looking up in a surprised manner, and shaking his head disapprovingly. + +"Why, I was merely endeavouring to do my share towards keeping our +spirits up; but I suppose any spirits got up under the present +circumstances, must be somewhat forced, and as my motives don't seem to +be properly appreciated, I will renounce the unprofitable attempt." + +The sun rose in a clear sky, and gave promise of a hot day. There was, +however, a cool and refreshing breeze, that scattered the spray from the +foaming ridges of the waves, and occasionally showered us, not +unpleasantly, with the fine liquid particles. A sea, breaking over our +bow, dashed a bucket-full of water into Browne's face, and abruptly +disturbed his slumbers. + +"Good morning, comrades!" said he, sitting up, and looking about him +with a perplexed and bewildered air. "But how is this? Ah! I +recollect it all now. So then, we are really out of sight of land!" + +"There is no longer any doubt of that," said Arthur, "and it is now time +for us to decide what we shall do--our chance of falling in with a ship +will be quite as good, and that of reaching land will of course be much +better, if, instead of drifting like a log upon the water, we put up our +sail, and steer in almost any direction; though I think there is a +choice." + +"Of course there is a choice," said Morton; "the island _cannot_ be at +any great distance; and the probability of our being able to find it +again is so much greater than that of making any other land, that we +ought to steer in the direction in which we have good reason to think it +lies--that is, to the east." + +"The wind, for the last twelve hours, has been pretty nearly south," +observed Arthur, "and has probably had some effect upon our position; we +had better, therefore, steer a little south of east, which, with this +breeze, will be easy sailing." + +To this all assented, and the sail was hoisted, and the boat's head put +in the direction agreed upon, each of us, except Johnny, sailing and +steering her in turn. There was quite as much wind as our little craft +could sail with to advantage, and without danger. As it filled her bit +of canvass, she careered before it, leaping and plunging from wave to +wave, in a manner that sometimes seemed perilous. The bright sky above +us, the blue sea gleaming in the light of morning, over which we sped; +the dry, clear atmosphere, (now that the sun was up, and the mist +dissipated), the fresh breeze, without which we must have suffered +intensely from the heat; together with our rapid and bounding motion, +had an exhilarating effect, in spite of the gloomy anticipations that +suggested themselves. + +"After all," said Max, "why need we take such a dismal view of the +matter? We have a fine staunch little boat, a good breeze, and islands +all around us. Besides, we are in the very track of the beche de mer, +and sandal-wood traders. It would be strange indeed, if we should fail +to meet some of them soon. In fact, if it were not for thinking of poor +Frazer, and of the horrible events of yesterday, (which, to be sure, are +enough to make one sad), I should be disposed to look upon the whole +affair; as a sort of holiday adventure--something to tell of when we get +home, and to talk over pleasantly together twenty years hence." + +"If we had a breaker of water, and a keg of biscuit," said Morton, "and +could then be assured of fair weather for a week, I might be able to +take that view of it; as it is, I confess, that to me, it has any thing +but the aspect of a holiday adventure." + +When Johnny awoke, Arthur endeavoured to soothe his alarm, by explaining +to him that we had strong hopes of being able to reach the island again, +and mentioning the various circumstances which rendered such a hope +reasonable. The little fellow, did not, however, seem to be as much +troubled as might have been expected. He either reposed implicit +confidence in the resources, or the fortunes, of his companions, or +else, did not at all realise the perils to which we were exposed. But +this could not last long. + +That which I knew Arthur had been painfully anticipating, came at last. +Johnny, who had been asking Morton a multitude of questions as to the +events of the previous day, suddenly said that he was very thirsty, and +asked in the most unsuspecting manner for a drink of water. When he +learned that the breaker was empty, and that we had not so much as a +drop of water with us, some notion of our actual situation seemed to +dawn upon him, and he became, all at once, grave and silent. + +Hour after hour dragged slowly on, until the sun was in the zenith, with +no change for the better in our affairs. It was now clear that we must +give up the hope of reaching the island which we had left, for it was +certain that we had sailed farther since morning than the boat could +possibly have been drifted during the night, by the wind, or the +current, or both combined. Our calculations at the outset must +therefore have been erroneous, and we had not been sailing in the right +direction. If so, it was too late to correct the mistake; we could not +regain our starting-point, in order to steer from it another course. We +now held a second consultation. + +Although we had but a general notion of our geographical position, we +knew that we were in the neighbourhood of scattered groups of low coral +islands. From the Kingsmills we were to have sailed directly for +Canton, and Max, Morton, and myself, would, before now, in all +probability, have commenced our employment in the American factory +there, but for Captain Erskine's sudden resolution to take the +responsibility of returning to the Samoan Group, with the double object +of rescuing the crew of the wrecked barque, and completing his cargo, +which, according to the information received from the master of the +whaler, there would be no difficulty in doing. From Upolu, we had +steered a north-westerly course, and it was on the fourth or fifth day +after leaving it, that we had reached the island where the mutiny took +place, and which Mr Erskine claimed as a discovery of his own. Its +latitude and longitude had of course been calculated, but none of us +learned the result, or at any rate remembered it. We knew only, that we +were at no great distance from the Kingsmills, and probably to the +south-west of them. + +Arthur was confident, from conversations had with Mr Frazer, and from +the impressions left on his mind by his last examination of the charts, +that an extensive cluster of low islands, scattered over several degrees +of latitude, lay just to the south-east of us. + +It was accordingly determined to continue our present course as long as +the wind should permit, which there was reason to fear might be but a +short time, as easterly winds are the prevailing ones within the +tropics, as near the line as we supposed ourselves to be. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +THE CALM. + +THE SECOND WATCH--AN EVIL OMEN--THE WHITE SHARK--A BREAKFAST LOST. + + "All in a hot and copper sky, + The bloody sun, at noon, + Right up above the mast did stand, + No bigger than the moon." + +During the remainder of the day the wind continued fair, and we held on +our course, steering by the sun, and keeping a vigilant look-out in +every direction. But the night set in, and we had yet seen no +appearance of land, no speck in the distance which could be mistaken for +a sail, not even a wandering sea-bird or a school of flying-fish-- +nothing to break the dead monotony of the briny waste we were +traversing. As I sat at the helm, taking my turn in sailing the boat, +and watched the sun go down, and saw the darkness gathering over the +sea, a feeling nearly akin to despair took possession of me. In vain I +strove to take an encouraging and hopeful view of our circumstances. +The time within which relief must come, in order to be effectual, was so +short, that I could not help feeling that the probabilities were +strongly against us. I could not shut my eyes to the fact, that +dangers, imminent and real, such as we had read and talked of, without +ever half realising or dreaming that they could one day fall to our own +lot, now pressed upon us, and threatened us close at hand. I knew that +those fearful tales of shipwreck and starvation, were only too true-- +that men, lost at sea like ourselves, had pined day after day, without a +morsel of food or a drop of water, until they had escaped, in stupor or +delirium, all consciousness of suffering. And worse even than this--too +horrible to be thought or spoken of--I knew something of the dreadful +and disgusting expedients to prolong life, which have sometimes been +resorted to by famishing wretches. I had read how the pangs of hunger, +and the still fiercer torments of thirst, had seemed to work a dire +change even in kind and generous natures, making men wolfish, so that +they slew and fed upon each other. Now, all that was most revolting and +inhuman, in what I had heard or read of such things, rose vividly before +me, and I shuddered at the growing probability that experiences like +these might be reserved for us. "Why not for us," I thought, "as well +as for the many others, the records of whose terrible fate I have +perused with scarcely more emotion than would be excited by a tale of +imaginary suffering; and the still greater number whose story has never +been recorded? We have already been conducted many steps on this +fearful path, and no laws of nature will be stayed, no ordinary rules of +God's dealing violated, on our behalf. No inevitable necessity requires +the complexion of our future, to correspond and harmonise with that of +our past lives. This feeling, which seems to assure me that such things +cannot happen to us, is but one of the cheats and illusions of a +shrinking and self-pitying spirit. All the memories that cluster about +a happy childhood, all the sweet associations of home and kindred, +afford no guarantee against the new and bitter experiences which seem +about to open up upon us." + +Such were the thoughts that began to disquiet my own mind. As to my +companions, Morton seemed less anxious and excited than any of the +others. During the evening he speculated in a cool matter-of-fact +manner, upon our chances of reaching an island, or meeting a ship, +before being reduced to the last extremity. He spoke of the number of +traders that frequent the islands, for tortoise-shell, mother-of-pearl, +sandal-wood, beche de mer, etcetera; the whalers that come in pursuit of +the cachelot, or sperm-whale; the vessels that resort there for fruit, +or supplies of wood and water; the vast number of islands scattered +through these seas; from all which he finally concluded, that the +chances were largely in our favour. If, however, we should fail of +immediate relief in this shape, he thought it probable that we should +have opportunities of catching fish, or sea-birds, and so prolonging +life for many days. He talked the whole matter over in such a calm, +sober, unexcited manner, furnishing facts and reasons for every opinion, +that I felt some confidence in his conclusions. + +Browne, though quite composed and self-possessed, had, from the moment +when he discovered that we were out of sight of land, taken the most +serious view of our situation. He seemed to have made up his mind for +the worst, and was abstracted, and indisposed to converse. I knew that +the anxiety which Arthur evinced, was not mainly on his own account. It +did not withdraw his attention from what was passing, or diminish his +interest in it. Far from being gloomy or abstracted, he was active and +watchful, and spoke with heartiness and cheerfulness. His mental +disquietude only appeared, in a certain softness and tremor of his +voice, especially when speaking to Johnny, who, as the night drew on, +asked him over and over again, at short intervals, "Don't you think, +Arthur, that we shall certainly find land to-morrow?" This was truly +distressing. + +As to Max, his feelings rose and fell capriciously, and without any +apparent cause; he was sanguine or depressed, not from a consideration +of all our circumstances, and a favourable or unfavourable conclusion +drawn therefrom; but according as this view or that, for the moment, +impressed his mind. He rendered no reasons for his hopes or his fears. +At one moment, you would judge from his manner and conversation that we +were indeed out upon some "holy day excursion," with no serious danger +impending over us; the next, without any thing to account for the +change, he would appear miserably depressed and wretched. + +Soon after sunset the moon rose--pale and dim at first, but shining out +with a clearer and brighter radiance, as the darkness increased. The +wind held steadily from the same quarter, and it was determined to +continue through the night, the arrangement for taking charge of the +sailing of the boat, in turn. Browne and Max insisted on sharing +between themselves the watch for the entire night, saying that they had +taken no part in that of the one previous, and that it would be useless +to divide the twelve hours of darkness into more than two watches. This +was finally agreed upon, the wind being so moderate that the same person +could steer the yawl and manage the sail without difficulty. + +Before lying down, I requested Max, who took the first turn, to awake me +at the same time with Browne, a part of whose watch I intended to share. +I fell asleep, looking up at the moon, and the light clouds sailing +across the sky, and listening to the motion of the water beneath the +boat. At first I slumbered lightly, without losing a sort of dreamy +consciousness, so that I heard Max humming over to himself fragments of +tunes, and odd verses of old songs, and even knew when he shifted his +position in the stern, from one side to the other. At length I must +have fallen into a deep sleep: I do not know how long it had lasted, (it +seemed to me but a short time), when I was aroused by an exclamation, +from Max, as I at first supposed; but on sitting up I saw that Browne +was at the helm, while Max was sleeping at my side. On perceiving that +I was awake, Browne, from whom the exclamation had proceeded, pointed to +something in the water, just astern. Following the direction of his +finger with my eye, I saw, just beneath the surface, a large +ghastly-looking white shark, gliding stealthily along, and apparently +following the boat. Browne said that he had first noticed it about half +an hour before, since which time it had steadily followed us, +occasionally making a leisurely circuit round the boat, and then +dropping astern again. A moment ago, having fallen into a doze at the +helm, and awaking with a start, he found himself leaning over the +gunwale, and the shark just at his elbow. This had startled him, and +caused the sudden exclamation by which I had been aroused. I shuddered +at his narrow escape, and I acknowledge that the sight of this hideous +and formidable creature, stealing along in our wake, and manifesting an +intention to keep us company, caused me some uneasy sensations. He swam +with his dorsal fin almost at the surface, and his broad nose scarcely +three feet from the rudder. His colour rendered him distinctly visible. + +"What a spectre of a fish it is," said Browne, "with his pallid, +corpse-like skin, and noiseless motion; he has no resemblance to any of +the rest of his kind, that I have ever seen. You know what the sailors +would say, if they should see him dogging us in this way; Old +Crosstrees, or Spot, would shake their heads ominously, and set us down +as a doomed company." + +"Aside from any such superstitious notions, he is an unpleasant and +dangerous neighbour, and we must be circumspect while he is prowling +about." + +"It certainly won't do to doze at the helm," resumed Browne; "I consider +that I have just now had a really narrow escape. I was leaning quite +over the gunwale; a lurch of the boat would have thrown me overboard, +and then there would have been no chance for me." + +There would not, in fact, have been the shadow of a chance. + +"Even as it was," resumed he, "if this hideous-looking monster had been +as active and vigilant as some of his tribe, it would have fared badly +with me. I have heard of their seizing persons standing on the shore, +where the water was deep enough to let them swim close in; and Spot +tells of a messmate of his, on one of his voyages in a whaler, who was +carried off, while standing entirely out of water, on the carcass of a +whale, which he was assisting in cutting up, as it lay alongside the +ship. The shark threw himself upon the carcass, five or six yards from +where the man was busy;--worked himself slowly along the slippery +surface, until within reach of his victim; knocked him off into the +water, and then sliding off himself, seized and devoured him." + +Picking my way carefully among the sleepers, who covered the bottom of +the yawl, I sat down beside Browne in the stern, intending to share the +remainder of his watch. It was now long past midnight; fragments of +light clouds were scattered over the sky, frequently obscuring the moon; +and the few stars that were visible, twinkled faintly with a cold and +distant light. The Southern Cross, by far the most brilliant +constellation of that hemisphere, was conspicuous among the clusters of +feebler luminaries. Well has it been called "the glory of the southern +skies." Near the zenith, and second only to the Cross in brilliancy, +appeared the Northern Crown, consisting of seven large stars, so +disposed as to form the outline of two-thirds of an oval. Of the +familiar constellations of the northern hemisphere, scarcely one was +visible, except Orion, and the Pleiades. + +At length the moon descended behind a bank of silvery clouds, piled up +along the horizon. The partial obscurity that ensued, only added to the +grandeur of the midnight scene, as we sat gazing silently abroad upon +the confused mass of swelling waters, stretching away into the gloom. +But if the scene was grand, it was also desolate; we two were perhaps +the only human beings, for many hundreds of miles, who looked forth upon +it. Our companions were wrapped in unconsciousness, and their deep and +regular breathing attested the soundness of their slumbers. As the +light failed more and more, and the shadows deepened, the sea began to +assume a beautiful and striking appearance, gleaming in places with a +bluish lambent light, and exhibiting, where the water was most agitated, +large luminous patches. Thin waves of flame curled over our bow, and +whenever a sea broke upon it, it seemed as though the boat was plunging +through surges of fire. A long brilliant line, thickly strewn on each +side, with little globules of the colour of burning coals, marked our +wake. + +But the shark, which still followed close behind our keel, presented by +far the most singular and striking spectacle. He seemed to be +surrounded by a luminous medium; and his nose, his dorsal and side fins, +and his tail, each had attached to them slender jets of phosphoric fire. +Towards morning this brilliant appearance began to fade, and soon +vanished altogether. By this time I found it difficult to keep my eyes +open longer, and leaving Browne to finish his watch alone, I resumed my +place on the ceiling planks, and in spite of the hardness of my bed, +which caused every bone in my body to ache, soon slept soundly. When I +again awoke, it was long after sunrise, and we were lying completely +becalmed. A school of large fish were pursuing their gambols at a short +distance, and Browne was rowing cautiously toward them, while Arthur and +Morton stood prepared to attack them with their cutlasses as soon as we +should get within striking distance. We had got almost among them, and +were just beginning to congratulate ourselves upon their apparent +indifference to our approach, when they all at once scattered in every +direction, with manifest signs of terror. The cause of this sudden +movement was not long concealed; a brace of sharks rose in their very +midst; one was visible but for a moment as he rolled over to seize his +prey; the other, less successful in securing a victim, shot past us, +like an arrow, in pursuit of a large division of the fugitives. Soon +after, both of them were seen playing around the boat. They belonged to +the species known as the tiger shark, and bore no resemblance to our +ghastly visitor of the preceding evening. By the consternation which +their sudden appearance had produced among the lesser fishes, they had +in all probability robbed us of our breakfast. Morton, with his +characteristic enterprise, suggested an attack upon one of them by way +of reprisals; but before any measures for that purpose could be taken, +they disappeared, leaving us with no other resource than to await our +fate with such patience and resignation as we could command. The wind +having entirely failed, there was nothing that we could do to change our +situation--absolutely nothing. This forced inaction, with no occupation +for mind or body, no object of effort, contributed to enhance whatever +was painful in our condition, by leaving us to brood over it. The dead +calm which had fallen upon the sea, seemed all that was necessary to +complete our misery. We were all stiff and sore, from the exceedingly +uncomfortable sleeping accommodations of the last two nights; but this +was a comparatively trifling evil. Johnny had a severe cold, his eyes +were inflamed and bloodshot, and he exhibited also strong symptoms of +fever. Nevertheless, silent and uncomplaining, he came and sat down +quietly by the side of Arthur in the stern. + +As the day advanced, the heat became dreadful. We had not suffered much +from it the day before, on account of the fresh breeze which had +prevailed; but now, not a breath of air was stirring, and the glassy sea +reflected back upon us the scorching rays of the sun, with increased +intensity. Towards noon, it exceeded any thing I had ever experienced. +The whole arch of the heavens glowed with a hot and coppery glare. It +seemed as though instead of one sun, there were ten thousand, covering +all the sky, and blending their rays into a broad canopy of fire. The +air was like that of an oven: the water had no coolness, no refreshing +quality; it was tepid and stagnant: no living thing was to be seen near +the surface, for life could not be sustained there; and the fishes, +great and small, kept themselves in the cooler depths, far below. +Almost stifled by the heat, we began to experience the first real and +extreme suffering that most of us had ever known. At Arthur's +suggestion, we disengaged the now useless sail from the mast, and +contrived a kind of awning, by fastening two of the oars upright in the +boat, with the mast extending between them, throwing the sail over the +latter, and securing the ends to the gunwales. This, although it could +not protect us from the sultry and suffocating air, warded off the +blistering beams of the sun, and during the greater part of the day, we +lay crouched beneath it, a miserable company; one or another of us +crawling out occasionally, to take a survey. Towards the close of the +afternoon, my sufferings from thirst grew absolutely intolerable, and +amounted to torment. My blood became fevered; my brain seemed on fire; +my shrunk and shrivelled tongue, was like a dry stick in my mouth. The +countenances of my companions, their bloodshot eyes, and cracked and +swollen lips, shewed what they were undergoing. Johnny lay in the +bottom of the boat with his eyes shut enduring all, with as much +fortitude as the rest of us, except that now and then a half suppressed +moan escaped him. + +It was quite clear that relief, in order to be of any avail, must be +speedy. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +A CHANGE. + +A WELCOME PERIL--THE ALBATROSS AND THEIR PREY--A TROPICAL THUNDER-STORM. + + "Eternal Providence, exceeding thought, + Where none appears, can make itself a way." + +While lying crouched under the sail, almost gasping for breath, near the +middle, as I suppose, of that terrible afternoon, I all at once became +sensible of a perceptible cooling of the atmosphere, and a sudden +decrease of light. Looking out to discover the cause of this change, I +perceived that the sky was overcast, and that a light, unsteady breeze +from the north-west had sprung up. Knowing that within the tropics, and +near the line, winds from that quarter frequently precede a storm, and +that great extremes of heat are often succeeded by violent gales, I +observed, with apprehension, dark masses of clouds gathering in the +north. It would not require a tempest to insure our destruction; for +our little craft could not live a moment, even in such a gale as would +be attended by no danger to a staunch ship with plenty of sea room. + +The temperature had fallen many degrees, though the wind was still +moderate and unsteady, ranging from west to north-east. The sun was +completely obscured, so that the awning was no longer needed, and we +pulled it down, in order the more fully to enjoy the breeze, and the +delicious coolness of the darkened atmosphere, to the gratefulness of +which, not even our awakening apprehensions could render us insensible. + +While observing the strange appearance of the sky, and like preparations +for a storm which seemed to be going on in the north and west, Morton +espied a troop of Flying-fish a hundred yards or so to windward. +Fluttering feebly a short distance in the air, they would drop into the +sea, soon emerging, however, for a fresh flight; thus, alternately +swimming and flying, they were steadily approaching; and from their +rapid and confused motions, it was evident that they were hard pressed +by some of the numerous and greedy persecutors of their helpless race; +from whom they were struggling to escape. Presently, a glittering +Albatross shot from the water, close in the tract of the fugitives, +descending again in the graceful curve peculiar to his active and +beautiful, but rapacious tribe. Another and another followed, their +golden scales flashing in the light, as they leaped clear of the water, +sometimes two or three together. We hastily made ready to attack both +pursuers and pursued, the instant they should come within reach. The +course of the chase brought them directly towards us, until the hunted +fishes fell in a glittering shower, so near, that I feared they might +pass under the boat before rising again; but they came to the surface +close beside us, and as they fluttered into the air, we knocked down six +or seven of them, and caught a number more, that dropped into the boat. +Morton and Max, ambitious of larger game, devoted their attention to the +Albatross, and slashed and thrust furiously, at such as came within +reach of their cutlasses; which many of them did. Some darted under the +boat, instead of sheering round it; and one enormous fellow, +miscalculating in his haste our draught of water, must have scraped all +the fins off his back against the keel, as he performed this manoeuvre; +for the shock of the contact, caused the yawl to tremble from stem to +stern. But such was the marvellous celerity of their movements, that +though they came within easy striking distance, all the hostile +demonstrations of Max and Morton proved futile. + +The Flying-fish which had been taken, were divided and apportioned with +scrupulous exactness, and devoured with very little ceremony. The only +dressing or preparation bestowed upon them, consisted simply in +stripping off the long shining pectoral fins, or wings, (they serve as +both), without paying much attention to such trifling matters as scales, +bones, and the lesser fins. Max, indeed, began to nibble rather +fastidiously at first, at this raw food, which a minute before had been +so full of life and activity; but his appetite improved as he proceeded, +and he at last so far got the better of his scruples, as to leave +nothing of his share except the tails, and very little even of those. +Hunger, in fact, made this repast, which would have been revolting under +ordinary circumstances, not only acceptable, but positively delicious. + +Meantime, the dark mass of clouds in the north had extended itself, and +drawn nearer to us. Another tempest seemed to be gathering in the west, +while in the south, a violent thunder-storm appeared to be actually +raging: the lightning in that quarter was vivid and almost incessant, +but we could hear no thunder, the storm being still at a considerable +distance. + +Immediately around us all was yet comparatively calm, but the heavy +clouds, gathering on three sides, seemed gradually converging towards a +common centre; a short abrupt cross sea, began to form, and the water +assumed a glistening inky hue. There was something peculiar and +striking in the appearance of the clouds surrounding us; they seemed to +rest upon the surface of the ocean, and towered upward like a dark wall +to the skies. Their upper extremities were torn and irregular, and long +narrow fragments, like giant arms, streamed out from the main body, and +extended over us, as if beckoning each other to a nearer approach, and +threatening to unite their gloomy array overhead, and shut out the light +of day. As they drew nearer to one another, the lightning began to dart +from cloud to cloud, while the most terrific peals of thunder that I +have ever heard, rolled and reverberated on every side. We appeared to +be surrounded by storms, some of which were very near, for the deep +crash of the thunder, followed close upon the vivid lightnings that +flashed in the south and west. Still the narrow space of sky directly +overhead was clear, and the war of elements which was raging all around +did not extend to our immediate neighbourhood. Against the dark sides +of the cloudy pavilion that encompassed us, the sharp, zigzag lines of +lightning, as they ran from the sky to the ocean, shone out with a +blinding glare. A single half-hour had sufficed to change every thing +about us. The brazen, burning sky, was transformed into a cold, clear +expanse, of a bluish black. The sea, no longer stagnant and glassy, was +fretted by short inky waves, with creamy crests, that gave it altogether +a new aspect. The air was now fresh and cool, and the wind rising and +falling fitfully, at one moment scarcely lifted our hair or stirred our +garments, and the next, tore off the entire crests of waves, and +scattered them over us in a shower of spray. For nearly an hour we +remained apprehensive that the wind might increase to a gale. At the +end of about that time, it came gradually round to the south-east, +growing steady, but by no means violent, and the storms moved off in a +westerly direction. One heavy cloud, as it slowly passed over toward +that quarter, discharged a grateful shower of rain. We hastily spread +the sail, and some of our garments, to gather the precious drops. The +shower lasted only a few minutes, but during that time it rained +briskly. I never shall forget my sensations as I stood with face +upturned, while the big drops, more delicious than ambrosia, came +pelting down. It was far better and more strengthening than food, or +any medicine or cordial could have been, and seemed to infuse fresh life +into us all. When it was over, we wrung out from the saturated canvass, +and from our clothing, water enough to mitigate for the time, though by +no means to satisfy, the raging thirst from which we had suffered so +intensely. + +Arthur had at first taken out of the locker the large bottle which had +been found there, in the hope of being able to hoard up a small supply +for the future; but there was not a drop of surplus for such a purpose, +and he was obliged to put it back again empty as before. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +TOKENS OF LAND. + +THE CENTRE OF THE SPHERE--THE MYSTERIOUS SOUND--THE CONFLAGRATION. + + "Thou glorious sea! before me gleaming, + Oft wilt thou float in sunset pride, + And often shall I hear in dreaming, + Thy resonance at evening tide!" + +At sunset every trace of the storms by which we had been so recently +encompassed had vanished: the sky, except along the western horizon, was +without a cloud: not a breath of wind ruffled the sea, and we lay once +more completely becalmed. + +This was our third night at sea; though to me, at least, it seemed that +many days had passed since the mutiny and the immediately succeeding +occurrences. It is a night which I shall not soon forget; the +impression of its almost unearthly beauty is still fresh and vivid, and +haunts me like a vision of fairy land. At this moment if I but close my +eyes, the whole scene rises before me with the distinctness of a +picture; though one would naturally suppose that persons situated as we +then were, could scarcely have been in a state of mind congenial to the +reception of such impressions. + +The transition from early twilight to the darkness of night was +beautiful beyond description. The array of clouds in the west just +after sunset; their forms, arrangement, and colours; with the manner in +which they blended and melted into one another, composed a spectacle, of +the magnificence of which, neither language, nor the art of the painter, +can convey any adequate idea. Along the edge of the horizon stretched a +broad tract of the deepest crimson, reflecting far upon the waters, a +light that gave them the appearance of an ocean of blood. Above this +was a band of vivid flame colour: then one of a clear translucent green, +perfectly peculiar, unlike that of any leaf or gem, and of surpassing +delicacy and beauty. This gradually melted, through many fine +gradations, into a sea of liquid amber, so soft and golden, that the +first large stars of evening, floating in its transparent depths, could +scarcely be distinguished, as they twinkled mildly, amid the flood of +kindred radiance. A narrow streak of pearly blue bounded this amber sea +with its islands of light, and divided it from the deeper blue of the +wide vault above. During the earlier part of this glorious display, the +eastern sky, as if in rivalry of the splendour of the opposite quarter +of the heavens, was spanned by two concentric rainbows, describing +complete semi-circles, with their bases resting upon the sea. In the +smaller and interior bow, all the colours were beautifully distinct; in +the outer and larger one, they were less brilliant, and arranged in an +order the reverse of that which is usual, the violet being the lowest +instead of the red. The rainbows vanished with the sun, and soon +afterwards the fiery glow in the west began to fade. But the scene only +changed its character, without losing any of its beauty. So smooth was +the sea on that night that the whole dome of the sky, with every sailing +cloudflake, and every star, was perfectly reflected in it. Until the +moon rose, the line where the sky joined the ocean was indistinctly +defined, and the two were so blended together, that we actually seemed +suspended in the centre of a vast sphere; the heavens, instead of +terminating at the horizon, extended, spangled with stars, on every +side--below, as well as above, and around. The illusion was wonderfully +perfect; you almost held your breath as you glanced downward, and could +hardly refrain from starting nervously, so strong and bewildering was +the appearance of hanging poised in empty space. + +Johnny, who had been sitting for a long time with his hands supporting +his head, and his elbows resting upon Arthur's knee, gazing out upon the +ocean, suddenly looked up into his face, and said-- + +"Arthur, I want you to tell me truly--do you still believe that we shall +be saved--do you hope so now, as you did yesterday, or do you think that +we must perish!" + +"Do you suppose that I would try to deceive you, Johnny," said Arthur, +"that you ask me so earnestly to tell you truly?" + +"No, but I feared you would not, perhaps, tell me the worst, thinking +that I could not bear it: and I suspected to-night, that you spoke more +cheerfully than you felt on my account. But I am not afraid, dear +Arthur, to know the truth; and do not hide it from me! I will try to +bear patiently, with you, and with the rest whatever comes upon us." + +"I would not deceive you about such a matter, Johnny. I should not +think it right, though you are so young. But I can know nothing +certainly. We are in the hands of God. I have told you all the reasons +we have to hope; we have the same reasons still. Only a few hours ago, +the sea supplied us with food, and the clouds with drink: why may we not +hope for future supplies according to our need? I think we yet have +more reason to hope than to despair." + +"Did you ever know, or hear of such a thing," inquired Johnny, after a +pause, "as a company of boys, like us, starving at sea?" + +"I do not remember that I have, under circumstances at all similar to +ours," answered Arthur. + +"It is too dreadful to believe! Is not God, our Father in heaven? He +will not surely let us perish so miserably." + +"_Yes_, Johnny," said Arthur gently, but earnestly, "God is our heavenly +Father; but we must not make our belief in his love and goodness, a +ground of confidence that any suffering, however terrible, shall not +befall us. The young suffer and die, as well as the old; the good, as +well as the bad. Not only the strong martyrs, who triumphed while they +were tortured, but feeble old men, and little children, have been torn +in pieces by wild beasts, or burned alive, or cast down precipices. And +these things, that seemed so very hard to us, God has permitted. Yet he +is good, and loves and cares for us as a father. This we must believe, +and hold fast to, in spite of every thing that in our ignorance may seem +to contradict it. If we feel as we ought, and as by his grace we may, +we shall be able to trust all to him, with sweet resignation." + +"But is it not very hard, dear Arthur, to be left to die so!--and God +can save us so easily, if he will." + +Arthur was deeply affected: the tears filled his eyes as he took Johnny +upon his knee, and tried to explain to him how wrong and selfish it +would be, to make our belief in the goodness of God, depend upon our +rescue and preservation. It was a difficult task, perhaps an untimely +one, as Max hinted. But Johnny gradually sobbed away his excitement, +and became soothed and calm. + +"Well," said he, after a while, drawing a long breath, and wiping away +his tears, "I know one thing: whatever may happen, we will be kind and +true to one another to the last, and never think of such inhuman things +as I have read of shipwrecked people doing, when nearly dead with +hunger, though we all starve together." + +"Come to me, Johnny," cried Browne, with a faltering voice, "I must kiss +you for those words. Yes, we will perish, if we must, like brothers, +not sullenly, as if none had ever suffered evil before us. Weak and +gentle spirits have borne without repining, sufferings as great as +threaten us. Often has my mother told me the story of sweet Marjory +Wilson, drowned in the Solway water, in the days of Claverhouse, because +she met with her friends and kindred to worship God after their manner-- +and never could I listen to it without tears. Ah, what a spirit was +there! She was but eighteen, and she could have saved her life by +saying a few words. Life was as sweet to her as it is to us: she too +had a home and friends and kindred, whom it must have been hard for the +poor young thing to leave so suddenly and awfully. And yet she refused +to speak those words--she chose to die rather. They took her out upon +the sand where the tide was rising fast, and bound her to a stake. Soon +the water came up to her face. She saw it go over the head of a poor +old woman, whom they had tied farther out than herself. She saw her +death struggles; she heard her gasp for breath, as she choked and +strangled in the yellow waves. Ah! she must have had courage from the +Lord, or that sight would have made her young heart fail. Once more, +and for the last time, the king's officer asked her to make the promise +never to attend a conventicle again. He urged it, for he pitied her +youth and innocence. Her friends and neighbours begged her to save her +life. `O speak, dear Marjory!' they cried, `and make the promise; it +can't be wrong. Do it for our sakes, dear Marjory, and they will let +you go!' But she would not save her life by doing what she had been +taught to think was wrong; and while the swirling waves of the Solway +were rising fast around her, she prayed to God, and kept singing +fragments of psalms, till the water choked her voice--and so she +perished. But, O friends! to know that such things have been; that +spirits gentle and brave as this have lived, makes it easier to suffer +courageously." + +"Horrible!" exclaimed Max, "I seem to see all that you have so +graphically told. But how stern and cruel the teachers who would +sacrifice human life rather than abate their own sullen obstinacy, even +in trifles--who could encourage this innocent but misguided girl, in her +refusal to save her life by the harmless promise to attend a church +instead of a conventicle." + +Just as Browne was commencing an eager and indignant reply to Max's rash +reflections upon the strictness of covenanting teachings, we were +suddenly startled by a deep and solemn sound, which seemed to come from +a distance. While we listened intently, it was several times repeated +at short intervals of about fifteen seconds, each time more distinctly +than before. It resembled somewhat, the deepest tones of a powerful +organ, heard for an instant, and then abruptly stopped. Nothing was to +be seen in the direction from which it seemed to proceed, but the sea +glittering in the moonlight. Is it to be wondered at, if we listened +with feelings, tinged with superstitious awe, to that strange sound, +heard under such circumstances, and at such an hour? Johnny nestled +closer to Arthur's side, and I thought that the faces of my companions +grew visibly pale. Even Arthur looked perplexed and disturbed. + +"What _can_ that be?" said Morton, after a few minutes of almost +breathless silence, during which we had listened in vain for its +repetition. + +"It is certainly very strange," said Arthur. "I never heard any thing +at sea, at all like it, but once, and it is impossible that this can be +what I then heard--but hark!" And again the same deep pealing sound was +repeated several times, at shorter intervals, but more faintly than +before; after continuing for a few minutes it ceased again. + +"What was the sound which you speak of, as resembling this?" asked +Morton, when all was silent once more. + +"It was the cry of a kind of penguin, found at the Falkland Islands; +when heard on shore it is harsh and loud; but a short distance at sea, +and in the night, it has a pealing, solemn sound, like that which we +have just heard." + +"It must come from land in the neighbourhood," said Morton, "we can +probably hear farther on such a night as this than we can distinguish +land." + +"Yes, sounds on the water, in calm still nights, when there is no wind, +can be heard at great distances," said Arthur; "it is said that the +`All's well!' of the British sentinel at Gibraltar, is sometimes heard +across the strait, on the African shore, a distance of thirteen miles. +I have seen, at the Society Islands, native drums made of large hollow +logs, which might perhaps, at a distance, sound like what we heard a +moment ago. A Wesleyan missionary there, once told me of a great drum +that he saw at the Tonga Islands, called the `Tonga Toki,' which sounded +like an immense gong, and could be heard from seven to ten miles." + +"Why, I thought that _this_ sounded like a gong," said Johnny, "perhaps +we are near some island now; but what could they be drumming for so late +in the night?" + +"There would be nothing very unusual about that," said Arthur. "The +Areoi Societies, which are extended over most of the larger inhabited +islands in this part of the Pacific, sometimes hold their great +celebrations, like the pow-wows, and war-dances, of our American +Indians, in the night-time. At the Feejee Islands they have a strange +ceremony called `Tambo Nalanga,' which they celebrate at night, with the +beating of drums, the blowing of conches, and a number of savage and +cruel rites. Something or other of the same kind is observed at most of +the islands, though under different names, and with slight variations." + +While speculating in this way, and endeavouring to account for the noise +which had startled us so much, we all at once became aware of an +increasing light in the south, the `Cross,' now half-way between the +horizon and the zenith, enabling us to fix the points of the compass. +As we gazed in that direction, the sky became strongly illuminated by a +red glare, and an immense column of flame and smoke was seen shooting up +in the distance. Nothing but the expanse of the ocean, splendidly +illuminated, and glowing like a sea of fire, could be discerned by this +light. Whether it was caused by a burning ship, at such a distance that +nothing but the light of her conflagration was visible, or by a fire on +some distant island, we could not determine. It was in the same quarter +from which the sound had seemed to come. + +Arthur was now of the opinion that we were in the neighbourhood of an +inhabited island, or group, and that the light proceeded from the +burning beche-de-mer house of some successful trader, who had set fire +to it, (as is their custom at the end of a prosperous season), to +prevent it from falling into the hands of others in the same business. + +We all grasped eagerly at this idea, for the probability that we were +not only in the neighbourhood of land, but of a place where we should +meet with Europeans, and have an opportunity of getting home, or perhaps +to the places of our respective destination, was full of encouragement. +In a very short time the conflagration was over, and a dark column of +smoke, which marked the spot where it had raged, was lifted slowly into +the air. We heard no more of the mysterious sound. None of the +explanations suggested were so perfectly satisfactory, as to remove +entirely the unpleasant impression which it had produced. Before lying +down in our accustomed places, we made our usual arrangements as to the +watch, unnecessary as it seemed, during the calm. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +DARK WATERS. + +SUFFERING AND DELIRIUM--THE MIDNIGHT BATH--A STRANGE PERIL. + + "Water, water, everywhere, + And all the boards did shrink; + Water, water, everywhere-- + But not a drop to drink." + +Several times in the course of the night, I was awakened by confused +noises, like the blowing of porpoises, or the spouting of whales; but +the sky had become overcast, and it had grown so dark, that on getting +up and looking about, I could see nothing of the creatures producing +these sounds. My slumbers were broken and uneasy, and in the morning I +found myself suffering from a dull, heavy pain in the head, accompanied +by a slight nausea, and a general feeling of languor and weakness. Even +to get upon my feet required something of an effort, which I made, +impelled rather by a dim, confused sense of duty, than by any +spontaneous impulse or inclination: had I consulted inclination alone, I +believe I should have remained passive, and let things take their +course. + +The occurrences of the last night had given rise to some faint +expectation that by daylight we should discover land in sight to the +southward, where we had seen the great light. But nothing was visible +in that or any other quarter. Possessed by some hope of this kind, +Arthur had been up, searching the horizon, since the first streak of day +in the east. He showed me a large green branch which he had picked up +as it floated near us. By the elegantly scolloped leaves, of a dark and +glossy green, it was easily recognised as a branch of the bread-fruit +tree; and from their bright, fresh colour, and the whiteness of the +wood, where it had joined the trunk, it must have been torn off quite +recently. The calm still continued. Immense schools of black-fish, or +porpoises, or some similar species, could be seen about half a mile +distant, passing westward, in an apparently endless line. The temporary +beneficial effect of yesterday's scanty supply of food and drink, had +passed away entirely, and all seemed to feel in a greater or less +degree, the bodily pain and weakness, and the lassitude and +indisposition to any kind of effort, by which I was affected. To such +an extent was this the case, that when Arthur proposed that we should +row towards the school of fish in sight, and try to take some of them, +the strongest disinclination to make any such attempt was evinced, and +it was only after much argument and persuasion, and by direct personal +appeals to us individually, that he overcame this strange torpor, and +induced us to take to the oars. + +On getting near enough to the objects of our pursuit to distinguish them +plainly, we were sorry to find that they were Porpoises instead of +black-fish, as we had at first supposed; the former being shy and timid, +and much more difficult to approach than the latter; and so they proved +at present. Still we persevered for a while; the hope of obtaining food +having been once excited, we were almost as reluctant to abandon the +attempt as we had been at first to commence it. But after half an +hour's severe labour at the oars, we were obliged to give it up as quite +hopeless, and soon afterward the last of the long column passed beyond +pursuit, leaving us completely disheartened and worn out. The sail was +again arranged so as to shelter us as much as possible from the sun, and +Arthur commenced distributing the leaves and twigs of the bread-fruit +branch, suggesting that some slight refreshment might perhaps be derived +from chewing them. But they retained a saline taste from having been in +the sea-water, and no one proceeded far with the experiment. Morton cut +some small slips of leather from his boots, and began to chew them. He +fancied that they afforded some nourishment, and recommended the rest of +us to make a similar trial, which I believe we all did. Max almost +immediately rejected with disgust the first morsel which he put into his +mouth, saying that he must "starve a little longer before he could +relish that." At noon the heat was more intense, if possible, than it +had been the day before. Johnny was now in a high fever, accompanied by +symptoms of an alarming character. It was distressing to witness his +sufferings, and feel utterly unable to do any thing for him. Yet there +was nothing that we could do--food and drink were the only medicines he +needed, and these we could not give him. Towards the close of the +afternoon he became delirious, and began to cry out violently and +incessantly for water. His voice seemed to have changed, and could now +scarcely be recognised. There was something very strange and horrible +in the regular, unceasing cries which he uttered, and which sounded at +times almost like the howlings of a brute. Arthur had made a sort of +bed for him, to which each of us contributed such articles of clothing +as could be spared. It was now necessary to watch him every moment and +frequently to use force to keep him from getting overboard. At one +time, having got to the side of the boat, before he could be prevented, +he commenced dipping up the sea-water with his hand, and would have +drunk it had he not been forcibly restrained. After this had lasted +nearly two hours, he suddenly ceased his struggles and violent cries, +and began to beg piteously for "a drink of water." This he continued +for a considerable time, repeatedly asking Arthur to tell him _why_ he +could not have "just a little," since there was "such a plenty of it." + +It is impossible to describe the horrible and sickening effect of all +this upon us, in the state of utter physical prostration to which we had +been gradually reduced. Browne and Arthur watched over Johnny with all +the care and patient unwearying kindness that a mother could have shown; +and they would not permit the rest of us to relieve them for a moment, +or to share any part of their charge, painful and distressing as it was. +Twice, when it became necessary to hold the little sufferer fast, to +prevent him from getting over the gunwale, he spat fiercely in Arthur's +face, struggling and crying out with frightful vehemence. But Browne's +voice seemed to soothe and control him, and when Johnny spoke to him, it +was gently, and in the language of entreaty. Towards night he became +more quiet, and at last sunk into a kind of lethargy, breathing deeply +and heavily, but neither speaking nor moving, except to turn from one +side to the other, which he did at nearly regular intervals. + +This change relieved us from the necessity of constantly watching and +restraining him, but Arthur viewed it as an unfavourable and alarming +symptom; he seemed now more completely depressed than I had ever before +seen him, and to be overcome at last by grief, anxiety, and the horrors +of our situation. + +The heat did not abate in the least with the going down of the sun, but +the night, though very close and sultry, was calm and beautiful, like +the last. Soon after the moon rose, Max and Morton undressed, and +bathed themselves in the sea. The smooth moonlit water looked so cool +and inviting, that the rest of us soon followed their example, +notwithstanding the danger from sharks. We were all good swimmers, but +no one ventured far from the boat except Morton; I found that a few +strokes quite exhausted me, and I was obliged to turn and cling to the +gunwale. In fact, so great was the loss of strength which we had all +suffered, that we came near perishing in a very singular and almost +incredible manner: After having been in the water a sufficient time, as +I thought, I discovered, on trying to get into the boat again, that I +was utterly unable to do so, through sheer weakness. At the same time I +observed Max making a similar attempt nearer the stern, with no better +success. We were all in the water except Johnny; any difficulty in +getting into the boat again had not been dreamed of; but I began now to +feel seriously alarmed. My feet were drawn forcibly under the boat's +bottom, and even to maintain my hold of the gunwale, as we rose and sunk +with the swell, required an exhausting effort, which I knew I could not +long continue. Arthur was swimming near the stern, holding on to the +end of a rope, which he had cast over before coming in. By great +exertion I raised myself so far as to be able to look over the gunwale, +when I saw Browne in the same position directly opposite me. + +"Can't you get into the boat!" I asked. + +"Really, I don't think I can," said he, speaking like a person +exhausted. + +"I can't," added Max, faintly, "it is as much as I can do to maintain my +hold." At this moment a voice was heard, calling out apparently from a +distance, "Hilloa! where are you? Hilloa!" It was hoarse, strained, +and distressed. Almost immediately the cry was repeated, much nearer at +hand, as it seemed; and then, a third time, faint, and distant as at +first. I was horror-stricken; the cry sounded strange and fearful, and +I did not recognise the voice. Then it occurred to me that it must be +Morton, who had swum out farther than the rest, and losing sight of the +boat for a moment in the swell of the sea, had become bewildered and +alarmed. This might easily happen; if but the length of a wave distant +we should be invisible to him, unless both should chance to rise on the +swell at the same time. The moon, too, had just passed behind a dark +mass of cloud, and the sea lay in partial obscurity. I now heard Browne +and Arthur shouting, in order, as I supposed, to guide Morton by the +sound of their voices. I, too, called out as loudly as I was able. For +a moment all was still again. Then I heard some one say, "There he is!" +and a dark speck appeared on the crest of a wave a little to the right. +At this moment the moon shone out brightly! and I saw that it was +Morton, swimming toward us. He reached the boat panting and out of +breath, and catching hold near me with an almost convulsive effort, +remained some minutes without being able to speak a word. Arthur, who +had observed Max's struggles to get into the yawl, now swam round to +where Morton and I were hanging on, and taking hold also, his additional +weight depressed the gunwale nearly to the water's edge, when he got his +knee over it, and at last, by a sudden effort rolled into the boat. He +then helped me to get in, and we two the rest. + +Morton said that after swimming but a short distance from the boat, as +he supposed, he found himself getting tired and very weak, and on +turning, greatly to his surprise, could see nothing of us. In reality, +however, there was nothing surprising in this, his face being on a level +with the surface, and the boat with neither sail nor mast up, being much +less in height than the long smooth swells. Perceiving how great was +his danger, and becoming somewhat alarmed, he had called out in the +manner described: when he heard us shouting in return, he was actually +swimming _away_ from us, and it was only by following the direction of +our voices that he had at last reached the boat. + +That night we kept no regular watch as we had hitherto done, or at least +we made no arrangement for that purpose, though one or another of us was +awake most of the time, watching Johnny, who continued, however, in the +same deep lethargic slumber. + +For my part, it was a long time before I could sleep at all. There was +something in the fate that threatened us, more appalling than the +terrors of death. The impressions produced by the ravings, and cries, +and struggles, of our poor little fellow-sufferer were yet fresh, and +they could not be effaced. All in vain I strove to control the workings +of my morbidly excited imagination--I could not shut out the fearful +thoughts and anticipations which the occurrences of the day so naturally +and obviously suggested. The lapse of twenty-four hours might find us +all reduced to the same helpless state, deprived of consciousness and +reason. One after another must succumb to the fever and become +delirious, until he who should last fall its victim, should find himself +alone in the midst of his stricken and raving companions--alone +retaining reason, no longer to be accounted a blessing, since it could +only serve to make him sensible to all the accumulated horrors of his +situation. I shuddered as I contemplated the possibility that I might +be the most wretched one, the last of all to sink and perish. At +length, I began to imagine that my mind was actually beginning to fail, +and that I was becoming delirious. At first it was but a fearful +suspicion. Soon, however, it took such strong possession of me, that I +was compelled to relinquish all thought of sleep. Sitting up, I saw +that Arthur was awake and by the side of Johnny. His face was upturned, +and his hands clasped as if in prayer. I could see his lips move, and +even the tears trickling from beneath his closed lids, for the moonlight +fell upon his countenance. He did not observe me, and after a few +moments he laid down again without speaking, and soon appeared to +slumber like the rest. + +Pressing my hands to my head, I leaned over the stern, my face almost +touching the water. A current of cooler air was stirring close to the +surface, as if it were the breathing of the sea, for there was no wind. +How preternaturally still every thing seemed--what an intensity of +silence! How softly the pale moonlight rested upon the water! A grand +and solemn repose wrapped the heavens and the ocean--no sound beneath +all that vast blue dome--no motion, but the heaving of the long sluggish +swell. Gradually I became calmer; the excitement and perturbation of my +mind began to subside, and at length I felt as though I could sleep. As +I resumed my place by the side of Browne, he moved, as if about to +awake, and murmured indistinctly some broken sentences. From the words +that escaped him, he was dreaming of that far-off home which he was to +behold no more. In fancy he was wandering again by the banks of the +Clyde, the scene of many a school-boy ramble. But it seemed as though +the shadow of present realities darkened even his dreams, and he beheld +these familiar haunts no longer in the joyous light of early days. "How +strange it looks!" he muttered slowly, "how dark the river is--how deep +and dark!--it seems to me it was not so _then_, Robert." Truly, +companion in suffering, this is no falsely coloured dream of thine, for +we have all come at last into deep and dark waters! + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +A SAIL. + +THE CACHELOT AND HIS ASSAILANTS--THE COURSE--NEW ACQUAINTANCES. + + "Strange creatures round us sweep: + Strange things come up to look at us, + The monsters of the deep." + +The first thought that flashed through my mind with returning +consciousness, in the morning, was, "This is the last day for hope-- +unless relief comes to-day in some shape, we must perish." I was the +first awake, and glancing at the faces of my companions lying about in +the bottom of the boat, I could not help shuddering. They had a strange +and unnatural look--a miserable expression of pain and weakness. All +that was familiar and pleasant to look upon, had vanished from those +sharpened and haggard features. Their closed eyes seemed singularly +sunken; and their matted hair, sunburned skin, and soiled clothing, +added something of wildness to the misery of their appearance. + +Browne, who had slept beside me, was breathing hard, and started every +now and then, as if in pain. Johnny slumbered so peacefully, and +breathed so gently, that for a moment I was alarmed, and doubted whether +he was breathing at all, until I stooped down and watched him closely. +There were still no indications of a breeze. A school of whales was +visible about a quarter of a mile to the westward, spouting and pursuing +their unwieldy sport; but I took no interest in the sight, and leaning +over the gunwale, commenced bathing my head and eyes with the sea-water. +While thus engaged I was startled by seeing an enormous cachelot, (the +sperm-whale), suddenly break the water within fifteen yards of the boat. +Its head, which composed nearly a third of its entire bulk, seemed a +mountain of flesh. A couple of small calves followed it, and came +swimming playfully around us. For a minute or two, the cachelot floated +quietly at the surface, where it had first appeared, throwing a slender +jet of water, together with a large volume of spray and vapour into the +air; then rolling over upon its side, it began to lash the sea with its +broad and powerful tail, every stroke of which produced a sound like the +report of a cannon. This roused the sleepers abruptly, and just as they +sprang up, and began to look around in astonishment, for the cause of so +startling a commotion, the creature cast its misshapen head downwards, +and, throwing its immense flukes high into the air, disappeared. We +watched anxiously to see where it would rise, conscious of the perils of +such a neighbourhood, and that even a playful movement, a random sweep +of the tail, while pursuing its gigantic pastime, would be sufficient to +destroy us. It came to the surface at about the same distance as +before, but on the opposite side of the boat, throwing itself half out +of the water as it rose: again it commenced lashing the sea violently, +as if in the mere wanton display of its terrible strength, until far +around, the water was one wide sheet of foam. The calves still +gambolled near us, chasing each other about and under the yawl, and we +might easily have killed one of them, had we not been deterred by the +almost certain consequences of arousing the fury of the old whale. +Meantime, the entire school seemed to be edging down towards us. There +was not a breath of air, and we had no means of getting out of the way +of the danger, to which we should be exposed, if among them, except by +taking to the oars; and this, nothing short of the most pressing and +immediate peril could induce us to do. But our attention was soon +withdrawn from the herd, to the singular and alarming movements of the +individual near us. Rushing along the surface for short distances, it +threw itself several times half clear of the water, turning after each +of these leaps, as abruptly as its unwieldy bulk would permit, and +running a tilt with equal violence in the opposite direction. Once, it +passed so near us, that I think I could have touched it with an oar, and +we saw distinctly its small, dull eye, and the loose, wrinkled, folds of +skin, about its tremendous jaws. For a minute afterwards, the boat +rolled dangerously in the swell caused by the swift passage of so vast +an object. Suddenly, after one of these abrupt turns, the monster +headed directly towards us, and came rushing onward with fearful +velocity, either not noticing us at all, or else mistaking the boat for +some sea-creature, with which it designed to measure its strength. +There was no time for any effort to avoid the danger; and even had there +been, we were too much paralysed by its imminence, to make such an +effort. The whale was scarcely twelve yards off--certainly not twenty. +Behind it stretched a foaming wake, straight as an arrow. Its vast +mountainous head ploughed up the waves like a ship's cutwater, piling +high the foam and spray before it. To miss us was now a sheer +impossibility and no earthly power could arrest the creature's career. +Instant destruction appeared inevitable. I grew dizzy, and my head +began to swim, while the thought flashed confusedly through my mind, +that infinite wisdom had decreed that we must die, and this manner of +perishing had been chosen in mercy, to spare us the prolonged horrors of +starvation. What a multitude of incoherent thoughts and recollections +crowded upon my mind in that moment of time! A thousand little +incidents of my past life, disconnected and trivial--a shadowy throng of +familiar scenes and faces, surged up before me, vividly as objects +revealed for an instant by the glare of the lightning, in the gloom of a +stormy night. Closing my eyes, I silently commended my soul to God, and +was endeavouring to compose myself for the dreadful event when Morton +sprang to his feet, and called hurriedly upon us to shout together. All +seemed to catch his intention at once, and to perceive in it a gleam of +hope; and standing up we raised our voices in a hoarse cry, that sounded +strange and startling even to ourselves. Instantly, as it seemed, the +whale drove almost perpendicularly downwards, but so great was its +momentum, that its fluked tail cut the air within an oar's length of the +boat as it disappeared. + +Whether the shout we had uttered, caused the sudden plunge to which we +owed our preservation, it is impossible to decide. Notwithstanding its +bulk and power, the cachelot is said to be a timid creature, except when +injured or enraged, and great caution has to be exercised by whalers in +approaching them. Suddenly recollecting this, the thought of +undertaking to scare the formidable monster, had suggested itself to +Morton, and he had acted upon it in sheer desperation, impelled by the +same instinct that causes a drowning man to catch even at a straw. + +But, however obtained, our reprieve from danger was only momentary. The +whale came to the surface at no great distance, and once more headed +towards us. If frightened for an instant, it had quickly recovered from +the panic, and now there was no mistaking the creature's purpose: it +came on, exhibiting every mark of rage, and with jaws literally wide +open. We felt that no device or effort of our own could be of any +avail. We might as well hope to resist a tempest, or an earthquake, or +the shock of a falling mountain, as that immense mass of matter, +instinct with life and power, and apparently animated by brute fury. + +Every hope had vanished, and I think that we were all in a great measure +resigned to death, and fully expecting it when there came, (as it seemed +to us, by actual miracle), a most wonderful interposition. + +A dark, bulky mass, (in the utter bewilderment of the moment we noted +nothing distinctly of its appearance), shot perpendicularly from the sea +twenty feet into the air, and fell with a tremendous concussion, +directly upon the whale's back. It must have been several tons in +weight, and the blow inflicted was crushing. For a moment the whale +seemed paralysed by the shock, and its vast frame quivered with agony; +but recovering quickly, it rushed with open jaws upon its strange +assailant which immediately dived, and both vanished. Very soon, the +whale came to the surface again; and now we became the witnesses of one +of those singular and tremendous spectacles, of which the vast solitudes +of the tropical seas are doubtless often the theatre, but which human +eyes have rarely beheld. + +The cachelot seemed to be attacked by two powerful confederates, acting +in concert. The one assailed it from below, and continually drove it to +the surface, while the other--the dark bulky object--repeated its +singular attacks in precisely the same manner as at first, whenever any +part of the gigantic frame of the whale was exposed, never once missing +its mark, and inflicting blows, which one would think, singly sufficient +to destroy any living creature. At times the conflict was carried on so +near us, as to endanger our safety; and we could see all of the +combatants with the utmost distinctness, though not at the same time. +The first glimpse which we caught of the second antagonist of the whale, +as it rose through the water to the attack, enabled us at once to +identify it as that most fierce and formidable creature--the Pacific +Sword-fish. + +The other, as I now had an opportunity to observe, was a fish of full +one third the length of the whale itself, and of enormous bulk in +proportion; it was covered with a dark rough skin, in appearance not +unlike that of an alligator. The cachelot rushed upon its foes +alternately, and the one thus singled out invariably fled, until the +other had an opportunity to come to its assistance; the sword-fish +swimming around in a wide circle at the top of the water, when pursued, +and the other diving when chased in its turn. If the whale followed the +sword-fish to the surface, it was sure to receive a stunning blow from +its leaping enemy; if it pursued the latter below, the sword-fish there +attacked it fearlessly, and, as it appeared, successfully, forcing it +quickly back to the top of the water. + +Presently the battle began to recede from us, the whale evidently making +towards the school, which was at no great distance; and strange as the +sight was, we watched it with but a languid interest, as soon as our +safety appeared to be no longer involved. The whale must have been +badly hurt for the water which it threw up on coming to the surface and +spouting, was tinged with blood. After this I saw no more of the +sword-fish and his associate; they had probably abandoned the attack. +[See note.] As nearly as I can recollect, we did not, either during the +progress of the fight, or after it was over, exchange a single word on +the subject, so dumb and apathetic had we become. After a while the +school of whales appeared to be moving off, and in half an hour more, we +lost sight of them altogether. + +All this while, Johnny had continued to sleep soundly, and his slumbers +seemed more natural and refreshing than before. When at length he +awoke, the delirium had ceased, and he was calm and gentle, but so weak +that he could not sit up without being supported. After the +disappearance of the whales, several hours passed, during which we lay +under our awning without a word being spoken by any one. Throughout +this day, the sea seemed to be alive with fish; myriads of them were to +be seen in every direction; troops of agile and graceful dolphins; +revolving black-fish, chased by ravenous sharks; leaping albatross, +dazzling the eye with the flash of their golden scales, as they shot +into the air for a moment; porpoises, bonito, flying-fish, and a hundred +unknown kinds which I had never seen or heard of. At one time we were +surrounded by an immense shoal of small fishes, about the size of +mackerel, so densely crowded together that their backs presented an +almost solid surface, on which it seemed as if one might walk dry-shod. +None, however, came actually within our reach, and we made no effort to +approach them. + +From the time of our wonderful escape from being destroyed by the whale, +until the occurrence which I am about to relate, I remember nothing +distinctly--all seems vague and dream-like. I could not say with +confidence, from my own knowledge, whether the interval consisted of +several days, or of only a few feverish and half-delirious hours; nor +whether the sights and sounds of which I have a confused recollection, +were real, or imaginary. I think, however, that it must have been in +the afternoon of the same day, (Arthur is confident that it was), that +Morton came to me as I lay in the bottom of the boat in a state of utter +desperation and self-abandonment and aroused me, saying in a hoarse and +painful whisper, that there was a vessel in sight. Even this +announcement hardly sufficed to overcome the stupor into which I had +sunk, and it was with a reluctant effort, and a feeling akin to +annoyance at being disturbed, that I sat up and looked around me. My +eyes were so much inflamed that I could see nothing distinctly. + +The first thing that I observed, was, that the calm was at an end. A +breeze had sprung up, and was blowing gently but pretty steadily from +the south. The surface of the sea was slightly ruffled, and its dead +stagnant aspect, had given place to one of breezy freshness. In this +change there was something reviving and strengthening. Far to the +south, where Morton pointed out the vessel which he had discovered, I +could just distinguish a white speck upon the water, which seemed more +like the crest of a wave than any thing else. Morton had already called +Arthur's attention to it, and he was watching it intently. Gradually it +became more distinct, and in half an hour, I too, could make it out +plainly, to be a small sailing vessel of some description. As she was +coming directly down before the wind, there seemed to be no need of +doing any thing to attract her attention. I now hastened to reanimate +Max and Browne, by communicating to them the intelligence that relief +was probably at hand. In three-quarters of an hour more, the strange +sail was near enough to enable us to see that she was a large double +canoe, such as is used by some of the islanders of the South Pacific, in +their trading voyages. It had two masts, with large triangular +mat-sails, and appeared to contain six or seven persons only, whom we +supposed to be natives of some neighbouring island. As soon as they +were within speaking distance, one of them, to our great astonishment +hailed us in French. Arthur undertook to answer in the same language, +when the other, probably perceiving that the French was not his native +tongue, spoke to us in tolerable English, but with a strong French +accent. It was easy to perceive, now that our attention was +particularly called to him, that the spokesman was a European. Though +almost naked like the rest, and elaborately tattooed upon the chest and +shoulders, his light hair and beard, and florid though sun-burnt skin, +sufficiently distinguished him from them. Of course the first thing +with us, was to make known our wants, and to ask for food, and above all +for water. As soon as they could bring the canoe near enough, the +Frenchman watching his opportunity, reached out to us a large gourd +containing water, of which we drank plentifully, passing it round +several times. Arthur hastened to pour a little into Johnny's mouth, +and the effect was astonishing: he seemed to revive almost +instantaneously, and, sitting up, he seized the gourd himself and drank +eagerly as long as Arthur would let him. The Frenchman next tossed us +something wrapped in banana leaves, a thick, dark-coloured paste of some +kind. It was enough that it was an article of food, and we devoured it +without pausing for any very close examination, though its appearance +was by no means inviting, and it had a crude and slightly acid taste. +He threw us also several thin, hard cakes, similar in taste and colour +to the other substance. Both were probably preparations of the +bread-fruit, the latter being dried and hardened in the sun, or by fire. +Ravenously hungry as we were, these supplies were divided and +apportioned with the most scrupulous exactness. On finding that the +natives were well supplied with water, having several large gourds full, +we passed the calabash round again, until we had drained it dry, when +they gave us another gourd. Meanwhile, though we were too busy to look +about us much, the canoe's people watched us very narrowly, and in such +a manner as to make me feel uneasy and doubtful as to their intentions, +notwithstanding their kindness thus far. As soon as the first cravings +of hunger and thirst were satisfied, I began to return their scrutiny, +and I now observed that they differed in many respects from the +Tahitians, and from all the other Polynesian tribes of which I knew any +thing. Their complexion was a clear olive; their faces oval, with +regular features; their hair straight and black; their eyes large, and +the general expression of their countenances simple and pleasing, though +there were several keen, crafty-looking faces among them. All were +tattooed, more or less profusely, the chests of some resembling +checker-boards, and others being ornamented with rosettes, and +representations of various natural objects, as birds, fishes, trees, +etcetera. Their only clothing consisted of the maro, a strip of tappa, +or native cloth, tied round the loins. A wave happening to throw the +boats nearly together, one of the natives caught hold of our gunwale at +the stern, and another at the bow, and thus kept the canoe alongside. + +They now began to cast searching glances at us, and at every thing in +the yawl. I observed the Frenchman intently eyeing the handle of one of +the cutlasses, which protruded from beneath a fold of canvass. He +inquired eagerly whether we had any fire-arms, and seemed greatly +disappointed to find that we had not. He next asked for tobacco, with +no better success, which apparently surprised him very much, for he +shrugged his shoulders, and raised his thick eyebrows with a doubtful +and incredulous look. At this moment the gilt buttons upon Max's jacket +seemed to strike the fancy of one of our new friends, and excited his +cupidity to such a degree, that after fixing upon them a long and +admiring gaze, he suddenly reached over and made a snatch at them. He +got hold of one, and in trying to pull it off came very near jerking Max +overboard. Morton, who was sitting next to Max, interfered, and caught +the man by the arm, with a look and manner that made me fear he might do +something imprudent. The savage, who was an athletic fellow, +obstinately maintained his hold of Max's jacket, and casting a ferocious +glance at Morton, snatched up a short, thick paddle, and brandished it +over his head as if about to strike. Arthur appealed to the Frenchman +to interpose, but before he could do so, one of the natives, a handsome +boy, who was seated cross-legged upon a platform between the masts, +spoke to the man in a raised voice, and with an air of authority, +whereupon, to my surprise, he immediately dropped the paddle, and +sullenly desisted from his attempt. This lad, who seemed to be so +promptly obeyed, did not look to be more than thirteen or fourteen years +of age. His voice was soft and girlish; he had a remarkably open and +pleasing countenance, and surveyed us with an air of friendly interest, +very different from the sinister and greedy looks of several of the +others, including the Frenchman himself. In answer to the questions of +the latter, Arthur told him that we were Americans, and related very +briefly how we had come into our present situation. He then informed us +in turn, that he had been cast away, some six years before, in a French +barque engaged in the tortoise-shell traffic, upon an uninhabited +island, about forty miles from the one where he and those with him, now +lived. After remaining there for more than a year, he and his +companions, having reason to believe that they were in the neighbourhood +of a group occasionally visited by trading vessels, had set out in +search of it, in a small boat. Their belief as to the existence and +situation of these islands proved to be well founded; they had finally +succeeded in reaching them, had been hospitably received and treated by +the natives, among whom they had acquired considerable influence, but +had as yet had no opportunity of returning home. + +They were now, he said, on their return from a trading voyage to a +neighbouring island, where they had just disposed of a cargo of mats and +tappa, in exchange for baskets of native manufacture, and sharks' teeth. +Having been becalmed all the preceding day and night, they feared that +they had drifted out of their course, since, otherwise, they ought, +after making full allowance for the calm, to have already reached their +own island. He finished by assuring us, that we might calculate with +confidence, upon enjoying perfect security and kind treatment among +these people. + +The conference being concluded, he directed us to put up our sail, and +steer after the canoe; adding that he expected to reach the group before +midnight if the wind held fair. He spoke with the air of one delivering +a command, and evidently considered us entirely under his control. But +of course we felt no disposition to object to what he directed. The +fact, that the natives had treated him and his companions so well, was +an encouragement to us, as affording some proof of their friendly and +peaceful character, and we supposed that he could have no possible +motive for using his influence to our prejudice. Even had there been +any other course for us to choose, to escape perishing, we were in no +condition to make any effectual opposition to the will of our new +acquaintances. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Note. This fish story has several rather astonishing features--at least +to an inexperienced landsman. The sword-fish and thresher are said to +seek and attack the right whale together; but a nautical friend, whom I +have consulted on the subject, says he has never heard of their +interfering with the cachelot, or sperm-whale, which would, he thinks, +be very likely to make mince-meat of them both, should they be guilty of +such temerity: the right whale uses no other weapon than his powerful +tail; whereas the cachelot goes at an adversary with open jaws. Upon my +inquiry whether threshers, "of several tons weight," and jumping "twenty +feet into the air," were common, my friend the captain, seemed piqued at +my implied scepticism as to marine monsters, and briefly made answer, +that there were more strange creatures in the sea, than were dreamed of +in my philosophy, and that "many an old sailor could give more real +information on the subject, than all the natural history books in the +world." + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +A CATASTROPHE. + +THE WHIRLING COLUMNS--A STUPENDOUS SPECTACLE--WE LOSE OUR NEW FRIENDS. + + "Still round and round the fluid vortex flies, + Scattering dun night, and horror through the skies, + The swift volution and the enormous train + Let sages versed in Nature's lore explain; + The horrid apparition still draws nigh, + And white with foam the whirling surges fly." + +The breeze was now steady, though gentle, and Max and Morton set to work +rigging the sail, which for the last two days had served as an awning. + +During our mutual inquiries and explanations, the Frenchman had kept the +canoe close alongside of us; he now braced round the yard of his +triangular sail, which had been shaking in the wind, and began to draw +ahead. The young native who had interfered so effectually in Max's +behalf, observing the eagerness with which we had devoured the doughy +mass of pounded bread-fruit, tossed another cake of the same substance +into the boat as we separated, which, when distributed, afforded a +morsel or two to each of us. I had particularly observed this boy on +the first approach of the canoe, from the circumstance of his occupying +a small raised platform, or dais, of wicker-work, covered with mats. + +As our sail had been entirely disengaged from the mast and gaff, it was +quite a piece of work to rig it again for service, and by the time this +was effected, the canoe was some distance ahead of us: though she was +far better adapted than the yawl for sailing with a light breeze, yet we +nearly held our own with her, after once getting fairly under way. + +When the wind first sprang up, the sky had become slightly overcast with +broken masses of clouds, of a peculiar and unusual appearance. From the +most considerable of these masses, radiated, as from a centre, long +lines, like pencils of light, running in straight, regularly diverging +rays, to the ocean. + +We had been sailing in the wake of the canoe, perhaps half an hour, when +I observed in the south-west a singularly shaped cloud, to which a dark +column, extending downward to the sea, appeared to be attached. This +column was quite narrow at the base, but enlarged as it rose, until just +below the point of union with the cloud, it spread outward like a gothic +pillar, diverging into arches as it meets the roof. I surveyed this +strange spectacle for several minutes before its true character occurred +to me. It was already observed by those in the canoe, and from their +exclamations and gestures, they evidently viewed it with apprehension +and dread. + +It was moving slowly towards us, and we also watched, with feelings in +which alarm began to predominate over curiosity and interest, the +majestic approach of this vast body of water, (as we now perceived it to +be), held by some secret power suspended between heaven and earth. + +"It appears to be moving north before the wind," said Arthur, at length; +"if it keeps on its present course, it will pass by, at a safe distance +on our left." + +This seemed probable; but we felt disposed to give it a still wider +berth, and shifting the sail, we steered in a north-easterly direction. +Scarcely had our sail filled on the new tack, when a cry of terror again +drew attention to the canoe, and the natives were seen pointing to +another water-spout, moving slowly round from the east to the north, and +threatening to intercept us in the course we were pursuing. This, +unlike the first, was a cylindrical column of water, of about the same +diameter throughout its entire length, extending in a straight and +unbroken line from the ocean to the heavens. Its upper extremity was +lost amid a mass of clouds, in which I fancied I could perceive the +effects of the gradual diffusion of the water drawn from the sea, as it +wound its way upward with a rapid spiral motion, and poured into that +elevated reservoir. As the process went on, the cloud grew darker, and +seemed to stoop with its accumulating weight of waters. + +Our position was fast becoming embarrassing and dangerous. We had +changed our course to avoid the first water-spout and now we were +confronted by another still nearer at hand. + +For a moment all was confusion, indecision, and dismay. + +"Quick! round with her head, and let her go right before the wind!" +shouted Max hurriedly. + +"That would be running directly into the danger," cried Morton, "they +are both moving north, and approaching each other." + +"Then let's pull down the sail, until they are at a safe distance." + +"I would rather keep her under headway," said Arthur, "or how could we +escape, if one of them should move down upon us!" + +"What can we do, then?" exclaimed Max; "we can't sail in the teeth of +the wind." + +"I am for going about to the left again, and steering as near the wind +as possible," said Arthur; "the one on that side is farthest north." + +This was the course which the natives had already adopted, and they were +now steering nearly south-west. We immediately followed their example, +and the fore and aft rig of the yawl enabled us to sail nearer the wind +than they could do. + +In a few moments the funnel-shaped water-spout, which we had first seen, +had passed off northward, and was at such a distance as to remove all +apprehensions on account of it. Not so, however, with the second; for +hardly had we tacked again, when, notwithstanding that we were to +windward of it, it began to move rapidly towards us. + +Its course was not direct and uniform, but it veered now to the right +and now to the left, rendering it difficult for us to decide which way +to steer in order to avoid it. + +Arthur sat at the helm, pale, but quite calm and collected, his eyes +steadfastly fixed on the advancing column, while Johnny crouched at his +side, holding fast one of his hands in both his own. Morton held the +sheet and stood ready to shift the sail, as the emergency might require. + +Onward it came, towering to the skies, and darkening the ocean with its +impending bulk; soon we could perceive the powerful agitation of the +water far around its base, and within the vortex of its influence: a +dense cloud of spray, thrown off in its rapid revolutions, enveloped its +lower extremity: the rushing sound of the water as it was drawn upward, +was also distinctly audible. And now it seemed to take a straight +course for the canoe. The natives, with the exception of the boy, threw +themselves down in the bottom of the boat in abject terror; it was, +indeed, an appalling spectacle, and calculated to shake the stoutest +heart, to see that vast mass of water, enough as it seemed, to swamp the +navies of the world, suspended so strangely over them. + +The Frenchman appeared to be endeavouring to get the natives to make +some exertion, but in vain. He and the boy then seized a couple of +paddles, and made a frantic effort to escape the threatened danger; but +the whirling pillar was almost upon them, and it seemed as though they +were devoted to certain destruction. The Frenchman now threw down his +paddle, and sat with his hands folded on his breast, awaiting his fate. +The boy, after speaking earnestly to his companion, who merely shook his +head, stood up in the prow of the canoe, and casting one shuddering look +at the dark column, he joined his hands above his head, and plunged into +the sea. In a moment he came to the surface, and struck out vigorously +towards us. + +The canoe seemed already within the influence of the water-spout, and +was drawn towards it with the violently agitated waters around its base. +The Frenchman, unable longer to endure the awful sight bowed his head +upon his hands; another moment, and he was lost to sight in the circle +of mist and spray that enveloped the foot of the column; then a strong +oscillation began to be visible in the body of the water-spout; it +swayed heavily to and fro; the cloud at its apex seemed to stoop, and +the whole mass broke and fell, with a noise that might have been heard +for miles. The sea, far around, was crushed into smoothness by the +shock; immediately where the vast pillar had stood, it boiled like a +caldron; then a succession of waves, white with foam, came circling +outward from the spot, extending even to us. + +The native boy, who swam faster than we sailed, was already within forty +or fifty yards of us, and we put about and steered for him: in a moment +he was alongside, and Arthur, reaching out his hand, helped him into the +boat. + +The sea had now resumed its usual appearance, and every trace of the +water-spout was gone, so that it was impossible to fix the spot where it +had broken. Not a vestige of the canoe, or of her ill-fated company, +was anywhere to be seen. We sailed backward and forward in the +neighbourhood of the place, carefully scrutinising the surface in every +direction, and traversing several times the spot, as nearly as we could +determine it, where the canoe had last been seen: but our search was +fruitless: the long billows swelled and subsided with their wonted +regularity, and their rippled summits glittered as brightly in the +sunshine as ever, but they revealed no trace of those whom they had so +suddenly and remorselessly engulfed. + +The water-spout which had first been seen, had disappeared, and a few +heavy clouds in the zenith alone remained, as evidences of the terrific +phenomenon which we had just witnessed. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +OUR ISLAND HOME. + +THE ILLUSION OF THE GOLDEN HAZE--THE WALL OF BREAKERS--A STRUGGLE FOR +LIFE--THE ISLET OF PALMS. + + "Keel never ploughed that lonely sea, + That isle no human eye hath viewed; + Around it still in tumult rude, + The surges everlastingly, + Burst on the coral-girded shore + With mighty bound and ceaseless roar; + A fresh unsullied work of God, + By human footstep yet untrod." + +The native lad now seemed to be quite overwhelmed with grief. He had +made no manifestations of it while we were endeavouring to discover some +trace of his companions, but when at length we relinquished the attempt, +and it became certain that they had all perished, he uttered a low, +wailing cry, full of distress and anguish, and laying his head upon his +hands, sobbed bitterly. + +The Frenchman had told us that the island lay to the northward; and we +now put the head of the boat in that direction, steering by the sun, +which was just setting. + +When the first violence of the boy's grief had somewhat abated, Arthur +spoke to him gently, in the dialect of the Society Islands. He listened +attentively, turning his large eyes upon Arthur's face with an +expression of mingled timidity and interest and replied in a low, +musical voice. They seemed to understand one another, and talked +together for some time. The language spoken by the boy, differed so +little, as Arthur told us, from that of the Tahitians, that he easily +gathered the meaning of what he said. Upon being questioned as to the +distance of the island, and the course which we must steer in order to +reach it, he pointed to a bright star, just beginning to be visible in +the north-east. + +It is customary with the South-sea Islanders, before setting out on +their long voyages, in which it is necessary to venture out of sight of +land, to select some star by which to regulate their course in the +night-time; this they call the "aveia," or guiding star of the voyage. +They are thus enabled to sail from island to island, and from group to +group, between which all intercourse would otherwise be impossible +without a compass. The star now pointed out to us, had been fixed upon +by the companions of the little islander, at the commencement of their +ill-fated voyage, as marking the direction of the home which they were +destined never to regain. Among other things, we learned from the boy, +that his native island, which we were now endeavouring to reach, was the +largest of a group of three, over all of which his father's authority, +as chief or king, extended: that there were six whites living among +them, who had arrived there many years before, with the one who had just +perished, and had come from an uninhabited island to the southward, upon +which they had been wrecked. + +During the night the wind continued fair, and animated by the hopes to +which the statements of the little native had given rise, we renewed our +watch, which had lately been discontinued, and sailed steadily +northward, cherishing a strong confidence that we should reach land +before morning. + +The second watch--from a little after midnight to dawn--fell to me. As +it began to grow light I almost feared to look northward, dreading the +shock of a fresh disappointment, that must consign us again to the +benumbing apathy from which we had yesterday rallied. + +There seemed to me to be something unusual in the atmosphere, that +impeded, or rather confused and bewildered the sight; and when the sun +rose, I had not made out anything like land. It was not mist or fog, +for the air was dry, and there were already indications of a fiercely +hot day, though it was yet fresh and cool. The sky above us, too, was +perfectly clear, all the clouds seemed to have slid down to the horizon, +along which a white army of them was marshalled, in rounded fleecy +masses, like Alpine peaks towering one above another, or shining +icebergs, pale and cold as those that drift in Arctic seas. + +One by one my companions awoke to learn the failure, thus far, of all +the sanguine expectations of the preceding evening. The native boy +could suggest no reason why we had not reached the island, and when +questioned on the subject, and told that we had steered all through the +night by the "aveia," he merely shook his head with a bewildered and +hopeless look. Max, on perceiving that we were still out of sight of +land, threw himself down again in the bottom of the boat without +speaking a word, where he remained with his eyes closed as if sleeping. + +Arthur, after some further conversation with the little islander, came +to the conclusion that in steering due north, we had not made sufficient +allowance for the strong current setting westward; and he proposed that +we should now sail directly east, to which no objection was made, most +of us having at last come to feel that it could matter little what +course we thenceforth steered. He accordingly took the direction of +things into his own hands: the wind, which had moderated, was still from +the west, and he put the boat before it, and lashed the helm. The +peculiar appearance of the atmosphere still continued. During the +morning a number of tropic birds flew by us, the first that we had seen +since our separation from the ship. About noon, two noddies alighted on +the gaff, and the little native climbed the mast after them; but though +they are generally so tame, or so stupid, as to permit themselves to be +approached and taken with the hand, these flew away before he could +seize them. We hailed the appearance of these birds as a favourable +omen, neither species being often seen at any considerable distance from +land. It was, I suppose, about an hour after this, that happening to +look back, I saw what appeared to be a high island, covered with tall +groves of palms, some two miles distant. The elevated shores, and the +green tops of the trees, were plainly visible; but just at the point +where land and water met, there was a kind of hazy indistinctness in the +view. We were sailing directly from it, and I could not understand how +we had passed as near as we must have done, without observing it. +Browne, catching sight of it almost at the same time with myself, +uttered an exclamation that quickly aroused the attention of the rest, +and we all stood for a moment gazing, half incredulously, upon the land +which seemed to have started up so suddenly out of the sea, in the very +track which we had just passed over. + +Arthur alone, appeared to be but little moved; he looked long and +intently, without uttering a word. + +"This is singular--very singular!" said Morton. "It seems as though we +must have sailed over the _very_ spot where it lies." + +"Unless I am mistaken," said Arthur, "we have been going backward for +some time past: we must be in a very powerful current, which is carrying +us in a direction contrary to that in which we are heading: the wind is +so light that this is not impossible." + +"I believe you are right," said Morton, "I can account for it in no +other way." + +"We had better then pull down the sail, and take the benefit of the full +force of the current," resumed Arthur: this was accordingly done, and +the mast unstepped. + +A short time passed, during which we appeared to be steadily drawing +nearer to the land. The shore itself where it emerged from the ocean, +we could not see with perfect distinctness: a fine, golden haze, like a +visible atmosphere, waved and quivered before it, half veiling it from +sight, and imparting to it an uncertain, though bright and dazzling +aspect: but this appearance was confined to the lower part of the land; +the bold shores and high groves were clearly defined. + +"I trust we are not the subjects of some fearful illusion," said Browne, +breaking a long silence, during which all eyes had been rivetted upon +the island; "but there is something very strange about all this--it has +an unearthly look." + +As he spoke, the bright haze which floated over the sea near the +surface, began to extend itself upward, and to grow denser and more +impervious to the sight: the wooded shores became indistinct and dim, +and seemed gradually receding in the distance, until the whole island, +with its bold heights and waving groves, dissolved and melted away like +a beautiful vision. + +"What is this?" exclaimed Browne, in a voice of horror. "I should +think, if I believed such things permitted, that evil spirits had power +here on the lonely sea, and were sporting with our misery." + +"It is a mirage," said Arthur quietly, "as I suspected from the first. +But courage! though what we have seen was an optical illusion, there +must be a real island in the distance beyond, of which this was the +elevated and refracted image. It cannot, I think, be more than thirty +or forty miles off, and the current is sweeping us steadily towards it." + +"I suppose then," said Morton, "that we can do nothing better, than to +trust ourselves entirely to this current which must in fact be a pretty +powerful one--at least as rapid as the Gulf Stream." + +"We can do nothing better until the wind changes," replied Arthur, +cheerfully; "at present I am disposed to think we are doing very well, +and fast approaching land." + +But there was no change of the wind, and we continued hour after hour, +apparently making no progress, but in reality, as we believed, drifting +steadily westward. All through the day we maintained a vigilant watch, +lest by any possibility we should miss sight of the island which Arthur +was so confident we were approaching. Late in the afternoon we saw a +flock of gannets, and some sooty tern; the gannets passing so near that +we could hear the motion of their long twisted wings. Later still, a +number of small reef-birds passed over head; all were flying westward. +This confirmed Arthur in his belief of the proximity of land. "See," +said he, "these little reef-birds are bound in the same direction with +the others, and with ourselves; you may depend upon it, that the +sea-fowl we have seen, are hastening homeward to their nests, on some +not far distant shore." + +So fully did I share this confidence, that I commenced a calculation as +to the time at which we might expect to reach land. Assuming it to have +been thirty miles distant at the time when we had seen its spectrum, by +means of the refraction, arising from a peculiar state of the +atmosphere; and estimating the rate of the current at three miles an +hour, I came to the conclusion that we could not even come in sight of +it until late at night; and it was therefore without any strong feeling +of disappointment, that I saw the day fast drawing to a close, and +nothing but sky and ocean yet visible. + +The sun had already set, but the long tract of crimson and +flame-coloured clouds that glowed in the horizon where he had +disappeared, still reflected light enough to render it easy to +distinguish objects in that quarter, when I was startled by a cry of +joyful surprise from the native boy, who, shading his eyes with his +hands, was looking intently westward. After a long and earnest gaze, he +spoke eagerly to Arthur, who told us that the boy thought he saw his +native island. Looking in the same direction, I could make out nothing. +Arthur and Browne spoke of a brilliantly white line, narrow, but +well-defined against the horizon, as being all that they could see. +Morton, who was very keen-sighted, thought that he distinguished some +dark object beyond the low white band seen by the others. As the light +gradually failed, we lost sight of this appearance. It was some hours +before the rising of the moon, which we awaited with anxiety. She was +now at her full, and when at length she came up out of the sea, her +disc, broad and red like a beamless sun, seemed to rest, dilated to +preternatural size, upon the edge of the last wave that swelled against +the horizon. As she ascended the sky, she shed over the ocean a flood +of silvery light, less glaring, but almost as bright as that of day. +The wonderful brilliancy of the moon and stars within the tropics, is +one of the first things noted by the voyager. It may be owing to the +great clearness and transparency of the atmosphere: but whatever the +cause, their light is much more powerful than in higher latitudes, and +they seem actually nearer, and of greater magnitude. + +We now looked eagerly westward again; the snow-white line, of which the +others had spoken, was by this time distinctly visible to me also, and +beyond it, too plainly relieved against the clear blue of the sky, to +admit of doubt or illusion, were the high outlines of a tropical island, +clothed with verdure to its summit. + +Again the little islander shouted joyously, and clasped his hands, while +the tears streamed down his olive cheeks. + +He recognised his native island, the smallest and most easterly of the +three, of which his father was the chief. We should soon come in sight +of the remaining two, he said, which were lower, and lay to the north +and south of it; he explained that the appearance, like a low white line +running along the base of the island, was caused by the surf, bursting +upon a coral reef about a mile from the shore. + +Here then, at last, was the land which we had at one time despaired of +ever beholding again, and now we were well assured that it was no airy +phantasm; yet strange as it may seem, our feelings were not those of +unmingled joy. + +A thousand vague apprehensions and surmises of evil, began to suggest +themselves, as we approached this unknown shore, inhabited by savages, +and under the dominion of a savage. We doubted not that we might depend +upon the good-will, and friendly offices of the little native, but we +felt at the same time, that the influence of one so young, might prove +insufficient for our protection. + +We were in some measure acquainted with the savage customs, the dark and +cruel rites, that prevailed among the Polynesian races generally, and +had often listened with horror, to the recital of what Arthur and his +uncle had themselves seen, of their bloody superstitions, and abominable +practices. As I looked into the faces of my companions, it was easy to +perceive that they were possessed by anxious and gloomy thoughts. + +Meanwhile, the current continued to sweep us steadily onward toward the +shore, the outlines of which became every moment more distinct. +Occasionally a cloud drifted athwart the moon, and cast a soft shade +upon the sea, obscuring the view for a time; but when it had passed, the +land seemed to have drawn perceptibly nearer during the interval. At +length, when the night was far advanced, and the island was right before +us, at the distance of scarcely a mile, the native lad, who had been +gazing wistfully toward it for the last half-hour, uttered a plaintive +cry of disappointment. He had looked long and anxiously, for the +appearance of the two remaining islands of his father's group, but in +vain; and now he yielded reluctantly to the conviction, that he had been +deceived by the white line of surf, similar to that which bounded on one +side his native island, and that he had never before seen the one which +we were approaching. This discovery was a relief to me, and removed a +weight of apprehension from my mind. The thought of being cast upon a +desert and uninhabited shore, seemed less dreadful, than that of falling +into the power of a tribe of savage islanders, even under circumstances +which would probably secure us a friendly reception. + +But now a strange and unforeseen difficulty presented itself. Between +us and the island, stretched a barrier reef, running north and south, +and curving westward; and appearing, as far as we could see, completely +to surround it. Along the whole line of this reef the sea was breaking +with such violence as to render all approach dangerous; neither could we +espy any break or opening in it, through which to reach the shore. +Towards this foaming barrier the current was rapidly bearing us, and we +were too feeble to struggle long against its force. To permit ourselves +to be carried upon the reef would be certain destruction, and our only +hope of safety seemed to lie in discovering some inlet through it. Our +true situation flashed upon me all at once; I had not before thought of +the impossibility of receding. Glancing at Arthur, I caught his eye, +and saw that he comprehended the full extent of the danger. "We are +near enough to see any break in the reef," said he, "let us now take to +the oars, and coast along it in search of one." + +This was accordingly done. But it was not until we had pulled along the +shore for some time, and found that in spite of our endeavours to +preserve our distance from it, we were steadily forced nearer, that the +rest seemed aware of the imminence of the danger. + +"The current is carrying us among the breakers," exclaimed Morton, at +length, "though we are heading rather away from the shore, we are +getting closer every moment." This appalling fact was now apparent to +all. + +"The wind seems to have died away," said Browne, "at any rate there is +not enough of it to help us: we must put about and pull out of the reach +of this surf, or we are lost." + +"How long do you suppose we can continue that?" said Arthur. "No, our +only hope is in finding an entrance through the reef, and that +speedily." + +We now steered a little farther away, and strained at the oars, as those +who struggle for life. Occasionally, when lifted on the crest of a +wave, we caught a transient glimpse of a smooth expanse of water beyond +the foaming line of surf, and extending from the inner edge of the reef, +to the shore of the island. The tall tops of the palms bordering the +beach, seemed scarcely a stone's throw distant and you could fancy that, +but for the roar of the breakers, you might hear the rustling of their +long, drooping leaves; but it only added to the horror of our situation, +to see that safe and peaceful haven, so near, yet so inaccessible. + +In some places the reef rose quite out of the water; in others, it was, +in nautical phrase, "all awash;" but nowhere could we attempt a landing +with safety. All the while, too, it was evident that in spite of our +desperate exertions, we were being driven nearer and nearer the +breakers. This kind of work had continued almost an hour, when our +strength began to fail. + +"There appears to be no use in this, comrades," said Browne, at last; +"had we not better just let her go upon the reef, and take our chance of +being able to get to the shore?" + +"O, no!" exclaimed Arthur, earnestly, "that is too desperate." + +"We shall be so completely exhausted that we shan't be able to make an +effort for our lives, when at last we are carried into the surf," +answered Browne, "and we must come to that sooner or later." + +"I hope not--there is reason to hope not," rejoined Arthur, "but if so, +we may as well be exhausted, as fresh; no strength will be of any avail; +we shall be crushed and mangled upon the rocks; or if by any possibility +some of us should reach the shore, what is to become of our poor, sick +Johnny?" + +"I will look after him," said Browne, "I will pledge myself that he +shan't be lost, unless I am too." + +"Let us hold out a few moments yet," implored Arthur; "I will take your +oar; you are the only one who has not been relieved." + +"No," said Browne, "you had better keep the helm; I can stand it a while +longer, and I will pull until we are swept upon the reef; if you all +think that the best plan." + +It was barely possible that if we should now act as Browne proposed, we +might be carried clear off the reef into the lagoon beyond, for we were +opposite a sunken patch, upon which there was more water than at other +places. Failing of this, the boat would inevitably be dashed to pieces; +but still, if not bruised and disabled among the rocks, or carried back +by the return waves, we might be able to reach the smooth water inside +the reef, when it would be easy to swim ashore. + +But to most of us, the attempt seemed too desperate to be thought of, +except as a last resort; and we preferred to toil at the oars as long as +our strength should last in the hope of discovering an inlet. Arthur, +on whose skill and judgment we all relied, steered still farther out, +and for a while we seemed to make head against the swell and the +current. + +For full half an hour longer, we kept up this severe struggle, that +admitted not of an instant's pause or respite. But then our progress +became almost imperceptible, and every stroke was made more feebly and +laboriously than the last. I could hardly hold the oar in my stiffened +fingers. Still no break was to be seen in the long line of surf which +seemed to hem in the island, extending like a white wall, of uniform +height, far as the eye could reach, on either hand. I had read of +islands, like that of Eimeo, completely encircled by coral reefs, with +but a single gateway by which they were accessible. What if this were +such an one, and the only entrance, miles from the spot where we were +toiling for our lives! The conviction that we must risk the chance of +success in an attempt to land upon some ledge of the reef, was forcing +itself upon all our minds, when Max, trembling with eagerness, pointed +to what appeared to be an opening through the surf, nearly opposite us; +there was a narrow space where the long waves, as they rolled towards +the shore, did not seem to encounter the obstacle over which they broke +with such violence on both sides of it, and the swell of the ocean met +the placid waters of the lagoon, without any intervening barrier. +Through this gap, the shore of the island could be seen, down to the +water's edge. + +Arthur hastily made a bundle of the mast and gaff, and placing it within +Johnny's reach, told him to cling to it, in case of accident. Then, +calling upon us to pull steadily, he steered directly for the inlet. As +we neared it the noise of the surf became almost deafening: the huge +rollers, as they thundered against the perpendicular wall of coral, +rising abruptly from the depths of the sea, sent up a column of foam and +spray, twelve or fifteen feet into the air. When just within the +entrance, the spectacle was grand and appalling. But the danger, real +or apparent, was soon over: with a firm hand, and steady eye, Arthur +guided the boat along the centre of the narrow pass, and in a moment we +had glided from the scene of fierce commotion without the reef, into one +of perfect tranquillity and repose. A dozen strokes seemed to have +placed us in a new world. Involuntarily we rested on our oars, and +gazed around us in silence. + +From the inner edge of the reef, to the broad white beach of the island, +a space of perhaps half a mile, spread the clear expanse of the lagoon, +smooth and unruffled as the surface of an inland lake. Half-way between +the reef and the shore, were two fairy islets, the one scarcely a foot +above the water, and covered with a green mantle of low shrubs; the +other, larger and higher, and adorned by a group of graceful young +cocoa-nuts. + +The island itself was higher, and bolder in its outlines than is usual +with those of coral formation, which are generally very low, and without +any diversity of surface. Dense groves clothed that portion of it +opposite to us, nearly to the beach, giving it at that hour, a somewhat +gloomy and forbidding aspect. + +As we surveyed this lovely, but silent and desolate landscape, the +doubts and apprehensions which we had before experienced began once more +to suggest themselves; but they were dissipated by the cheerful voice of +Arthur, calling upon us to pull for the shore. He steered for the +larger of the two islets, and when, as the boat grated upon the coral +tops beside it, we threw down the oars, the strength which had hitherto +sustained us, seemed suddenly to fail, and we could scarcely crawl +ashore. The last scene of effort and danger, had taxed our powers to +the uttermost, and now they gave way. I was so feeble, that I could +hardly avoid sinking helplessly upon the sand. With one impulse we +kneeled down and returned thanks to Him Who had preserved us through all +the strange vicissitudes of the last few days. We next began to look +round in search of such means of refreshment as the spot might afford. + +The cocoa-palms upon the islet, though far from having attained their +full growth, (few of them exceeding twelve feet in height), bore +abundantly, and we easily procured as much of the fruit as we needed. +Tearing off the outer husk, and punching a hole through the shell, which +in the young nut is so soft that this can be done with the finger, we +drank off the refreshing liquor with which it is filled; then breaking +it open, the half-formed, jelly-like kernel, furnished a species of food +most nutritious and agreeable, and probably the best adapted to our +half-famished condition. + +Hunger and thirst being appeased, our next care was to make some +arrangement for passing the night more comfortably than could be done in +the boat. Selecting a clear space in the centre of the group of young +cocoa-nuts, we proceeded to make a rude tent, by fixing two of the oars +upright in the ground,--tying the mast across their tops and throwing +the sail over it, the ends being then fastened to the ground at a +convenient distance on each side. + +Finding that the bare ground would make a rather hard couch, though far +less so than we had lately been accustomed to, Morton proposed that we +should bring a load of leaves from the neighbouring shore to spread upon +it. He and I accordingly rowed over to the mainland, and collected in +the grove near the beech, a boatload of the clean dry foliage of the +pandanus and hibiscus, which made excellent elastic beds. Johnny +watched our departure as though he considered this an exceedingly rash +and adventurous enterprise, and he seemed greatly relieved at our safe +return. It was now past midnight, and after hauling the boat well up on +the shore, we laid down side by side and were very soon asleep. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +THE EXPLORING EXPEDITION. + +EIULO--PEARL-SHELL BEACH--A WARLIKE COLONY--AN INVASION REPELLED. + + "They linger there while weeks and months go by, + And hold their hope, tho' weeks and months are past; + And still at morning round the farthest sky, + And still at eve, their eager glance is cast, + If there they may behold the far-off mast + Arise, for which they have not ceased to pray." + +For a number of days we remained upon the islet where we had first +landed, seldom visiting even the adjacent shore. During this time we +subsisted upon cocoa-nuts and a small species of shell-fish, resembling +mussels, which we obtained in abundance from the ledges of the +neighbouring reef, and which the little native told us, were used as a +common article of food among his own people. We had reason to feel +grateful that, while we were as feeble and incapable of exertion as we +found ourselves for some days, food could be so readily procured. It +was also fortunate that during this period the weather continued +remarkably fine and mild, with no perceptible variations of temperature; +for I have little doubt that in the reduced and exhausted condition in +which we then were, and being without any effectual shelter, two or +three days of bad weather would have cost some of us our lives. The +nights were dry and mild, and no dew seemed to fall upon the islet: +thanks to this genial weather, and to abundance of nourishing food, we +began rapidly to recover strength. + +Some time passed before we thought of making any attempt to penetrate or +explore the island. We were, naturally, very reluctant to admit even to +ourselves, the probability that our stay upon it was to be of any long +duration; and we did not therefore feel as much interest in its +character and resources as we should otherwise have done. All our +thoughts and hopes ran in one channel. We looked for the coming of a +ship to rescue us from our dreary position; and every morning and +evening, at least, and generally many times a day, some one of us +climbed into the tuft of an inclining palm, to take a careful survey of +that portion of the ocean, which could be seen from our side of the +island. The thought of acting in any respect as though the lonely spot +where we now found ourselves was destined to be our permanent abode, was +in fact too painful and repugnant to our feelings to be willingly +entertained; we were content therefore, to provide for our daily wants +as they arose, without anticipating or preparing for the future. + +A few days passed in this unvaried and monotonous routine, seemed in +reality a long period; recent occurrences began to assume the vagueness +of things that had happened years ago. I remember particularly, that, +in looking back at the dreadful scenes of the mutiny, and our subsequent +sufferings at sea, the whole seemed unreal, and more like a horrible +dream, than an actual part of our past experience. + +We soon found that this inert and aimless mode of living--this state of +passive expectation, while awaiting the occurrence of an event which we +could do nothing to procure or hasten, was a most miserable one: though +our physical strength was in a great measure recruited, there was no +increase of cheerfulness. Except when engaged in procuring food, or +making our daily surveys of the ocean, (which was all our occupation), +we were dispirited and listless. + +Arthur perceived the evil of this state of things, and set himself to +devising a remedy. + +We had been at the island about two weeks, when he proposed, one +morning, that we should go over to the mainland and commence a search +for water, making an excursion a little way into the interior, if it +should prove necessary. + +Max objected to this, saying that we had no need of water, since we +could, without doubt, obtain cocoa-nut milk as long as we should be +obliged to remain upon the island, and that by going into the interior, +out of sight of the ocean, we might lose an opportunity of being +rescued. + +To this, Arthur replied, that the exclusive use of cocoa-nut milk was +considered very unwholesome, and was supposed to be the cause of certain +dropsical complaints, common among the natives of many of the Pacific +islands; that beside; it was by no means certain that a supply of it +could be obtained throughout the year. He finally suggested the +possibility that our stay on the island might be longer than we +anticipated, in which case its resources, and the means of subsistence +which it afforded, would be matters of great interest to us. In regard +to the danger which Max seemed chiefly to fear, he said that we should +seldom altogether lose sight of the ocean, but might, on the contrary, +obtain a wider view of it from other parts of the island. I warmly +seconded Arthur's proposal, for I perceived the probable beneficial +effects of effort, or occupation, of almost any kind. Morton also was +decidedly in favour of it; and Johnny, who had recovered strength and +spirits wonderfully within the last few days, was quite enthusiastic for +the excursion. He calculated confidently upon our discovering a creek +of fresh water, full of fishes and lobsters, and cited the history of +the Swiss family Robinson, in support of the reasonableness of these +expectations; declaring that for us part, he could not see why we might +not count upon equal good fortune with them. Browne seemed indifferent +about the matter. The little native, (whose name, upon Arthur's +authority, I shall write "Eiulo," though "Iooloo," comes nearer to the +sound, as he himself pronounced it), shared in Johnny's delight in +prospect of the expedition; indeed, the two had already become the best +friends in the world, notwithstanding the difficulty of communicating +with one another, and seemed to harmonise in every thing. The excursion +was accordingly determined upon, and this being so, there was nothing to +prevent our setting out at once. + +Morton proposed that, instead of undertaking to penetrate into the +interior, we should keep along the shore to the northward, as by that +means some idea might be gained of the extent of the island; and since +any considerable spring or stream must find its way to the sea, we +should also be more likely to discover water, than by pursuing the other +course. Along the southern shore, the land was lower and less uneven +than in the opposite direction, and held forth a slighter prospect of +springs or streams. The difficulty of holding a straight course through +the forest, where we should be without any means of ascertaining the +points of the compass, was a consideration of great weight, and Morton's +plan was at last adopted, as being upon the whole the best. + +The sun was not more than half an hour high, when we pushed off from the +shore of the islet, and rowed over towards the mainland. The morning +was fine and clear, and either the fresh, bracing sea-air, or the stir +and excitement of setting out upon our expedition, had an exhilarating +influence, for we gradually became quite cheerful, and even animated; +and the faces of my companions began to brighten up with more of the old +familiar expression, than I had seen there for many a day. + +The merest breath of a breeze just stirred the crisp leaves of the palms +upon the neighbouring shore; the tiny wavelets rippled softly upon the +snowy, shell-spangled beach, or, out in the lagoon, danced and sparkled +in the sunlight; still further out and just beyond the barrier that +fenced in this quiet and secluded scene from the open ocean, we could +see the huge blue rollers with their foaming crests surging high into +the air; and the heavy booming of the surf, as it thundered upon the +reef, might be heard for miles around, amid the prevailing silence. +Beyond this again, stretched away to the horizon, the blue, swelling +arch of the ocean--a clear, deep, intense blue, contrasting beautifully +with the paler blue of the sky, against which it was relieved, and with +the emerald expanse of the lagoon. + +Browne gazed about him with more interest than I had yet seen him +manifest in any thing since we had reached the island. He inhaled the +fresh morning air with the appearance of actual relish and enjoyment and +at last, to my surprise, (for Max had accused him, not without some +reason, of having been the most lugubrious of our party), he began to +sing to a brisk and cheerful tune-- + + "O, happy days of hope and rest + Shall dawn on sorrow's dreary night, + Though grief may be an evening guest, + Yet joy shall come with morning light! + The light of smiles shall beam again, + From lids that now o'erflow with tears, + And weary hours of woe and pain, + Are earnests of serener years." + +"Well," said he, as he finished his song, "this may be a desert island, +but I will defy any one to gainsay that the morning is delicious, and +the scene a right lovely one." + +"I am glad you begin to wake up to it," said Morton, "it looks very much +as it has at this hour for ten days past." + +"No, no," protested Browne, "this bright, clear atmosphere makes a very +great difference in the appearance of things: we have had no such +mornings as this." + +"I wish you could manage to enjoy it," said Max, "without missing every +other stroke, and digging me so unmercifully in the back with your +oar-handle; if you can't, I must ask you to change seats with me, and +let me take the bow-oar." + +"How natural and refreshing that sounds!" cried Morton, laughing; "it is +a sure token that prospects are brightening, and serious dangers are +over, when we find ourselves again in a condition to scold about +trifles." + +"It isn't such a trifle, to be thumped and mauled with the butt of an +oar, as I have been all the while Browne was singing, and rhapsodising, +and going into ecstasies about the beauty of the morning; which is just +such another as we have had ever since we have been here; all the +difference being in his feelings, which happen to be a shade or two less +doleful than usual, and so cause things to look brighter." + +"Perhaps you would have me believe," answered Browne, "that the sun will +invariably shine when I chance to be in good spirits, and that a +thunder-storm would be the natural consequence of my having a fit of the +blues?" + +"I should be sorry if that were the case," replied Max, "as we should +then be sure to have a large average of bad weather." + +"This excursion reminds me of our school-days," said Arthur; "it almost +seems as though we were once more starting off together, on one of our +Saturday rambles, as we have so often done on fine summer and autumn +mornings at home." + +"I think I shall never forget those forays through the woods," said +Morton, "over hill and hollow, in search of nuts, or berries, or +wild-grapes, or meadow-plums--the fishing and swimming in summer, the +snow-balling, and sledding, and skating, in winter! an innocent and +happy set of urchins we were then!" + +"Really," said Max, laughing, "to hear you one would suppose that we +were now a conclave of venerable, grey-haired sages, scarcely able to +remember the time when we were children, and so full of wisdom and +experience, that we had long ago ceased to be `innocent and happy.'" + +"Without professing to be so wise or experienced, as to be very unhappy +on that account," returned Morton, "I suppose I may say that I am old +enough, and sufficiently changed since those days, to feel, as I now +look back upon them with a sigh, their peculiar happiness, so unlike any +thing that after-life affords." + +"How singular it is," said Browne, "that you four who were playmates +when children, should have happened to keep together so long." + +"And still find ourselves together on an island in the Pacific Ocean, +thousands of miles from home," added Arthur. + +"After quitting school," continued Browne, "I never met with any of my +comrades there. Of all the mates with whom I used on the Saturday +half-holydays, to go gathering hips and haws, or angling in the Clyde, I +have not since come in contact with one." + +"It don't seem at all like Saturday to me," said Johnny, who for some +minutes past had appeared to have something on his mind, as to the +expediency of communicating which he was undecided; "I was afraid that +it was Sunday, every thing is so still; but I hope it is not, for Arthur +would not think it right to start upon an exploring expedition on +Sunday, and so it would be put off." + +"Truly," said Browne, "that is extremely flattering to the rest of us. +Do you think we are all heathens, except Arthur? I, for one, have no +notion of becoming a savage, because I am on a desert island; I shall go +for maintaining the decencies of Christianity and civilisation." + +"Does any one know what day it really is?" inquired Morton. + +Max said he believed it was Monday. Arthur thought it was Wednesday, +and added that he had memoranda, from which he had no doubt he could fix +the day with certainty. + +"It was on Friday," said Max, "that the mutiny took place, and that we +got to sea in the boat." + +"Yes," said Arthur, "and it was on Wednesday night, I think, five days +afterwards, that we landed here." + +"Five days!" cried Max. "Do you mean to say that we were but five days +at sea before reaching the island?" + +"I think that is all," replied Arthur, "though the time certainly seems +much longer. Then, if my calculations are correct, we have been here +just two weeks to-day, so that this is Wednesday. But," continued he, +"as our heavenly Father has thus guided our little bark safe through +this wilderness of waters, let us celebrate the day of our landing on +this `Canaan,' by making it our first Sabbath, and our grateful voices +shall every seventh day, from this, be lifted up in praise and +thanksgiving for the mercy thus vouchsafed to us." + +While this conversation was going on, we reached the shore. Johnny +scrambled eagerly to the bow, anxious to be the first to land, and he +attained this object of his ambition, by jumping into the water nearly +up to his waist, before the boat was fairly beached. Then, after gazing +around him a moment with exclamations of wonder and admiration, he +suddenly commenced running up and down the wide, firm beach, gathering +shells, with as much zeal and earnestness, as though he was spending a +holiday by the sea-side at home, and could tie up these pretty +curiosities in his handkerchief, and run back with them in five minutes +to his father's house. There was certainly some ground for Johnny's +admiration; just at the spot where we had landed, the shore was thickly +strewn, in a manner which I had never before seen equalled, with +varieties of the most curious and beautiful shells. They were of all +sizes, and of every conceivable shape and colour. The surfaces of some +were smooth and highly polished; others were scolloped, or fluted, or +marked with wave-like undulations. There were little rice and cowrie +shells; mottled tiger shells; spider shells, with their long, sharp +spikes; immense conches, rough, and covered with great knobs on the +outside, but smooth and rose-lipped within, and of many delicate hues. +There were some that resembled gigantic snail shells, and others shaped +like the cornucopias, used to hold sugar-plums for children. One +species, the most remarkable of all, was composed of a substance, +resembling mother-of-pearl, exquisitely beautiful, but very fragile, +breaking easily, if you but set foot on one of them: they were +changeable in colour, being of a dazzling white, a pearly blue, or a +delicate pale green, as viewed in different lights. Scattered here and +there, among these deserted tenements of various kinds of shell-fish, +were the beautiful exuviae and skeletons of star-fish, and sea-eggs; +while in the shallow water, numerous living specimens could be seen +moving lazily about. Among these last, I noticed a couple of +sea-porcupines, bristling with their long, fine, flexible quills, and an +enormous conch crawling along the bottom with his house on his back, the +locomotive power being entirely out of sight. + +Johnny seemed for the moment to have forgotten every thing else, in the +contemplation of these treasures; and it was not until Arthur reminded +him that there was no one to remove or appropriate them, and that he +could get as many as he wanted at any time, that he desisted from his +work, and reluctantly consented to postpone making a collection for the +present. + +Having drawn the boat high up on the beach, and armed ourselves with a +cutlass apiece, (Johnny taking possession of the longest one of the +lot), we commenced our march along the shore, to the right, without +further delay. + +We had by this time scarcely a remaining doubt that the island was +uninhabited. No palm-thatched huts occupied the open spaces, or crowned +the little eminences that diversified its windward side; no wreaths of +smoke could be seen rising above the tops of the groves; no canoes, full +of tattooed savages, glided over the still waters within the reef; and +no merry troops of bathers pursued their sports in the surf. There was +nothing to impart life and animation to the scene, but the varied +evolutions of the myriads of sea-fowl, continually swooping, and +screaming around us. With this exception, a silence like that of the +first Sabbath brooded over the island, which appeared as fresh, and as +free from every trace of the presence of man, as if it had newly sprung +into existence. + +With the continued absence of every indication of inhabitants our +feeling of security had increased to such an extent, that even Johnny +ventured sometimes to straggle behind, or to run on before, and +occasionally made a hasty incursion into the borders of the grove, +though he took care never to be far out of sight or hearing of the main +body. Soon after starting, we doubled a projecting promontory, and lost +sight of the boat and the islet. The reef bent round to the north, +preserving nearly a uniform distance from the shore, and was without any +break or opening. + +The forest in most places, extended nearly to the beach, and was +composed chiefly of hibiscus, pandanus, and cocoa-nut trees, with here +and there a large pisonia, close to the lagoon. One gigantic specimen +of this last species, which we stopped a moment to admire, could not +have been less than twenty feet in girth. Max, Morton, Arthur, and +myself, could not quite span it, taking hold of hands, and Johnny had to +join the ring, to make it complete. For several hours we continued our +journey pretty steadily, encountering no living thing, except tern, +gannets, and other sea-birds, and one troop of gaudy little paroquets, +glittering in green, and orange, and crimson. These paroquets were the +only land-birds we saw during the day. Max pronounced them "frights," +because of their large hooked bills, and harsh discordant cries. They +certainly gave Johnny, a terrible "fright," and indeed startled us all a +little, by suddenly taking wing, with loud, hoarse screams, from a +hibiscus, beneath which we were resting, without having observed that +they were perched over our heads. + +When it was near noon, and we had travelled, as we supposed, making +allowance for delays and deviations, some six or eight miles, the +character of the shore suddenly changed. The white, shelving beach, and +the dense groves meeting it near the water, now disappeared, and were +succeeded by an open strip of land, bordering the lagoon, strewed with +huge, irregular fragments of coral rock, and seamed with gullies. The +line of the forest here receded some distance from the shore, leaving a +broad rounded point, embracing a large area of low and barren ground, +covered thinly with a growth of stunted shrubs, and a few straggling, +solitary looking trees. The lagoon was at this point quite shallow, and +low rocks and coral patches appeared above the surface, at short +distances apart, nearly to the centre of the channel. The reef +opposite, was entirely under water, and its position was indicated only +by a line of breakers. A large portion of the point, comprising several +acres, was covered with the rude nests of various aquatic birds. Many +of these nests were occupied even at that hour, and the birds seemed in +no wise alarmed, or even disturbed by our approach. When we came very +close to any of them, they would survey us with an air half angry, and +half inquisitive, stretching out their long necks; and screwing their +heads from side to side, so as to obtain a view of us first with one +eye, and then with the other; this seeming to be considered +indispensable to a complete and satisfactory understanding of our +character and intentions. After a thorough scrutiny, they would resume +their former appearance of stupid indifference, as though we were +creatures altogether too unimportant to merit further notice. They all, +without exception, seemed perfectly tame and fearless, and quite ready +to resent any infringement upon their rights. + +Johnny, while inspecting too closely the nest of one of them, curiously +constructed of long stiff reeds, resembling rods of steel, suddenly +received, as a rebuke for his impertinence, a blow from the wing of the +offended owner, which laid him sprawling upon his back. + +Notwithstanding this severe lesson, the gentle and amiable aspect of a +large white bird, so far reassured him, that he ventured to make some +friendly advances, whereupon he got so severely pecked, that he at once +gave up all further attempts at familiarity with any of them. This +harsh treatment, in fact, so disgusted Johnny with the whole race of +sea-birds, and so impaired his faith in their innocent and inoffensive +looks, that he declared he would never have any thing more to do with +them, "since that beautiful white bird had bitten him so savagely, when +he only offered to stroke its neck." + +Some of these birds were very large and strong: in several of the +unoccupied nests I saw eggs, as large as those of the duck: they were of +different colours some of them prettily speckled or mottled, but most +were of an ash colour, or a whitish brown. Eiulo pointed out two kinds, +which he said were highly prized for food, and which, as we afterwards +found, were, in fact, nearly equal to the eggs of the domestic duck. + +The heat had by this time become exceedingly uncomfortable, and we +concluded to halt until it should abate a little, at the first +convenient and pleasant spot. Leaving the shore, which, besides being +unsheltered from the sun, was so rugged with crevices and gullies, and +great irregular blocks of coral, as to be almost impassable, we entered +the borders of the wood, and took a short cut across the point. Johnny, +in imitation of the desert islanders of the story-books, desired to give +appropriate names to all the interesting or remarkable localities, with +which we became acquainted. He had already christened the little island +on which we had first landed, "Palm-Islet," and the spot upon the +opposite shore, abounding in brilliant shells, had, from that +circumstance, received the impromptu name of "Pearl-shell Beach." He +now proposed to call the point, "Cape Desolation," from its waste and +forbidding aspect; but finally fixed upon "Sea-bird's Point," as being +more appropriate, the birds having, in fact, taken possession of nearly +its entire area, which, judging from the warlike spirit they had +displayed, they were likely to hold against all comers. Having crossed +the point and reached the lagoon again, we found that the shore resumed +its former character. The forest again extended nearly to the beach, +but it was more open, and not so thickly wooded as before, and the trees +were of a finer growth, and in much greater variety; many of them being +of kinds unknown to any of us. We had not proceeded far, after +regaining the beach, when we espied just such a resting-place as we were +in search of. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +CASTLE-HILL. + +THE NOONDAY HALT--A CHARMING RESTING-PLACE--HEATHEN SKILL VERSUS +CIVILISATION AND THE STORY-BOOKS. + + "Beneath the tropic rays, + Where not a shadow breaks the boundless blaze, + Earth from her lap perennial verdure pours, + Ambrosial fruits, and amaranthine flowers." + +A little way before us rose a smooth and gentle acclivity, crowned by a +clump of majestic trees, which promised to afford a deeper and more +grateful shade than any other spot in sight, and we accordingly made +towards it. On a nearer approach it proved to be more elevated than had +at first appeared, and in order to reach the top, we were obliged to +scale a long series of natural terraces, almost as regular as though +they had been the work of art. From this spot there was a fine view of +the shore, the lagoon, and the ocean, to the north and west. The trees +that covered the level space at the summit of the ascent, were varieties +of a much larger growth than those generally found on the low alluvial +strip of land bordering the lagoon. Conspicuous among them, were the +majestic candle-nut, with its white leaves and orange-coloured blossoms; +the inocarpus, a kind of tropical chestnut; and most magnificent and +imposing of all, a stately tree, resembling the magnolia in its foliage +and manner of growth, and thickly covered with large white flowers, +edged with a delicate pink. The ground was level as a parlour floor, +and free from brushwood or undergrowth of any kind, except a few +long-leaved, fragrant ferns, and in places a thick carpet of flowering +vines and creepers. The trees were stationed at such distances apart, +as to compose a fine open grove, and yet close enough to unite in one +rich mass of foliage overhead, impenetrable to the rays of the sun, and +creating a sombre and almost gloomy shade, even during the fiercest +glare of noonday. In one spot, a number of gigantic trees were grouped +nearly in a circle. Their dense tops formed a leafy dome, through which +not the smallest patch of sky was visible. Around their huge, but +shapely, stems, which one might look upon as forming the pillars of a +natural temple, a number of flowering parasites twined in luxuriant +wreaths, and hung in festoons from the tower branches. A considerable +space around the boles of some of these trees was completely covered by +an elegant species of creeping plant with fine cut foliage of a delicate +pea-green, and large clusters of scarlet blossoms, about which, swarms +of brilliantly-coloured insects, of the butterfly tribe, were hovering. + +"Here we may actually, and not figuratively, indulge in the luxury of +`reposing on the beds of flowers,'" said Max, throwing himself down at +the foot of a towering candle-nut, amid a soft mass of this vegetable +carpeting. All were sufficiently tired by the long march of the +morning, to appreciate the luxury, and our entire company was soon +stretched upon the ground, in attitudes in which comfort rather than +grace, was consulted. + +"What do you think of this, Johnny?" said Max, "it strikes me, as being +quite romantic and like the story-books--almost up to the Arabian +Nights. If the history of our adventures should ever be written, (and +why shouldn't it be?) here's material for a _flowery_ passage. Just see +how this would sound, for instance:--`And now our little band of +toil-worn castaways,' (that's us), `weary and faint with their +wanderings through the desert, (that's Cape Desolation, or Sea-bird's +Point, or whatever Johnny in his wisdom shall conclude to call it), +arrived at a little oasis, (this is it), a green spot in the wilderness, +blooming like the bowers of Paradise, where stretched at ease, upon beds +of bright and odoriferous flowers, they reposed from the fatigues of +their journey.' There, that sentence, I flatter myself is equal in +harmony and effect, to the opening one in the history of Rasselas, +Prince of Abyssinia--there's my idea of the style in which our +adventures should be recorded." + +As we had taken no refreshment since setting out in the morning, we now +began to feel the need of it. At the edge of the eminence, on the +southern side, grew several large cocoa-nut trees, fully three feet in +diameter at the base, and rising to the height of seventy or eighty feet +at the very least. Eiulo was the only one of our number, who would have +dreamed of undertaking to climb either of them; he, however, after +finding a young purau, and providing himself with a strip of the bark, +fastened the ends about his ankles, and then firmly clasping the trunk +of one of the trees with his hands and feet alternately, the latter +being as wide apart as the ligature would permit, he vaulted rapidly and +easily upward, and soon gained the dizzy height where the nuts grew. +Once fairly perched in the tuft of the tree among the stems of the +enormous leaves, where he looked scarcely larger than a monkey, he +quickly supplied us with as many cocoa-nuts as we could put to present +use. Loading ourselves with the fruit, we returned to our first +resting-place, and after piling the nuts in a heap, reclined around it, +after the manner of the ancients at their banquets, while we enjoyed our +repast. Though all these nuts were gathered from the same tree, and, in +fact, from the same cluster, some of them contained nothing but liquid, +the kernel not having yet begun to form, and in these the milk was most +abundant and delicious: in others, a soft, jelly-like, transparent pulp, +delicate and well-flavoured, had commenced forming on the inner shell: +in others, again, this pulp had become thicker and firmer, and more like +the kernel of the imported nut, the milk having diminished in quantity, +and lost in a great measure its agreeable taste. + +Johnny, after having tried all the different varieties with the zeal of +an epicure, declared that he was beginning to get sick of cocoa-nuts: he +wondered whether we should have to live entirely on cocoa-nuts and +shell-fish, and whether there was not some bread-fruit on the island. + +"If there is," said Browne, "it will be of no use to us, unless we can +find means to make a fire, and cook it." + +"Make a fire!" cried Johnny, "that's easy enough--all we've got to do, +is just to get two dry sticks and rub them together briskly for a few +minutes. None of the shipwrecked people I ever read of, had any trouble +about that." + +"How lucky we are," cried Max, gravely, "in having some one with us, who +has read all about all the desert islanders that have ever lived, and +can tell us just what to do in an emergency! Please get a couple of +those dry sticks which you speak of, Johnny, and show us how unfortunate +castaways in our condition, are accustomed to kindle a fire." + +Without seeming, in the simplicity of his heart, to suspect for a moment +the perfect good faith and sincerity of Max's compliment, Johnny +commenced casting about for some sticks or pieces of wood, with which to +make the experiment. He soon found a fallen branch of the inocarpus, +well baked by the sun, and which had long lost every particle of +moisture. Breaking it into two pieces, he began to rub them together +with great zeal, and apparently with perfect faith in the result: +gradually he increased his exertions, manifesting a commendable +perseverance, until the bark began to fly, and the perspiration to +stream down his face; but still there was no fire, nor any sign of it. + +Meantime, Max encouraged him to proceed. + +"Keep it a-going, Johnny!" he cried, "if you stop for half a second, you +lose all your labour; only persevere, and you're sure to succeed; none +of the shipwrecked people you ever read of had any trouble about it, you +know." + +But Johnny concluded that the sticks could not be of the right kind, and +notwithstanding Max's exhortations, he at last gave up the attempt. + +Morton, however, not discouraged by this unfortunate result, nor by +Max's disposition to make fun of the experiment expressed a belief that +the thing could be done, and after preparing the sticks by cutting away +one of the rounded sides of each, he went to work with an earnestness +and deliberation, that caused us to augur favourably of his success. +After nearly ten minutes powerful and incessant friction, the sticks +began to smoke, and Johnny, tossing his cap into the air, gave an +exulting "Hurrah!" + +But his rejoicing proved premature, for, though the wood fairly smoked, +that was the utmost that could be attained, and Morton was obliged to +desist, without having produced a flame. + +Eiulo had been watching these proceedings with great interest; and he +now intimated by signs that he would make a trial. Taking the sticks, +he cut one of them to a point, with Arthur's knife, and made a small +groove along the flat surface of the other, which he then placed with +one end upon the ground, and the other against his breast, the grooved +side being upwards. Placing the point of the first stick in the groove, +he commenced moving it up and down along the second, pressing them hard +together. The motion was at first slow and regular, but increased +constantly in rapidity. By-and-bye the wood began to smoke again, and +then Eiulo continued the operation with greater vigour than ever. At +length a fine dust, which had collected at the lower extremity of the +groove, actually took fire; Arthur quickly inserted the edge of a +sun-dried cocoa-nut leaf in the tiny flame, and it was instantly in a +blaze. + +"Bravo!" shouted Max, "that's what I consider a decided triumph of +heathenism over civilisation, and the story-books." + +Morton now seized the sticks again, and imitating Eiulo's method of +proceeding, succeeded in kindling them, though it took him a +considerable time to do it: thus it was satisfactorily established, by +actual experiment, that we could obtain a fire whenever we should want +one. + +The question was now raised, whether we should continue our exploration +further that day, or remain where we were until the following morning; +and as the heat was still very oppressive, and we were sufficiently +tired already, the latter course was unanimously determined upon. + +Johnny liked the spot which we occupied so well, that he proposed +"building a hut" upon it, and making it our head-quarters, as long as we +should have to stay on the island. It was certainly a pleasant site; +and, commanding as it did a wide view of the ocean, vessels could be +descried at a greater distance, and signalled with a surer prospect of +attracting notice, than from any other locality yet known to us. From +the wooded summit, the land descended on every side--towards the shore +in a series of terraces--towards the interior in one smooth and +continuous slope, after which it again rose in a succession of densely +wooded eminences, irregular and picturesque in their outlines, and each +higher than the last as you proceeded inland; the farthest of them +towering up in strong relief against the south-eastern sky. The various +shades of the masses of different kinds of foliage, with which these +heights were clothed, from that of the pale-leaved candle-nut, to the +sombre green of the bread-fruit groves, contributed greatly to the +pleasing effect of the landscape. On the right, as you looked towards +the ocean, lay the flat tract, occupied by the sea-fowl, and which +Johnny had named after them. At nearly an equal distance on the left, +the line of the beach was broken, by what appeared to be a small grove, +or clump of trees, detached from the main forest, and planted directly +on the line of the shore. + +As we had concluded to suspend our explorations until the next day, +every one was left to his own resources for the remainder of the +afternoon. Johnny having set Morton at work, to make him a bow, "to +shoot birds with," began to occupy himself in the very important task of +finding an appropriate name for the height, which he finally concluded +to call "Castle-Hill," from its regular shape and bold steep outlines. +Max extended himself on his back in the coolest nook he could find, and +spreading his handkerchief over his face, to protect it from the gaudy, +but troublesome, winged insects which haunted the spot, forbade any one +to disturb him on pain of his high displeasure. Arthur, taking Eiulo +with him, proceeded upon a botanising tour about the neighbourhood, in +the hope of making some discovery that might prove useful to us. For my +own part, happening to think of the question which had been started in +the morning, as to the day of the week, I began to make a retrospect of +all that had taken place since the fearful night of the mutiny, and to +endeavour to fix the order of subsequent events, so as to arrive at the +number of days we had been at sea, and upon the island. In the course +of these calculations, and while Browne and myself were discussing the +matter, he suggested the want of pencil and paper. I found that the +last leaf had been torn from my pocket-book, and the rest were in an +equally destitute condition. In this strait, I remembered having heard +Arthur describe the manner in which the native children had been taught +to write in the missionary schools at Eimeo, the only materials used +being plantain leaves and a pointed stick. I mentioned this to Browne, +and we forthwith proceeded to experiment with different kinds of leaves, +until at last we found a large heart-shaped one, which answered our +purpose admirably; it was white, and soft as velvet on the under side, +and marks made upon it with the rounded point of a small stick, were +perfectly distinct, showing of a dark green colour upon a white ground. + +Late in the afternoon, Arthur and Eiulo returned from their tour of +examination, having made, as Arthur intimated, some discoveries, of +which, in due time, we should all reap the benefit. Morton having found +a tough and elastic kind of wood, had shaped a tolerable bow for Johnny, +when it came to providing a string, the resources of both failed. The +difficulty being made known to Eiulo, he volunteered to supply what was +wanted, and went with Johnny and Morton into the adjoining forest to +look for a certain kind of bark, from which to make the required cord. + +"There!" said Arthur, when we were left alone together; "how capitally +this excursion has worked. How differently things seem from what they +did yesterday, when we were at the islet, perfectly stagnant and stupid. +One would not take us for the same people. Only let us always have +something to do, something to interest and busy ourselves about, and we +need not be very miserable, even on a desert island." + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +CAMPING OUT. + +A DESPERATE ENGAGEMENT--JOHNNY DISCOVERS AN "OYSTER TREE"--VAGRANTS, OR +KINGS?--A SLEEPING PRESCRIPTION. + + "Travellers ne'er did lie, + Though fools at home condemn them: If in Naples, + I should report this now, would they believe me?" + +About sunset we went down to the beach to bathe. The trees along the +shore were occupied by immense crowds of exemplary sea-fowl, whose +regular and primitive habits of life had sent them to roost at this +early hour. Notwithstanding their webbed feet, they managed to perch +securely among the branches, many of which were so heavily freighted, +that they bent almost to the ground beneath their load. + +Finding a spot where the beach shelved off gradually into deep water, +with a smooth, firm bottom, free from shells and corallines, we had a +refreshing swim. Afterwards, strolling along the shore by myself, I +found a large fish, beautifully marked with alternate black and yellow +bands, in a shallow, fenced off from the lagoon at low water, by a coral +ridge. The too eager pursuit of some of the smaller tribe of fishes, +had probably beguiled him into this trap, where he had been left by the +tide, to fall a victim, as I confidently reckoned, to his own rapacity. +All escape into deep water seemed to be pretty effectually cut off and I +looked upon him as already the captive of my bow and spear; but fearing +lest some of the others should come up to share the glory of securing so +splendid a prize, I forthwith set about effecting his actual capture. +Rolling my trowsers above my knees, I waded into the water to drive him +ashore; but I soon found that my task was not going to prove by any +means as easy as I had anticipated. My intended victim was exceedingly +vigorous and active, and as ferocious as a pike. He obstinately refused +to be driven at all, and struggled and floundered as desperately as if +he already had a vivid presentiment of the frying-pan, snapping +viciously at my fingers whenever I undertook to lay hold of him. To add +to the aggravating features of the case, he seemed to bristle all over +with an inordinate and unreasonable quantity of sharp-pointed fins and +spines, which must have been designed by nature as weapons of defence, +since there were certainly more of them than any fish could use to +advantage for swimming purposes. I began to suspect that I had caught a +Tartar; but I had now gone too far to back out with credit: my +self-respect wouldn't admit of the thought. So, taking a short +breathing spell, I again advanced to the attack, somewhat encouraged by +perceiving that my scaly antagonist seemed exhausted and distressed by +his recent exertions. His mouth was wide open, and his gills quivered; +but I was rather uncertain whether to regard this as a hostile +demonstration, or a sign of pain and fatigue. However, at it we went; +and, after getting my hands badly cut by some of the aforesaid bristling +spines and fins, besides being drenched with water, and plastered all +over with wet sand, which he splashed about in the struggle, I succeeded +in seizing him firmly by the tail, and throwing him high and dry upon +the beach. I then scooped out a hollow in the sand, a little above the +tide-mark, and filling it with water, pushed him into it, thus securing +him for the present. + +Max, Morton, and Browne, who had been practising climbing cocoa-nut +trees, at the edge of the wood, with very indifferent success, had +witnessed, from a distance, the latter part of the "engagement," as Max +facetiously called it; and they now came up to learn the particulars, +and to inquire "whether it was a shark, or a young whale, that I had +been having such a terrible time with." While they were admiring my +captive, and jocosely condoling with me on the hard usage which I had +received, the voice of Johnny, (who, accompanied by Eiulo, had ventured +to stroll off in the direction of the point), was heard, raised to its +highest pitch, as he shouted for us to "come and see something strange." +But it seemed that his impatience would not permit him to await the +result of his summons, for the next moment he came running towards us in +a state of great excitement, and all out of breath, crying out that he +had "found a tree covered with oysters," and he had no doubt, there were +"lots more of them." + +"A tree covered with _what_?" inquired Browne, dubiously. + +"With oysters--with fine, large oysters!" cried Johnny, "just come and +see for yourselves." + +"Wonderful island! productive soil!" exclaimed Max, in mock admiration. +"If oysters will take root, and grow here, I suppose pretty much any +thing will: I believe I will plant my boots to-morrow: they may do for +seed, and are good for nothing else any longer--don't you begin to think +this must be an enchanted island, Johnny?" + +"O, you may make fun of it, if you please; but it's true: and if you'll +come with me, I'll shew you the trees." + +"Well," said Browne, "I am ready for almost any thing in the way of the +marvellous, since having seen a solid and substantial-looking island +turn into a vapour, and vanish away before my very eyes. I shall be +careful about doubting any thing, until I get back to some Christian +country, where things go on regularly. For the present, I am in state +of mind to believe in phoenixes and unicorns--and why not in +oyster-trees? Who knows but we have happened upon a second Prospero's +isle? Lead on, Johnny, and bring us to this wonderful tree." And +Johnny started off accordingly, followed by Browne and Morton. + +In a moment the latter was heard calling out, "I say, Max! do you +understand conchology?" + +"Yes, enough to tell a bivalve when I see one: should like to have a +`dozen fried' before me now." + +"If a `dozen raw' will answer, just step this way, and we'll accommodate +you equal to Florence." + +On hastening to the spot, all scepticism as to the "oysters growing on +trees," was speedily removed. A row of mangroves lined the shore for +some distance, each elevated upon its white pile of protruding and +intertwisted roots. Attached to the branches of these trees, which +overhung the water and drooped into it at high tide, were abundance of +fair-sized oysters. Looking down into the water beneath the mangroves, +I perceived the certain indications of an extensive and well-stocked +oyster-bed. The bottom was thickly covered with them, in every stage of +growth multitudes being scarcely larger than a sixpence. I could also +see, through the shallow water, an immense number of little white +specks, like drops of spermaceti, scattered about among them. It was +evident, that here was an abundant and unfailing supply of these +delicious shell-fish. + +Browne broke off from one of the trees a large branch, having half a +dozen oysters attached to it, with which he hastened to confront the +unbelieving Max, and flourishing it in his face, demanded to know if he +was "convinced now." Although constrained to admit that they _looked_ +very like oysters, Max seemed to consider the evidence of more than one +of the senses necessary to afford satisfactory proof of so extraordinary +a phenomenon, and accordingly proceeded to see how they tasted. + +After opening one of the largest, (using his cutlass as an +oyster-knife), and making the experiment with due deliberation, he +announced himself perfectly satisfied. + +By the time we had all sufficiently tasted the quality of the oysters, +(which were really very good, and well-flavoured, notwithstanding the +unusual position in which they were discovered), it had become quite +dark. Though the evening was fine, there was not much light, the moon +and stars glimmering faintly through a soft purple haze, which, as I had +observed since we had been on the island, generally seemed to fill the +atmosphere for a short time after sunset, and at a little later hour +entirely disappeared. As we strolled back towards the foot of +"Castle-Hill," Johnny suddenly looked up, and inquired, as if the +thought had just occurred to him, where we were going to sleep. + +"That's a pretty question to ask," said Browne, laughing, "it implies +that we are common vagrants." + +"So we are, strictly speaking," answered Max, "we have no regular means +of living, and no fixed place of abode, and that I believe, makes us +common vagrants, according to Webster." + +"I should think our means of living were `regular' enough to rescue us +from the definition," replied Morton, "having been thus far, cocoa-nuts +and mussels every day, and all day long, and nothing but cocoa-nuts and +mussels. I am glad that there is now some prospect of a little more +irregularity in future." + +"As to our having no fixed habitation or place of abode," said Browne, +"that does not arise from poverty, or lack of land--`the isle is all +before us where to choose'--and we are now on a tour of observation +through our extensive domains, in order to decide upon the finest spot +for our head-quarters. Meantime, for a night or two, we shall have to +be satisfied with `a tent in the green wood, a home in the grove,' in +other words, we shall have to `camp out,' as the most renowned hunters +and soldiers have frequently done before us. I'm sure there's no +vagrancy in that." + +"Why," cried Johnny, forgetting for the moment his anxiety on the score +of our quarters for the night, "we are no more vagrants than Robinson +Crusoe was:-- + + "`We are monarchs of all we survey, + And our realm there is none to dispute,' + +"As he says of himself so that we are much more like kings than +vagrants." + +"And the sea-birds and fishes," said Max, "are to be considered as our +subjects, I presume, since we have no man Friday, and no goats or +poll-parrots to reign over." + +"Yes," said Johnny, "I suppose so; there are enough of them too." + +"And some very disloyal, rebellious, and stiff-necked ones among them," +added Max, "who ought to be dealt with as traitors forthwith--that +sturdy feathered rebel for instance, who, not regarding the +inviolability of the royal person, no longer ago than this morning laid +one of our royal majesties sprawling upon his royal back." + +"And that other scaly traitor," added Browne, "who perversely refused to +come out of the water to be cooked, in accordance with the royal will, +and who nearly bit off the sacred thumb of one of our majesties, in +resisting the royal authority." + +"Well, Johnny," said Max, "if we are not actually kings, we at any rate +have some royal blood upon the island. Not to speak of myself, who am +descended direct from `Kaiser Maximilien,' here is Eiulo, who is a real +prince, his father being King of the Cannibal Islands, or some other +islands in these seas." + +"I wish you wouldn't speak so of Eiulo's father," said Johnny, warmly, +"he is not a cannibal, and I believe he is a very good man; I think his +islands are near here, and if we should one day get there, he would +treat us kindly, and let us go home whenever we should have an +opportunity." + +"Hilloa!" cried Max, "what has put all that into your head? What do you +know about Eiulo's father, or his islands, or where they are?" + +This sudden outburst of Johnny's surprised us all, with perhaps the +exception of Arthur, and we listened with some interest, as he replied +to Max's volley of questions. + +"Oh, I have talked with Eiulo about it," he answered, "mostly by signs; +and he has made me understand that he believes his home is not far +distant--off in that direction, (pointing north), and that ships +sometimes stop there; and so I have been thinking that if we could only +find the way there, we should have some prospect of getting home at +last." + +Upon this we became silent and thoughtful; nothing further was said, +until Johnny recurred to the question which he had started a few moments +before, and again asked where we proposed to pass the night. + +"Not in those gloomy woods, I hope," said he, "where it is so lonely, +and the wind and the trees make such strange noises. I would rather +sleep down here upon the shore; this nice dry, white sand, up where the +water never comes, will make a very good bed." + +Thus far, we had passed every night upon the islet, to which we had now +become familiarised and accustomed. Its small extent, and separation +from the mainland, gave it an air of security, which made us feel more +at our ease there at night, than we could among the sombre and +unexplored forests of the larger island, about which we as yet knew so +little. Johnny's timidity was not therefore unnatural. Indeed, unless +I am mistaken, none of us was, on this first night of our exploration, +entirely free from a vague spirit of insecurity, and of liability to +some unknown danger. + +"That will hardly do, Johnny," said Browne, in answer to his suggestion +about taking up our quarters for the night upon the shore, "a heap of +dry pandanus leaves will make a much more comfortable bed than the hard +sand. Thus I propose to arrange it--we will go up to the top of the +hill where we rested to-day, and lodge there; our beds of leaves shall +be all in a circle, and Johnny's shall be in the middle; and then he +won't feel lonesome or afraid, for all the uncanny noises of the wind +and the trees; knowing that he has good friends and true all around him, +and particularly one stout John Browne, who is worth all the rest +together, being a fair match for any thing in this part of the +South-Seas!" and by way of raising Johnny's spirits, and inspiring him +with the greater confidence in the prowess of his protector, he +flourished his cutlass, and went scientifically through the broad-sword +exercise, slashing and carving away at his imaginary antagonist, with a +fierceness and vigour wonderful to behold, having lopped off an +indefinite quantity of airy heads and limbs, be finished, by reciting +with a bold and warlike air-- + + "Scots wha hae wi' Wallace bled! + Scots wham Bruce has aften led!" etcetera. + +This demonstration seemed to produce the desired effect and Johnny soon +became reassured, and quite reconciled to "camping out" in the woods. + +The evening was so fine, and the gentle breeze setting in from the ocean +was so cool and grateful, after the excessive heat of the day, that we +continued for some time loitering along the shore. The sea was highly +phosphorescent; that is, during the earlier part of the evening, and +before the mist or haze before spoken of cleared up. The tiny wavelets, +as they rippled upon the beach in rapid succession, sparkled with +phosphoric fire, and out in the lagoon, wherever a coral patch rose to +the surface, or the water was disturbed by any floating object, it gave +forth a clear and brilliant light, and was studded by myriads of fiery +dots and spangles. + +At length Johnny began to complain of weariness, and we scaled the +terraced hill, and gathering a large quantity of clean and well-dried +leaves, arranged our beds as Browne had suggested, beneath the group of +noble trees where we had taken our siesta at noon. + +The novelty of our situation, long proved with me an effectual antidote +to fatigue and drowsiness, and I lay, looking up at the moon glimmering +through the foliage of the trees, an hour after the rest seemed to be +asleep. + +Just as I was at last sinking into unconsciousness, Johnny, sitting up +among the leaves in which he was half buried, inquired softly, "Max, are +you awake!" I spoke to him, to let him know that he was not alone. "I +can't get asleep," said he, "every thing looks so beautiful and so +strange. It seems to me I never saw the moon and the stars so big and +so bright." + +"You must keep your eyes shut, and not look at the moon, if you want to +get asleep." + +"But the trees keep rustling so; just as if they were whispering softly +to one another; and then the sound of the waves on the reef is so sad +and mournful, that it sets me to thinking all sorts of strange things. +I wonder whether there are any wild animals on the island!" I assured +him that it was quite improbable, and that no dangerous animals of any +kind were ever found on the islands of the Pacific. This, however, did +not seem to satisfy him entirely, and I began to suspect that his mind +was running on the jackalls, tiger-cats, and hyenas of the Swiss Family +Robinson. A question or two which he presently asked, showed that I had +guessed correctly, and I hastened to meet the difficulty, by reminding +him that "their island, (if indeed it was an island at all, and not a +part of the mainland), was situated near the coast of New Holland, from +which animals might pass over to it by swimming." + +"Why, I thought," said Johnny, "that there were no wild animals in New +Holland, except kangaroos and opossums: my book of beasts, birds, and +fishes, says so." + +This was a fact in Natural History which I was not prepared to gainsay; +especially when backed by so redoubtable an authority as "the book of +beasts, birds, and fishes." For a moment I was taken all aback; but +being loathe to give up my little companion a prey to imaginary +jackalls, tiger-cats, and hyenas, I rallied again, resolved upon one +more desperate effort for his deliverance. + +"Well," said I, "the fact is, we don't know exactly where the Swiss +Family Robinson's island really was--it is altogether uncertain. It may +have been near Java, or Ceylon, or the coast of India, in which case, +all those Asiatic beasts could easily have got there--that is, if the +two places were close enough together. Now we know that we are +somewhere in the middle of the Pacific, a vast distance from any +continent, or any of the great Indian islands, so that large animals +here are out of the question, unless they have taken a swim of a +thousand miles or so." + +This seemed to be pretty decisive; and I think it settled the jackalls, +tiger-cats, and hyenas, effectually, for Johnny said no more on the +subject, except to remark, that, even if they _could_ swim that +distance, they would stand a bad chance with the sharks and other +sea-monsters; to which I added, as a final clincher, that in any event +they would be sure to starve on the voyage, unless they should bring a +large supply of provisions along. "Well," said he, after a minute's +silence, "I'm not afraid of anything; but somehow or other I feel very +wide awake to-night, and not in the least sleepy." + +"Shut your eyes," said I, "and think of a great wheel, whirling round +and round, with a regular and even motion, and never stopping, until you +have counted it go round a hundred times." + +Johnny laughed softly to himself, as though pleased with this device, +and was quite still for a minute or two; then he spoke again. + +"It has gone round a hundred times, but towards the end it got a-going +dreadfully fast; it _would_ go fast in spite of all I could do." + +"Never mind the wheel, then," said I, "but think of the huge lazy swells +in a calm, rising and falling, rising and falling, as they did when we +lay rocking in the boat, all those long days and nights, out on the +sea." + +"Well, I'll try--but I don't believe it will be of any use." + +"Don't look at the moon, and don't speak to me again--unless for +something very particular--and now good night." + +"Good night!" and he nestled down among his leaves again. In a very few +minutes the deep and regular breathing of the little patient, proved the +efficacy of my sleeping prescription, and announced that his troubles +for that night were over. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +DOMESTIC EMBARRASSMENTS. + +A DESERT ISLAND BREAKFAST--PERSUASIVE REASONING--ROMANCE AND REALITY-- +THE PRINCE AND PRINCESS. + + "Now my co-mates, and brothers in exile, + Hath not long custom made this life more sweet + Than that of painted pomp? Are not these woods + More free from peril than the envious court? + Here feel we but the penalty of Adam, + The seasons' difference; as the icy fang + And churlish chiding of the winter's wind." + +The next morning "the Islanders," or some of them, at least, were +stirring early; and the first thing that attracted my attention, on +opening my eyes, was a busy group, consisting of Max, Eiulo, and Johnny, +gathered round a fire at a little distance, and engaged in some +apparently very interesting operation. A savoury smell at the same time +saluted my olfactory organs, and on approaching the scene of action, to +investigate the matter more closely, I found my finny prize of the +preceding evening undergoing a somewhat primitive style of cookery, of +which Max appeared to be the chief director and superintendent. A +number of large oysters were also roasting in the embers; and from these +last proceeded the grateful and appetising odour referred to. + +"Good morning!" cried Max; "you see we have breakfast nearly ready; and +a breakfast, too, that will be a positive luxury, after so long a course +of cocoa-nut diet; how Browne will exult at the sight of it; how his +eyes will open--to say nothing of his mouth! And don't we deserve a +vote of thanks for our early labours for the general good?" + +Morton and Browne at this moment emerged from their respective heaps of +leaves, and, after rather more than the usual amount of yawning and +stretching of limbs, came towards the fire. + +"Fee, faw, fo, fum!" cried Morton, snuffing the agreeable smell of the +cookery in progress, "I trust we're not too late for breakfast, and that +there is something more than the savour of good victuals left." + +"You are in good time," said Johnny, bustling about the fire with an air +of official dignity, "the first bell hasn't rung yet." + +"But why has Shakespeare such a long face?" said Max; "has camping out +caused a reminiscence of rheumatism!" + +"Bad dreams, horrible dreams!" answered Browne, shaking his head +solemnly, "which came of lying staring at the moon last night, until I +fell asleep:"--then throwing himself into an attitude, he commenced +declaiming with a tragic air-- + + "`O, I have passed a miserable night, + So full of fearful dreams, of ugly sights, + That as I am a Christian, faithful man, + I would not pass another such a night + Though 'twere to buy a world of happy days, + So full of dismal terror was the time.'" + +"Bravo!" cried Max, applauding furiously, "I like to see that; it's what +I call coming out strong under discouraging circumstances. Here are we, +six forlorn castaways, on a desert island, somewhere, (no one knows +where), in the Pacific Ocean; and, instead of moping, and sulking, and +bemoaning our hard fate, we wake up of a fine morning, quite bright and +cheerful, and one of the six, (or seven, more correctly speaking), goes +to work spouting Shakespeare, carrying us back to old times, and making +us feel, (as Morton would say), like `happy schoolboys again.'" + +"What's all this?" cried Arthur, coming forward with a puzzled air, +"what is Max making a speech about? has he taken the stump as a +candidate for the presidency of the island?" + +"He needn't do that," said Browne, "we're not going to have any +presidents, or other republican trumpery here; I have formally taken +possession of the island in the name of Victoria; and it is therefore a +colony of Great Britain; I shall apply, at the first convenient +opportunity, for letters patent, making me colonial governor." + +"Tory, monarchist!" cried Max, "recant at once, or you sha'n't taste a +mouthful of my breakfast." + +"Do you think I'll sell my loyalty for a mess of pottage! No, I'm for a +well-regulated monarchy: hurrah for Victoria!" + +"Down with the Britisher!" cried Johnny, entering into the spirit of the +scene, and tugging at Browne's coat-tails; "make him hurrah for the +stars and stripes, or else don't give him any of our oysters!" + +"You're surely not going back to the principles of the dark ages--you +won't attack the right of private judgement, and persecute for opinion's +sake." + +"The right of private judgment, indeed!" answered Max, with great +contempt. "I hold that no person can have a right, on any pretence +whatever, to entertain erroneous opinions on important subjects, +affecting the welfare of mankind. If a man does entertain such +opinions, it is the duty of those who know better to convince him of the +error by the most effectual arguments at their command. It is, +therefore, my duty to open your eyes to the blessings of liberal +institutions. I have here, (pointing towards the incipient breakfast), +the most powerful means to assist and quicken your perception of the +truth. Shall I not use those means?" + +"The line of argument which you indicate is exceedingly forcible, (how +delightfully those oysters smell!) I really think I begin to perceive +some of the advantages of republicanism already." + +"With the right of private judgment, properly understood," resumed Max, +"I should be reluctant to interfere. You will, I presume, enjoy the +exercise of so precious a privilege, even with a cocoa-nut breakfast, +which you can probably obtain, by requesting Prince Eiulo to scale one +of yonder tufted trees." + +"How clear the matter becomes with a little reflection," observed Browne +"(this camping out in the open air gives one a famous appetite). In +fact your reasoning is almost irresistible, (that fish looks +particularly nice), and really I begin to think I can safely profess +myself a good republican--until after breakfast at any rate." + +Max's culinary operations being at last completed, Johnny placed a huge +shell to his lips, and sounded a long blast by way of announcement that +breakfast was ready. The fish was served up in a fresh palm-leaf, and +Johnny declared with much complacency, that not all the crockery-stores +in New York, could furnish a platter of such royal dimensions. The +leaves of the hibiscus, served admirably for plates; for knives and +forks, we used the strong stalks, or central fibres, of cocoa-nut +leaflet; which, with fingers in reserve for an emergency, answered at +least as well as the chopsticks of the Chinese. Upon the whole, it +cannot be denied that our table-service, simple as it was, has its +advantages: it involved no necessity for any washing of dishes, no +anxiety on the score of broken crockery, and we could indulge in the +extravagance of a new dinner set every day, or even at every meal, for +that matter, if so disposed. + +The fish proved most excellent, resembling the striped bass in flavour +and appearance: as to the oysters, they were unanimously voted equal to +Shrewsburys. + +"Ah!" sighed Max, "if we had now but a cup of coffee and a hot roll, +those inestimable blessings of civilisation, we could almost forget that +we are on a desert island." + +"Wait until the bread-fruit ripens," said Arthur, "and we shall have a +tolerably fair substitute for your `hot rolls.' Eiulo will show us the +most approved mode of preparing it, and we shall find it nearly equal to +the wheaten loaf." + +"All that Max seems to think about, is the eating," said Browne, +swallowing the last remaining oyster, "but I begin to feel troubled +about another matter: see, I am getting fairly out at the elbows, and +neither `coffee and rolls,' nor roast-beef and plum-pudding in +indefinite quantities, would afford me any satisfaction, compared to the +possession of a supply of clothing, or even a few changes of linen--in +fact, comrades, what are we to do? There is danger that we shall all +become savages: I begin to feel a loss of self-respect already." + +"We shall have to go into the manufacturing business, I suppose," said +Arthur. "I have often watched the whole process of making tappa, or +native cloth, from the bark of the paper-mulberry; it is quite simple, +and I have no doubt we can succeed in it; I have talked with Eiulo on +the subject and find that he understands the process thoroughly." + +"But are there any paper-mulberries on the island!" inquired Morton. + +"I have not seen any," answered Arthur. "If there are none, the bark of +the bread-fruit tree will answer nearly as well: the cloth made from it +is as strong and durable, though not so fine." + +"For the present, and before we go into home manufactures," said Max, "I +advise Shakespeare, in order to avoid the loss of his remaining +self-respect in consequence of wearing foul linen, to betake himself to +the beach, wash his garments, and take a bath until they dry in the sun, +which is the course I intend to pursue myself." + +"And what are we going to do for shoes, I wonder!" said Johnny, "mine +are badly cracked and torn, and nearly worn out: we shall all have to go +barefoot!" and he looked aghast at the thought. + +"We must kill a shark by-and-bye," said Arthur, "when we have nothing +more pressing to do; and we can make leggins, or moccasins, from the +skin." + +"How these things kill the romance and poetry of desert island life!" +said Max, "there's no romance about being out at the elbows, or being +obliged to wear dirty linen--" + +"Or in doing one's own washing in salt-water, and sitting naked while +one's clothes are drying," interposed Browne, pathetically. + +"Or in having your toes poke out at the end of your boots," added +Morton, advancing his right foot in illustration. + +"No! these are all stern realities," said Max, "cases not provided for +in the story-books; how is it, Johnny, are there any precedents going to +show how desert islanders do their washing and mending?" + +"I think they generally saved heaps of clothes from the wreck," answered +Johnny, gravely. "Robinson Crusoe brought off several chests, +containing ever so many sailors' clothes of all sorts; whether there +were any shoes or not, I don't remember: the Swiss family Robinson also +obtained an abundance of such things from the wreck of their ship before +it sunk; Philip Quarll made garments for himself from the skins of +animals." + +"But what are we to do? we havn't any wreck from which to supply +ourselves with chests of clothing, with arms and ammunition, and stores +of ship-biscuit and salt provisions. We're worse off it seems, than any +of our predecessors. And since we are not supplied with the requisite +capital and stock-in-trade for desert islanders, it is reasonable to +infer that we are not destined to a Robinson Crusoe life, so that we may +confidently expect to be taken off by some ship, in a short time." + +As we were finishing our breakfast, a couple of tiny, fairy-like tern, +came flying round us. They were very tame, and hovered smoothly over +our heads, at the distance of sometimes but a few feet. Their plumage +was snowy-white, and as they glided quietly around, peering curiously +into our faces, you could almost fancy that there was the gleam of +intelligence in their large eyes. + +"O, what beautiful little birds!" cried Johnny, in great delight: "I +wish I had some crumbs of bread for them." + +"Who knows, Johnny," suggested Max, "but these strange little birds, as +they seem to be, are no birds, after all, but an unfortunate prince and +princess, who having incurred the resentment of some potent enchanter, +have been transformed by his magical arts into their present shape, and +banished to this desert island; and have now come to us for sympathy and +assistance--see what a mournful expression there is in their mild dark +eyes!" Johnny was pleased with the conceit, and the little tern were +always afterwards known as the prince and princess. They frequently +came hovering around us in the most friendly and fearless manner, when +we were in that part of the island. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +THE PROGRESS OF DISCOVERY. + +A VOICE IN THE WOODS--VIVE NAPOLEON!--CALCULATING THE LONGITUDE--THE +"WILD FRENCHMAN'S" HAT. + + _Stephano_. Hark! what sound is that? + _Caliban_. Art thou afeard, master? + _Stephano_. No, monster, not I. + _Caliban_. Be not afeard: the isle is full of noises. + +Our failure to discover fresh water, or any indications of it, during +yesterday's expedition, increased the anxiety which we felt on the +subject and we determined to devote the day to a continuation of the +search. + +The base of Castle-Hill was skirted on the left and divided from the +neighbouring forest by a deep gully, that had much the appearance of a +dried-up water-course, and was probably a channel by which, in the rainy +season, the water from the higher ground was conveyed to the sea. From +the hill we could trace the course of the ravine, until it struck the +beach, near the point where the small grove, before spoken of, seemed to +spring up out of the lagoon. Our last evening's ramble along the shore +had extended nearly to this spot and to avoid going over the same ground +a second time, we struck into the ravine, and followed its course as it +descended towards the beach. + +Johnny every now and then, without any apparent object, unless to evince +his entire superiority to any feeling of timidity, separated himself +from the rest and disappeared for a time in the forest, generally +returning with a specimen of some new plant or flower, or an account of +some strange bird, or curious tree, which he had seen. From one of +these adventurous excursions, he came rushing back; closely followed by +Eiulo, both looking a good deal frightened, and, as soon as he had +recovered breath sufficiently to be able to speak, he earnestly affirmed +that he had heard a man call out to him in the wood. His statement was +strange enough; he had found a twining plant, with a flower like a +morning glory, and called loudly for Eiulo, who was a little way off, to +come and see if it was the patara vine. The root of this plant is a +valuable and nutritious esculent, and Arthur had described the leaf and +flower to us, in order that we might recognise it if met with. +Immediately a harsh voice issued from a neighbouring thicket, uttering +some words which he did not distinctly understand, but they were in +French, and were something about Napoleon. + +"In French!--and about Napoleon!" cried Arthur, in amazement. "Are you +quite sure, Johnny, that you heard any words at all;--any thing more +than a strange noise of some kind?" + +But Johnny was positive;--he had heard the "Napoleon," as plainly as he +ever heard any thing. There were only a few words--not more than two or +three, but they were spoken very distinctly, and quite loud, as if the +person were cheering; he could not be mistaken. + +"Only two or three words," pursued Arthur, "would you know them again if +you should hear them repeated?" + +"Yes, I think I should." + +"Was it `Vive Napoleon!' that you heard?" + +"Those are the very words!" cried Johnny; "they were spoken as plainly +as you speak them, but in a rougher voice." + +"Did you see any thing--did you look towards the thicket!" + +"I saw something stir, but could not tell what it was. The voice was +harsh and angry, and I was frightened, and ran away as fast as I could. +I thought perhaps it was a wild man--some one who had been shipwrecked +here many years ago, and lived alone in the woods until he had grown +wild or mad." + +Johnny was so positive in this singular story, that for a moment we +hardly knew what to think of it. Eiulo too had heard the voice--the +same harsh voice that Johnny described as issuing from the thicket. But +the notion of any person amusing himself by shouting "Vive Napoleon!" in +the forests of a solitary island in the Pacific, seemed so preposterous, +that we could not help coming to the conclusion, that some sudden noise +in the wood had seemed to Johnny's excited imagination like a human +voice--though why he should fancy that it uttered those particular +words--the words of a strange language, was a puzzle which we could not +solve. We, however, turned into the forest, and Johnny pointed out the +spot where he was standing when he heard the voice. There were the +vines, with flowers like morning-glories; and there was the thicket +whence, as he alleged, the sound had proceeded. We shouted aloud +several times, but there was no response, except from a large bird that +rose heavily into the air, uttering a discordant scream; and we were +satisfied that it was this, or some similar sound, that had startled +Johnny; in which conviction we dismissed the matter from our minds. + +The flowering vine proved to be the patara, which Arthur had been so +anxious to discover, and on digging it up, two roots, resembling large +potatoes, were found attached to the stalk. Quite a number of these +plants were scattered about the neighbourhood; enough, as Arthur said, +to make a tolerable potato patch. + +All this time Max was missing, having been some little distance in +advance of the rest, when Johnny had raised his strange alarm. When we +got back into the ravine, he was not in sight, but we had hardly resumed +our progress towards the shore, when we heard him calling out that he +had found water. At this announcement, our orderly march broke at once +into a hasty scramble. Browne alone maintained his dignity, and came on +at his usual elephantine pace, probably suspecting that the pretended +discovery was a hoax. Morton and I raced along the hollow, "neck and +neck," till we suddenly reached a point where there was an abrupt +descent to the level of the shore. We were under too much headway to be +able to stop, and jumping together down the steep bank, we narrowly +missed alighting upon Max, as he lay extended on the ground, scooping up +water with his hand, from the basin of a small pool. I came down close +beside him, while Morton, sprang fairly over his head, and alighted with +a great splash in the centre of the pool. I had barely time to roll out +of the way, when the others, with the exception of Browne, came tumbling +in their turn over the bank, which took them as much by surprise as it +had us. Morton's lamentable figure, as he stood motionless in the midst +of the pool, drenched with water, and with a great patch of black mud +plastered over one eye, together with Max's look of consternation at his +own narrow escape, were irresistibly ludicrous, and provoked a laugh, in +which, after a moment, they both heartily joined. + +"Very obliging of you, Morton," said Max, recovering his +self-possession, "I wanted to see how deep it was, and you are a good +enough measuring-stick; just stand still a minute, if you please." + +"You have reason to feel obliged to me," answered Morton, extricating +himself from the mud, "it was on your account solely that I got into +this pickle. I had to choose between breaking your neck, as you lay +right in my way, or jumping into this hole, and not having much time to +deliberate, it isn't surprising if I came to a foolish conclusion." + +"It would be less unfeeling," replied Max, "as well as more strictly +according to the facts of the case, to say a hasty conclusion, which +might be understood literally, and would then be literally correct." + +The water, which we found to be good, though slightly brackish, was +contained in a narrow pit situated in the centre of a circular hollow, +or basin. It was not more than half full, but its sides showed a fresh +and distinct water-mark, more than a foot above the present level. At +the edge of the basin, a solitary palm shot upward its straight shaft, +to the height of nearly a hundred feet; the long, fringed leaves +drooping from the top, like a bunch of gigantic ostrich plumes, and +overshadowing the well. It seemed difficult to account for this supply +of fresh water in so unpromising a spot, and so near the sea-shore. I +was at first inclined to think it nothing more than a reservoir of +standing water, left by the last rains, which had filled not only the +pit, but also the surrounding basin. The former being deep and narrow, +evaporation would be very gradual, which might, I supposed, account for +the small quantity still remaining. + +"That can hardly be," said Arthur, when I suggested this explanation, +"the spot is wholly unsheltered from the sun, except at noon, by this +screen of palm-leaves, and if the entire hollow were filled with water +this morning, there would not be a drop of moisture left in three days, +unless the supply were renewed. Besides, the water is too fresh and +sweet to have stood since the last rains." + +"I should judge," said Morton, "that this spot is but little above the +level of the lagoon, and if the bottom of the well here, is below that +level at ebb tide, this supply of fresh water can be easily accounted +for." + +"The rise and fall of the tide here, does not seem to be more than +eighteen inches, or two feet," said Max, "and as to the depth of the pit +or well, as you call it, you ought to be able to speak with confidence, +having so recently been to the bottom of it." + +"There are wells on the low islands of the West Indies," said Morton, +"which communicate with the sea, and rise and fall with the tide, the +sea-water penetrating through the sand, and being distilled in its +passage: and I think this is one of the same kind. Here is a recent +water-mark, more than a foot above the present level. If I am right, we +shall find that the tide is now low." + +Arthur thrust a stick into the side of the well to mark the height of +the water, while Johnny rushed furiously down to the beach, and in a +moment came posting back with the announcement that the tide _was_ low. + +"Very well, so far," said Arthur, "it only remains to be seen, whether, +when the tide has risen, there will be any corresponding rise here." + +"And, meantime," suggested Browne, "let us refresh ourselves with a +bath, before the sun gets higher; and we can also take the opportunity +to give our under garments the benefit of an ablution, as Max has +proposed." + +No one can fully appreciate the luxury of sea-bathing who has not +enjoyed it within the tropics. + +The calm, transparent water, with the firm white beach and bottom, +looked so deliciously cool and inviting, that the suggestion was adopted +as soon as made; and the expedition with which the preliminaries were +got through with, reminded me of those eager races to "the pond," on the +letting out of the village school at home, of a hot summer afternoon, in +which several of our present company had often been competitors for the +honour of being "the first one in." Arthur warned us to beware of +sharks, and to keep a vigilant look-out for "back fins," and our dread +of those prowling and rapacious monsters, was a great drawback to the +enjoyment of our bath. In all the feats and dexterities of the +swimmer's art, Eiulo far outdid the rest of us, moving through the water +with the ease, rapidity, and gracefulness of a fish. After one or two +trials with him, in swimming under water, and diving for shells, even +Max yielded the palm, declaring that he was ready to match himself +against any land animal, but should for the future decline entering into +a contest of that kind with amphibious creatures. + +Eiulo thought that this swimming in smooth water was but indifferent +sport and began to talk to Arthur with great animation, in his native +tongue, about the pleasures of "faahee," or surf-bathing, and the +exquisite fun of dodging the "manos," or sharks, among the rollers. +Presently he struck out into the lagoon, and before we could guess his +intention, he swam over to the reef, and, picking his way across it, +plunged fearlessly among the breakers on the outside. He stayed, +however, but a short time, and came back saying, that the "manos" were +altogether too thick out there, and that a huge blue one, had come near +seizing him in the surf, before he could catch a roller so as to land +safely upon the reef. When blamed by Arthur for his rashness, he +laughed, and promised that he would not incur the risk again. From his +frightened looks when he got back, I guessed that he had not found +"dodging the mano" such exquisite fun as he had anticipated. + +Max presently desisted from swimming, in order, as he said, to "do his +washing," consoling himself for the hardship of being obliged to do +laundress' work, with the reflection that the necessity for such a task +would soon cease, as our clothes being in constant use, without the +benefit of a change, could not last long. Browne and I followed this +example, and having spread our garments in the sun to dry, resumed our +aquatic sports in the meantime. Arthur dressed himself and accompanied +by Eiulo, left us, saying that he would rejoin us in an hour at the +hill. The two proceeded a short distance along the shore to the right, +and then turned into the forest to search, as we supposed, for plants, +or roots, capable of being turned to useful account. + +By the time our clothes were sufficiently dry to be put on, the tide had +risen considerably, and on repairing to the well, we found the water +several inches above Arthur's mark, thus confirming Morton's theory in +regard to it. Though we should have been better pleased to have +discovered a spring, yet there was no reason to doubt that here was an +ample and permanent supply of fresh water. + +As it was now getting towards noon, and the day was excessively hot, we +returned to Castle-Hill, to enjoy the grateful shade of its cool, dark +groves, and the breeze which was sure to play about its summit, if air +was stirring any where. Max sought out a leafy bower of ferns and +creepers, near the foot of the great candle-nut tree, where he stretched +himself out and went to sleep. Johnny got his bow and arrows, and began +to practise archery, by shooting at the large and gaudy insects hovering +around the blossoms of the vines, and when, probably by accident, he +carried away the wing of one of them at the distance of some six or +seven yards, he boasted loudly of the exploit, and intimated that in +case of a brush with any cannibals, his bow might be relied on to do +some execution. Getting tired at length of his crusade against the +butterflies, he expressed a wish to try his skill upon some larger game, +but as nothing in the shape of a jackall or tiger-cat was obliging +enough to make its appearance, he put aside his weapons with a sigh, and +lying down near Max, was soon asleep. There was a drowsy influence in +the profound quiet, and subdued light of the spot, to which I should +soon have yielded but for Browne, who began to talk of Scottish scenes +and legends, with sufficient interest to keep Morton and myself awake. +It seemed strange enough, to lie there in that tropical forest, +listening to an enthusiastic description of the rugged sublimity of the +Trossachs, the romantic beauty of Loch Vennacher, Loch Katrine, and Loch +Achray, or the lovely vale of Kelso, bosomed in green woods, with its +placid streams, smooth lawns, and hazel-fringed dells. + +About noon, Arthur and Eiulo made their appearance, emerging from the +grove to the south-east of the hill, laden with roots, plants, strips of +bark, etcetera. They had been looking for the auti, or paper-mulberry, +but without success. Arthur had discovered a large and beautiful +species of sweet-scented fern, with a tuberous root shaped like a +sweet-potato, which he said was baked and eaten by the Society +Islanders: he brought with him several entire specimens, root and all. +The leaves were fragrant and elegantly shaped, and the roots were of a +mottled brown and yellow. Eiulo carried in his hand an unripe +bread-fruit--a splendid pea-green globe, nearly as big as his head. +They had discovered a noble grove of this most valuable tree, at no +great distance from the hill, but the fruit was not yet perfectly ripe. +Johnny, who had awaked at the return of the absentees, was greatly +delighted at these discoveries, and began to lament that he had not +accompanied Arthur. He inquired very particularly as to the direction +of the bread-fruit grove, as if cherishing the design of setting out at +once to visit it; but Browne letting some thing drop about the voice in +the woods, Johnny changed the subject, and saying that it must be nearly +dinner-time, proposed to make a fire, and bake the fern roots, so as to +test their quality. Upon hearing this, Max, whose slumbers had also +been disturbed, raised his head for a moment and exclaimed so vehemently +against the very mention of a fire, when we were already dissolving with +heat, that nothing further was said about it. + +"And now," said Arthur, after having given a full account of his +discoveries, and answered all Johnny's questions, "I believe it is just +noon, and while I think of it, I will try to ascertain our longitude." + +"Ascertain our longitude!" exclaimed Browne, "pray, how do you propose +to do that without instruments?" + +"I know the longitude of the Kingsmill islands," answered Arthur, "and +if I can find our distance east or west of them, of course, I have the +longitude of this island." + +"But there's the difficulty; how can you ascertain even whether we are +to the east, or to the west of them?" + +"In the first place, then, I have Kingsmill island time; my watch was +last set, one day while we were there, just after Mr Frazer had taken +an observation." + +"Do you mean to say," inquired I with some interest, "that you have +regularly wound up your watch every day since then, without once +forgetting or neglecting it during all that has since occurred?" + +"I did regularly, every night before sleeping; and during all the time +that we were at sea in the boat, hardly a day passed that I did not note +down some memoranda in my pocket-book." + +"That now, is positively diabolical!" exclaimed Max, from his covert +among the creepers, where he was completely invisible, except his heels, +which were kicking in the air; "I wouldn't have believed, Arthur, that +you were such a methodical, cold-blooded creature! I suppose now, that +if I had tumbled overboard during that hideous time, and been gulped +down by a shark, or if Shakespeare had starved to death, you would have +made a regular memorandum of the event, in business-like style, and +wound up your watch as usual. I think I see the entry in your +pocket-book, thus: `1839, June 3rd--Mem. Max Adeler fell overboard this +day, and was devoured by a shark--an amiable and interesting youth, +though too much given to levity, and not prepared, I fear, for so +unexpected a summons. June 5th--Mem. My worthy and estimable friend, +John Browne, late of Glasgow, Scotland, died this day, from lack of +necessary food. Threw him overboard. What startling monitions of the +uncertainty of life!'" + +"Peace, Kaiser Maximilien, peace!" cried Browne, "and let the Professor +proceed to fix our longitude." + +"The first thing," resumed Arthur, "is to plant a straight stick upright +in the ground; when it casts no shadow east or west it is twelve o'clock +_here_. My watch will then show what time it is at the Kingsmills: if +it shows an earlier hour there, we must be east of them; if a later +hour, then we are west of them." + +"I think I understand that," said Johnny; "the next thing is to tell how +far east or west we are." + +"That is quite easy. There are, you know, three hundred and sixty +degrees of longitude: the sun passes through them all--that is, round +the globe in twenty-four hours. Then, of course, in one hour, it passes +through fifteen degrees, and through one degree in four minutes; so that +for every four minutes' difference of time, there will be a difference +of longitude of one degree--that is, near the equator, about seventy +miles." + +"It must be very near noon now," said Johnny, running out into a patch +of sunshine, where a small opening in the grove let in the light, "see! +I have hardly any shadow at all." + +Arthur planted a stick in the ground, and as soon as the shadow marked +the hour of noon, looked at his watch, by which it was eighteen minutes +after twelve. + +"It would seem from this," said he, "that we are four degrees and a +half, or over three hundred miles, west of the Kingsmills: it also +appears that we are very near the line, but a little south of it, for +the shadow inclines a little southward." + +"It is all nonsense," cried Max, sitting up in the grass, "to pretend to +ascertain where we are, in any such way as this. If your watch, (which +you know is a miserable time-keeper), has lost or gained but twenty +minutes since we left the Kingsmills, which is now nearly two months, +then what becomes of your learned calculations about the difference of +time, and of the longitude, and all that?" + +Arthur laughed, and admitted that this grave impeachment of the +character of his chronometer, was not entirely without foundation, and +that in consequence, the strict accuracy of the results arrived at, +could not be relied on. + +"The only thing that we can be at all certain about in regard to our +position," said Max, "is, that we are south of the line." + +"How can that be?" inquired Browne, "the Pole-star is visible from here, +or, at any rate, we saw it on the second or third night we were at sea +in the boat." + +"A part of the Great Bear can be seen," answered Arthur, "but not the +north star, I think. I looked for it last night, and though I could see +all the stars of the Dipper, the pointers were near the horizon, and the +Pole-star below it. But even if visible, it would be no evidence that +we are north of the equator, for I believe it can be seen from the +fourth or fifth degree of south latitude." + +"See now," said Browne, "what a pretty neighbourhood you are getting us +into, with your wise calculations! If we are south of the line, and far +west of the Kingsmills, we must be somewhere near the Bidera Sea, and +the Mendana Archipelago, about which the young sailor Roby, who was +always boasting of having sailed with the famous Captain Morell, used to +tell us such wonderful stories." + +"It is good ground," replied Arthur, "for one who wants to exercise a +traveller's privilege, and recount marvels and prodigies, without fear +of contradiction. Those seas are full of large islands, with countless +numbers of smaller ones, and remain to this day almost unexplored. In +fact, little more is now ascertained in regard to them, than was known +two hundred and fifty years ago, soon after their discovery by the +Spanish navigator Mendana; so that a man who pretends, as Roby does, to +have gone over the ground himself, may tell pretty much what stories he +pleases, without danger of any one being able to convict him of +inaccuracy." + +"What!" exclaimed Johnny, opening his eyes to their utmost extent, "do +you suppose we are near those islands Jack Roby tells about, where the +natives chew betel and lime out of a carbo-gourd, and sacrifice men to +their idols, and tear out and devour the hearts of their enemies?" + +"And where King Rogerogee lived," added Max, "(you remember him Johnny), +the giant seven feet and a half high, who wore a paradise plume on his +head, and a girdle of the claws and beaks of birds around his waist? +Why, this may be the very island of Podee over which he reigned, and we +ought not to be greatly surprised to see him look in upon us at any +moment, with his paradise plume waving among the tops of the trees, and +his spear, eighteen feet long, in his hand." + +"Don't let Rogerogee disturb your dreams, Johnny," said Arthur, "if +there is any such place as the island of Podee, which I very much doubt, +it is, according to Roby's own account, but a few leagues to the east of +Papua, and some twelve or thirteen hundred miles at least, west of us." + +Max now got up, and after stretching himself, and giving three or four +great yawns, came towards the spot where the rest of us were sitting; +but after taking a few steps, he suddenly stopped, uttering an +exclamation of surprise, and looking down at something in the grass at +his feet. He then kicked a dark object out of a tall bunch of fern, +towards us. It was an old beaver hat crushed flat, and covered with +mildew and dirt. Robinson Crusoe was not more startled by the footprint +in the sand, than were we at the sight of this unequivocal trace of +civilised man. Arthur picked it up, and restoring it partially to its +proper shape, examined the inside. On the lining of the crown appeared +in gilt letters-- + +PIERRE BAUDIN, + +CHAPELIER, + +RUE RICHELIEU, NUMERO 20. + +A PARIS. + +"Here, then," said Max, "is an end of the notion that we are the first +inhabitants of this island; it is clear that others have been, if they +are not now upon it. Perhaps, Johnny, this is the hat of the man you +heard talking French in the woods this morning." + +"At any rate," said, Arthur, after a moment of thoughtful silence, "this +must be the place where the Frenchman who perished in the water-spout +and his companions, were cast away, and from which they afterwards +reached Eiulo's island in a small boat. The well yonder is probably +their work, and we may perhaps find other evidences of their stay here, +when we come to explore the island more thoroughly." + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +ABOUT TEWA. + +A DULL CHAPTER, BUT NECESSARY--WAKATTA AND ATOLLO--A GENTLE HINT--MAX AS +AN ARCHITECT. + + "In the forest hollow roaring, + Hark! I hear a deepening sound, + Clouds rise thick with heavy lowering, + See! the horizon blackens round." + +It must not be inferred from the occasional bursts of holiday humour, in +which we indulged, that we had become reconciled to our exile, and were +now ready to subside into a state of indolent contentment satisfied with +security from present danger, and the abundant means of subsistence +which we had discovered. + +Not even a tropical paradise, with its warm, glowing sky and balmy +atmosphere, its "ambrosial fruits and amaranthine flowers," could charm +us into oblivion of home, and those who made it dear; or diminish the +bitterness of the thought of being cut off for ever from human +intercourse, and of having all our plans of life deranged and +frustrated. Though we did not brood continually over our unfortunate +situation, we were far from being insensible to it. The loveliest +island that ever reposed in undiscovered beauty, upon the bosom of the +"blue summer ocean," though rich in all things necessary to supply every +material want, must still have seemed to us but as a gilded and +luxurious prison, from which we should never cease to sigh for an +escape. + +Arthur's conclusion, mentioned at the end of the last chapter, seemed in +itself so probable, and was confirmed by so many circumstances, that it +was readily adopted by us all; and believing that the party, of whose +presence at one time upon the island the hat was an evidence, had left +it years ago, the occurrence no longer appeared to possess any +importance, and we dismissed it altogether from our thoughts. + +Eiulo, when questioned on the subject of the white men living among his +own people, repeated substantially his former statement, that they came +from an island lying south of his father's, and distant from it less +than a day's sail. It seemed, also, that before the arrival of the +whites, an island lying in the direction from which they had come, had +been known to some, at least, of the natives, and visited by them. In +the course of the conversations which he had with Arthur, at various +times, about his father's people and their affairs, Eiulo had often +spoken of an old warrior, Wakatta by name, famous for his courage and +great personal strength, of which he related many remarkable instances. +Through two generations he had been the most devoted and valued friend +of the family of his chief; and upon his wisdom, sagacity, and prowess, +Eiulo's father and grandfather had relied in many an emergency, and +seldom in vain. Formerly, the three islands were independent of each +other, and were ruled by separate chiefs, who sometimes engaged in +sanguinary wars among themselves, in most of which Wakatta had played a +prominent part. + +A great many moons ago, as Eiulo expressed it, the chiefs of the two +smaller islands had united their forces against his grandfather, who was +then chief of Tewa, the third and largest. To this enterprise they had +been incited by Atollo, an uncle of Eiulo, and younger brother of the +present chief, his father. This man was possessed of great ability, and +his reputation as a warrior was second only to that of Wakatta, who was +many years his senior, so that among those of his own age he was +considered without an equal. But, though eminent for talent and +courage, he seemed to be entirely destitute of principle or feeling; and +impelled, as was supposed, by a spirit of unscrupulous ambition, (for no +other motive could be assigned), this unnatural son plotted against the +lives of his own father and elder brother. His designs being +discovered, and fully exposed, he fled to one of the neighbouring +islands, and sought the protection of its chief, his father's most +formidable and inveterate enemy. Afterwards, by his address and energy, +he succeeded in bringing about a league between the chiefs of the two +smaller islands, for the purpose of an attack against Tewa, by their +combined forces. The enterprise was planned with the greatest secrecy, +and executed with equal skill and daring. At midnight, the allies set +sail, in a fleet of war canoes, and two hours before dawn they had +disembarked at Tewa, marched to the principal village, where the chief +resided, and made all their dispositions for the attack, which was so +totally unexpected, that it was crowned with complete success. Scarcely +any resistance was made: the principal Tewan warriors were slain in +their beds, or taken prisoners; and Eiulo's father and grandfather, with +Wakatta, only saved their lives by fleeing to the mountains. Knowing +that the strictest search would be made for them, and that if taken, +instant death would be their doom; they stole forth from their +lurking-place by night, repaired to the beach, and taking a large canoe, +which they discovered there, set sail in her, steering boldly southward, +in search of a considerable island which was believed to lie in that +direction. Soon after sunrise they came in sight of land, but, on +approaching it, they found that the surf was bursting with great fury +upon a barrier reef, stretching between them and the shore; and it was +not until they had coasted along it for many hours, that they succeeded +in effecting a landing. Eiulo had heard both his father and Wakatta +speak of the island as a singularly beautiful spot, nearly as large as +Tewa, and abounding in bread-fruit and cocoa-nut trees. Here the +fugitives remained for several months, until, becoming wearied of their +solitary life, and possessed by an irresistible longing to revisit their +homes, they came to the determination to venture back, and learn the +state of things there, at every hazard. They accordingly set sail one +day at noon, in order that they might reach their destination under +cover of night, in which they succeeded. + +Seeking a temporary place of concealment in the woods, they seized +favourable opportunities to discover themselves to some friends, on whom +they could rely. They learned that the victorious allies had been +guilty of the most intolerable cruelty towards the people of Tewa. Many +of the prisoners had been slain, as sacrifices to the gods, and many +more had been made slaves. Atollo had established himself as chief at +the conquered island, and had gathered about him a band of the most +ferocious and desperate men, who practised every species of cruelty and +oppression upon the inhabitants. The latter, driven to the utmost verge +of endurance, were now ready to incur any risk in an attempt to deliver +themselves from a yoke so galling. They needed only a leader, and the +experience and prowess of Wakatta, together with the presence of their +ancient and rightful chief and his son, inspired them with confidence +and courage. Gathering a small, but resolute, band of warriors, they +awaited the favourable moment to strike a decisive blow; and then, +emulating the secrecy and suddenness of Atollo's recent enterprise, they +sallied forth at night, from their rendezvous in the forest and fell +upon him and his adherents. Wakatta was unable to restrain the ferocity +of his followers, excited by the insults and injuries they had suffered, +and they killed on the spot all who fell into their hands, pausing to +make no prisoners. Atollo, after fighting like a tiger, though almost +alone, succeeded in making his escape with a few of his attendants. The +victors promptly carried the war into the neighbouring islands, both of +which were completely subdued, and afterwards remained under the sway of +Eiulo's grandfather until his death, when the present chief succeeded. +Atollo, after resisting as long as there remained the slightest prospect +of success, had sought refuge among the recesses of the mountains, where +he still lurked with a few outlaw followers, as desperate as himself. +His father had forbidden any search for him, or any efforts for his +capture to be made; and such was the dread inspired by his desperate +courage, ferocity, and cunning, and such the superstitious terror with +which he was generally regarded, that few felt any inclination to +transgress this command, or to meddle in any way with him or his +followers; and he was consequently left unmolested in his favourite +haunts, among the wild and almost inaccessible precipices of the +interior. In seasons of scarcity, his father had even caused supplies +of food to be placed where they would be likely to fall in his way. +Eiulo always shuddered when he spoke of this man. Once, when +accompanied by a young playmate and an attendant, he had strayed a long +way into the wood in search of wild-flowers, and had, without being +aware of it, approached the region frequented by the outlaws, a spear +had suddenly been hurled at him from an adjacent thicket, with so deadly +a purpose, that it whistled past within a few inches of his side. As +they fled in alarm, and were clambering hastily down a steep descent, a +mass of rock was disengaged from the verge of an overhanging precipice, +and came near crushing them all. Looking back, in their flight, they +saw a wild figure, which the attendant recognised at once as that of +Eiulo's uncle, stooping at the edge of the cliff, in the act of +loosening another large stone. Notwithstanding this murderous attempt, +the present chief of Tewa continued to pursue the same forbearing course +which his father had adopted, and Atollo was still permitted to remain +unmolested among his mountain fastnesses. + +Eiulo, even before the discovery of the hat, had believed that we were +upon the same island which his father had visited, as above related, and +from which the whites had afterwards come. He was confident that by +sailing northward, with a fair wind, we should reach Tewa in less than a +day. Though generally cheerful, and overflowing with boyish spirits, +there were times when it was apparent that he pined for his home; and, +though he never directly urged it, he earnestly wished to have us make +the attempt to reach his father's island in the yawl. + +At length I began to suspect, from the constant and minute inquiries +which Arthur made in relation to Tewa, and its people, their usages, +habits, etcetera, that he was thinking seriously of some such attempt. +He directed his inquiries particularly to the point whether the island +was ever visited by ships. Eiulo remembered hearing his father speak of +big canoes, without any outriggers, and whose masts were as high as a +cocoa-nut-tree, having passed in sight of the island. He had heard, +too, that a long while ago, one of these great vessels had got aground, +upon a reef between Tewa and the adjacent island, and that the natives +had gone off to her in their canoes, and some of them had ventured on +board at the invitation of the strangers. Old Wakatta was one of these, +and he had received a wonderful present from the white chief, which he +had often exhibited to Eiulo, and which, from his description of it, +appeared to be neither more nor less than a small looking-glass. The +great canoe had, by throwing overboard a part of her cargo, got off from +the reef at the rising of the tide, and resumed her voyage. It was +pretty evident that the arrival of a European vessel at the islands, was +an event of very rare occurrence, and in all probability the result of +mere accident. Except that he steadily pursued inquiries of this kind, +Arthur said nothing to show that he entertained the thought of such an +undertaking as I suspected him to be revolving. Browne and Morton both +had exaggerated notions of the cruelty and treachery of the "heathen +native;" as the former called them, and would, I had no doubt, be +strongly averse to any step calculated to place us in their power, +unless it should also, in some way, increase our prospects of ultimately +getting home. + +For several days after the occurrences narrated in the last chapter, we +remained at Castle-hill, making little excursions daily in various +directions. Having now discovered a supply of fresh water, and abundant +means of subsistence, it seemed as though there was at present nothing +further for us to do, except to assist Arthur, as far as we could; in +his preparations for manufacturing tappa. The weather was so genial, +(except during the middle of the day, when the heat was frequently +intolerable), that we felt no want of any other shelter than such as the +grove afforded us. Generally, towards evening, a refreshing breeze set +in from the sea, and lasted several hours. We experienced no bad +effects from sleeping in the open air, and far from finding it a +hardship, we soon came to consider it every way more pleasant, than to +be cribbed and cabined within four close walls. There was something +delightful, in dropping off into dreamland, listening to the whispering +of the leaves above you, and catching glimpses through them, of a sky so +deliciously blue, and stars so wonderfully bright. It seemed as though +in this favoured spot, the fable of a perpetual summer was to be +realised, and the whole circle of the year was to be crowned with the +same freshness and verdure and beauty, the same profusion of fruits and +flowers, which we had thus far enjoyed. But such expectations, if any +of us were beguiled into entertaining them, were destined to be rudely +dissipated. One hot afternoon, we were startled from a drowsy siesta in +the grove, by a peal of thunder, such as is rarely heard in temperate +climates, and on springing up and looking about us, we beheld above and +around us, certain indications, which it would have been far more +interesting and agreeable to contemplate from beneath the shelter of a +snug and comfortable dwelling. The wind moaned through the bending +tree-tops; the face of the heavens was black as night, and the waters of +the lagoon, and of the ocean, had darkened to a steely blue beneath +their frown. Before we had fairly shaken off our drowsiness, another +abrupt peal of thunder burst overhead, with a suddenness that seemed to +jar the very clouds and shake the water out of them, for the rain began +all at once to come down violently, in big drops, that rattled like +hailstones upon the crisp leaves of the forest. The thunder appeared to +have completed its office in giving the signal for the clouds to +discharge their contents, and we heard it no more. For a time, the +dense foliage of the large tree under which we gathered, completely +sheltered us; but soon the moisture began to drip slowly from the lower +leaves, and occasionally fell in sudden showers, as the branches were +shaken by the wind. + +At length, the ground became thoroughly saturated, shallow puddles +formed in every little hollow or depression, and there was the prospect +of a most miserable night if the storm should continue. Happily, this +did not prove to be the case; in about an hour after we had been aroused +by the first thunder peal, the clouds dispersed almost as suddenly as +they had gathered; the sun shone forth brightly; the trees and the grass +sparkled with raindrops, lustrous as diamonds, and the whole landscape +smiled in fresher beauty than ever. + +This little occurrence, however, served as a seasonable hint to recall +to our minds the importance of contriving some kind of a dwelling to +afford us shelter in bad weather, and we resolved to lose no time in +setting about it. Accordingly, the day following that of the thunder +shower, as soon as we had returned from the beach, after taking our +regular morning swim, Arthur called a council, to deliberate and +determine upon the matter of house-building. The first thing was to fix +upon a site; the only objection to the level space at the top of the +hill, was its elevated position, exposing it to the full force of the +violent winds which prevail at certain periods of the tropical year. +But on that side from which the strongest winds blow, the spot was +protected by still higher land towards the interior, and the fine trees +of various kinds and sizes, (some of them evidently the growth of many +years), among which could be seen no prostrate trunks, showed, as we +thought, that nothing was to be feared from that source. + +We, therefore, selected a smooth, open space, near the edge of the +terrace, commanding a view of the sea, through a vista of noble trees. +Max insisted, that, inasmuch as with our limited architectural resources +we could not make our house of more than one storey, we ought to build +in "cottage style," and make up for deficiency in height, by spreading +over a large surface. He then proceeded to mark out a ground-plan, upon +a scale that would have been shockingly extravagant, had we been in a +part of the world where the price of building-lots was to be taken into +consideration. A parallelogram, nearly forty feet long by twenty-five +in width, the narrower side fronting the sea, was the plan of the main +building. This was to be flanked by two wings, each some sixteen feet +square, which would serve to strengthen and support the principal +structure. "Upon this model," Max complacently observed, "he intended +one of these days to build his country-seat, near Mount Merino, on the +Hudson: meantime, we were welcome to the benefit of the idea." + +"Really, we're greatly obliged to you, Max," said Browne, "for helping +us so generously through with the most difficult part of the business. +All that we now want in order to finish it at once, is merely a few +loads of joist, plank, pine-boards, shingles, and window-sash; a supply +of nails, a set of carpenter's tools, and a couple of carpenters to use +them." + +"Of course," rejoined Max, "we shall want a supply of building +materials, tools, etcetera, and I am expecting them along daily. We +have now been here several weeks, and it is quite time, in the natural +and regular course of things, and according to the uniform experience of +people situated as we are, for a ship heavily laden, (say in our case), +with lumber and hardware, to be driven upon our shores in the midst of a +terrible storm, (yesterday, when it began to thunder, I thought it was +at hand). The ship will come driving upon the reef--the crew will take +to the boats, but no boat can live in such a sea, and notwithstanding +our humane and daring efforts to assist them, all perish among the +breakers--that is to say, all except the carpenter--whom I rescue, by +plunging into the raging flood and dragging him ashore by the hair, just +as he is about sinking for the third time." + +"Nobly done!" said Browne, "but couldn't you at the same time manage to +save a drowning washerwoman? she would be as great an acquisition as the +carpenter, in my mind." + +"At length," resumed Max, "the storm abates--the sea becomes smooth--we +go out in the yawl to the stranded vessel, where she lies upon a coral +patch, and bring off, in two boat loads, the carpenter's chest, a keg of +gunpowder, a blunderbuss, seven muskets, fourteen pairs of pistols, and +a bag of doubloons, (think of that, Johnny!) That very night the wind +rises again: the surf breaks the wreck to pieces, and washes the +fragments ashore, and in the morning the sea is strewn far and wide with +floating spars, and bales, and barrels; and the reef is covered for +miles with `joist, plank, pine-boards, shingles, window-sash,' and +whatever other trifling conveniences are requisite for building my +cottage. This is what Johnny and I confidently calculate upon." + +"In the meantime," said Arthur, "in case by any unfortunate accident +your ship should fail to arrive in time to enable us to get the cottage +up before the rains set in, I propose that we commence a less ambitious +structure." He began to trace upon the ground with a pointed stick, the +oval outline of what he called a `Tihitian fare.' "But even for my +fare," he added, "we shall need the means of cutting down a number of +good-sized trees." + +"Of which we are entirely destitute," said Max, with an air of triumph, +"and I don't see but that we shall have to wait for my ship after all." + +"Not so," answered Arthur, "for I think that two or three of the +cutlasses may be converted into tolerable saws, with which, by dint of a +little patience, we can get out as many posts and rafters as will be +requisite for the frame of our building, though I admit it will be +tedious work." + +Johnny heaved a profound sigh at the prospect of the difficulties that +lay in the way of his pet project of house-building, and wished that +"that old magician who built the castle with a thousand windows for +Aladdin, in a single night, would only be clever enough to lend us his +assistance." But upon second thought, he concluded that there would be +"no fun" in having our house ready-made for us, and magnanimously +declared that if he had the wonderful lamp in his hands that minute, +with full power to summon up the obedient genius, and set him to work, +he would not do it. + +"I hope you would make him supply us with a few good axes, Johnny, at +least," said Browne. + +But Johnny was disposed to be very self-denying and high-minded; he did +not think he ought to do it; we should take a great deal more pleasure +in our house if we made it ourselves, without any magical assistance of +any kind. + +"Now, that you mention axes," said Morton, "it occurs to me that there +is an old hatchet-head among the rubbish in the locker of the yawl, and +though it is a good deal battered and worn, it could be fitted with a +handle and made useful." + +We all now remembered having seen it, though no one had before thought +of it. Arthur suggested that we should make an excursion to Palm-Islet +as soon as the heat of the day was over, and the sea-breeze had set in, +for the purpose of getting the hatchet, and bringing the boat round to +the side of the island where we intended to fix our residence, as we +might have occasion for its use. "We can get there before dark," said +he, "and pass the night once more at our old quarters on the little +island; then we can row back in the fresh of the morning, before +sunrise, and be ready to commence our building in earnest." + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +THE CORAL REEF. + +JOHNNY AND THE CHAMA--AMATEUR PEARL-DIVING--A SHARK BLOCKADE--CULINARY +GENIUS. + + "Down in the depths of the lonely sea, + I work at my mystic masonry; + I've crusted the plants of the deep with stone, + And given them colouring not their own; + And now o'er the ocean fields they spread + Their fan-like branches of white and red: + Oh! who can fashion a work like me, + The mason of God, in the boundless sea." + +Late in the afternoon, when the slanting beams of the sun began to lose +their fierceness, and the heat was tempered by the breeze setting in +from the ocean, we descended to the beach, and set out for the eastern +side of the island, in accordance with Arthur's suggestion, mentioned at +the close of the last chapter. As we made our way across Sea-bird's +Point, the clamorous cries of the gannets, raising their harsh voices to +the highest pitch, in angry remonstrance against this invasion of their +domain, were almost deafening. They might well be alarmed for the +safety of their nests--or rather of their eggs, which they lay upon the +bare ground, without any attempt at a nest--for they strewed the whole +point so thickly that it was no easy matter to pick one's way without +treading upon them at every alternate step. In nearly every tree were +to be seen the rude nests of the frigate-bird, built of a few coarse +sticks; and numbers of the birds themselves, with their singular +blood-red pouches inflated to the utmost extent, were flying in from the +sea. The large sooty tern, the graceful tropic bird, and the spruce, +fierce-looking man-of-war's hawk, with his crimson bill, and black +flashing eye, flew familiarly around us, frequently coming so near, that +we could easily have knocked them down with our cutlasses, had we been +inclined to abuse, so wantonly, the confidence which they seemed to +repose in us. + +When half-way across the point, I came suddenly upon a magnificent male +tropic bird, sitting in his nest behind a tussock of tall, reedy grass. +He did not offer to quit his post, even when the others approached very +near, and paused to admire him; being apparently engaged, in the absence +of his mate, in attending to certain domestic duties, generally supposed +to belong more appropriately to her. He was somewhat larger than a +pigeon, and was a very beautiful bird, though not so brilliantly +coloured as several other species of sea-fowl. His plumage, soft and +lustrous as satin, was of a delicate pearly grey, except the long +middle-feathers of the tail, which were of a pale red, and projected +full a foot and a half beyond the rest. He manifested not the slightest +fear, even when Johnny stooped and stroked his glossy coat. Just as we +left the spot, the partner of this exemplary bird arrived, and hastened +to relieve him from duty, giving him notice to quit, by two or three +quick, impatient chirps, and a playful peck upon the head, whereupon he +resigned his place, into which the other immediately settled, with a +soft, complacent, cooing note, as expressive of perfect content as the +purring of a well-fed tabby, stretched cosily upon the earth-rug before +a cheerful winter evening fire. This transfer was effected so quickly, +that Johnny was baffled in an ill-bred attempt which he made to pry into +the domestic concerns of the affectionate pair, and he could not get +even a transient glimpse of the contents of the nest. + +Without permitting ourselves to be tempted into any further deviation or +delay, we kept steadily along the beach, until we arrived, a little +before sunset, at the spot where the yawl lay, drawn up on the sand, +opposite the islet. + +Max declared that after our long march, we ought to have a supper +consisting of something more substantial than cocoa-nuts, and proposed +that we should pull over to the reef, and procure some shell-fish, which +proposition meeting with general approval, we got the boat into the +water, and in five minutes reached the inside of the ledge, and landed +upon it at a point about a quarter of a mile from the opening, through +which we had first entered the lagoon. In this place, it was some +fifteen or twenty yards in width, and consisted of a seamed and broken +flat of dead coral, elevated but slightly above the level of the sea. +Though there was no wind, and had been none during the day, the mighty +billows of the open ocean came rolling in upon the outer edge of the +reef with their accustomed violence. The action of the trade-winds is +upon the whole so steady and uniform, that when it does cease for short +periods, its effects continue, and upon the windward side of these +coral-belted islands, there are breakers that never cease to rage, even +in the calmest weather. No sight could be more grand and imposing, than +that of these enormous waves encountering the reef. One of them would +sometimes extend along it a mile, or a mile and a half, in an unbroken +line. As it sweeps onward, with a slow and majestic movement towering +up, like a dark-blue mountain, it seems as if nothing could resist its +power, and you almost tremble lest the solid barrier upon which you +stand should be hurled from its foundations. It meets the curving line +of the reef with a tremendous concussion, and thus suddenly arrested by +the parapet of coral, reared from the depths of the sea, it rises at +once, throughout its entire length, to the height of twelve or fifteen +feet perpendicularly, and stands for a moment as if congealed in its +progress; then breaking with a hollow roar, it falls in a deluge of foam +and spray, filling all the seams and crevices, and marking their course +in lines of white upon the dark ground of the ledge. Not the least +striking feature of the spectacle, was the multitude of fishes, of all +shapes, colours, and sizes, that could be seen suspended in the face of +this liquid wall, the very moment before it fell. How they escaped +being thrown upon the reef seemed inexplicable, but they darted hither +and thither at the very edge of the roller, with the greatest apparent +ease and security, and almost invariably turned sea-ward just in time to +save themselves. Occasionally, however, some careless or unskilful +individual, not sufficiently versed in this perilous kind of navigation, +suffered shipwreck, and was left gasping and floundering upon the coral. + +While thus engaged in watching the bursting of the waves upon the reef, +I suddenly heard Johnny at a little distance calling out lustily for +help, and hastening to the spot, I found him in one of the yawning +crevices of the coral rock, up to his neck in water, and struggling +violently to get out, in which he seemed to meet with opposition from +some object in the hole. + +"Something has got me by the feet," he cried, as soon as he saw me; "it +is an enormous oyster, or a shell-fish of some kind, and it pinches +dreadfully." + +I looked down into the water, and saw what in fact, seemed to be a +gigantic shell-fish, gripping both his legs: it retained its hold so +tenaciously, that I found I could not extricate him, and when Arthur +came up, as he did in a moment, it was as much as we could both do, to +lift him and his singular captor, which still clung obstinately to him, +out of the crevice. We were then obliged to pry open the shells with +our cutlasses before we could release him. + +Arthur pronounced this extraordinary shell-fish, to be a specimen of the +"Chama Gigas." The shells were nearly three feet in length, and +curiously marked and clouded. Johnny had slipped from the slimy edge of +the chasm, and happened to fall fairly into the expanded jaws of the +chama, which, had instantly closed upon him. If the water had been +deeper, the consequences might have been serious, as there are instances +of persons being drowned, by having their feet caught in the vice-like +grip of this formidable bivalve. + +Not far from the scene of Johnny's mishap, was a green spot upon the +reef, where a group of young trees seemed to spring up out of the bare +coral. On approaching the place, we found that a little island, about +the size of Palm-islet was there in process of formation. +Notwithstanding the exposed and barren character of the locality, and +the scantiness of the soil, which was not anywhere a foot in depth. It +was covered with a thrifty vegetation, among which were several +well-grown-palms, a group of young casuarinas, and some ferns and +tournefortias. Nor was this embryo islet destitute of inhabitants. The +trees were at this hour filled with aquatic birds, and I observed among +them one remarkable species, long-bodied, and slender, like swallows, +with red bills and feet, white breast, and slate-coloured wings; these, +instead of perching, like the rest of their feathered associates, upon +the trees, nestled in the concavity of the long palm-leaves, far enough +from the stem, to be rocked gently by the undulating motion of the leaf, +which a breath of wind, or the slightest stirring of the birds in these +swinging nets was sufficient to produce. But by far the most numerous +and singular portion of the population of the islet, consisted of a +species of large land-crab, inhabiting burrows hollowed out beneath the +roots of the trees. Great numbers of them appeared to be bathing or +sporting in the shallow water on the lagoon side of the islet, but, at +sight of us, they scrambled off to their burrows with a degree of +agility that could hardly have been expected from such clumsy-looking +creatures. Owing partly to this unlooked-for rapidity of locomotion, +and partly to a natural shyness and hesitation which we felt about +handling them rashly, (their pincer-like jaws, with half a dozen pairs +of which each individual seemed to be provided, having a rather +formidable appearance), they escaped before we could capture even a +specimen. Johnny forthwith posted himself in ambush among a bunch of +fern, and riveting his eyes upon one of the burrows at the foot of a +young cocoa-nut tree, waited impatiently for the crabs to venture forth +once more. In a few moments a patriarchal-looking old fellow emerged +cautiously from the hole, and was presently followed by several more. +Johnny prudently delayed any hostile movement, until they should get far +enough from their place of security to enable him to cut off their +retreat; and, in the meantime, I was greatly amused and interested in +observing the ingenious method, in which the patriarch commenced +operating upon a cocoa-nut, which had fallen to the ground near his den. + +Managing his complicated apparatus of claws with surprising dexterity, +he seized the nut, and stripped off the outer husk in a twinkling; then +setting it upon one end, he began to hammer away at the orifices through +which the stalk and root of the future tree make their way when the nut +germinates. Having at length removed the filling up of these orifices, +he inserted a claw, and actually split the strong inner shell, dividing +it neatly into halves. At this stage of the proceedings, half a dozen +greedy neighbours, who had been looking on, without offering a helping +claw, shuffled nimbly forward to share the spoil, and it was curious to +see how quickly they cleaned out the shell, leaving not a particle of +the kernel. Johnny seized this as a favourable moment for a sally, and +rushed forth cutlass in hand, having adopted the discreet resolution of +disabling them, by lopping off those formidable claws, before coming to +close quarters. The sally, however, was premature, and proved entirely +unsuccessful, for the crabs backed and sidled into their burrows with +such expedition, that the last of them disappeared before their +assailant could get within reach. Leaving Johnny to renew his +ambuscade, if so disposed, I proceeded along the reef, and found Max and +Browne bathing for the second time that day. They had discovered a +charming place for the purpose, where a kind of oval basin was formed by +the lagoon setting into the inside of the reef. The water was deep and +clear, so that there was no danger of wounding the feet by means of +shells or corals. Max had discovered what he supposed to be an enormous +pearl-oyster, attached to a wall of coral, at the depth of five or six +fathoms, and they were diving for it alternately. Both succeeded in +reaching it, but it adhered so firmly to the rock by its strong beard, +that neither of the amateur pearl-divers could tear it off, and getting +soon exhausted and out of breath, they abandoned the attempt. + +The submarine scenery of the lagoon was in this spot unusually varied +and beautiful, and the basin formed a bath, fit for the Nereids +themselves. Numbers of different kinds of shell-fish were attached to +the coral branches, or wedged into their interstices. Others were +feeding, and reflected the brightest colours with every motion. Purple +mullet, variegated rock-fish, and small ray-fish, were darting about +near the bottom. Another species of mullet, of a splendid changeable +blue and green, seemed to be feeding upon the little polyps protruding +from the coral tops. Shells, sea-plants, coral, and fishes, and the +slightest movement of the latter, even to the vibration of a tiny fin! +or the gentle opening of the gills in respiration, could be seen with +perfect distinctness in this transparent medium. But what chiefly +attracted attention, was the gay tints, and curious shapes, of the +innumerable zoophytes, or "flower animals," springing up from the sides +and bottom of the basin, and unfolding their living leaves above their +limestone trunks or stems which encased them. Blue, red, pink, orange, +purple, and green, were among the colours, and the variety of patterns +seemed absolutely endless: they mimicked, in their manner of growth, the +foliage of trees, the spreading antlers of the stag, globes, columns, +stars, feathery plumes, trailing vines, and all the wildest and most +graceful forms of terrestrial vegetation. Nothing was wanting to +complete this submarine shrubbery, even to the minutest details; there +were mosses, and ferns, and lichens, and spreading shrubs, and branching +trees; bunches of slender thread-like stems, swaying gently with the +motion of the water, might, (except for their pale, purplish, tint), +pass for rushes, or tussocks of reedy grass; and it required no effort +of the imagination to see fancifully shaped wild-flowers in the numerous +varieties of actiniae, or sea anemones, many of which bore the closest +resemblance to wood-pinks, asters, and carnations. The imitations of +these flowers were in some cases wonderfully perfect, even to their +delicate petals, which were represented by the slender, fringe-like +tentacles of the living polyp, protruding from its cell. Besides these +counterparts of land vegetation, there were waving sea-fans, solid +masses of sponge-coral, clubs of Hercules, madrepores, like +elegantly-formed vases filled with flowers, dome-like groups of +astraeae, studded with green and purple spangles, and a thousand other +shapes, so fantastic and peculiar, that they can be likened to no other +objects in nature. + +Johnny having got tired of lying in wait for the crabs, came to watch +the swimmers and search for shells. In the course of frequent beach +excursions with Mr Frazer, he had picked up the names, and chief +distinguishing characteristics of the principal genera of marine shells, +in consequence of which he had at length come to regard himself as quite +a conchologist, and was ambitious of making a "collection," like other +naturalists, in which design Arthur encouraged and assisted him. + +Joining me, where I was lying upon a flat ledge, peering down into the +basin, he presently espied a Triton's trumpet, more than a foot in +length, in some five fathoms of water, and pointing it out to Max, he +begged him to dive for it, earnestly assuring him that he had never seen +so fine a specimen of the "Murex Tritonica." But the latter very +decidedly declined sacrificing his breath in the cause of science, +declaring that he had completely exhausted himself by his exertions in +pearl-diving. + +Eiulo coming up at the moment with a number of shell-fish which he had +obtained, Johnny appealed to him for aid, and not in vain, for as soon +as the much-coveted shell was pointed out to him, he threw off his +wrapper, and plunging into the water, almost instantly returned with it. +Max now showed him the supposed pearl-oyster, and challenged him to +make an attempt to bring it up. Eiulo laughed, and nodded his +acceptance of the challenge: after pausing a moment to take breath, he +dived perpendicularly downward, reaching the shell easily with a few +strokes, and made one or two vigorous but ineffectual jerks at it; then, +just as I thought him about to give it up, and ascend again, he grasped +it with both hands, brought his feet under him, and bracing himself +firmly against the wall of coral, he wrenched it off, and bore the prize +in triumph to the surface. It proved to be a pearl-oyster, as Max had +supposed, and on being opened was found to contain eleven seed-pearls. +Eiulo presented the shell and its contents to Johnny, who seemed to +value the former, quite as much as the latter, and presently ran off in +search of Arthur, to inquire whether it should properly be classed with +the "genus ostrea," or the "genus mytilus." + +After watching the swimmers a little longer, I strolled along the reef, +in the direction which Johnny had taken in pursuit of Arthur, stopping +occasionally to watch the bursting of a wave of uncommon magnitude, or +to examine some of the interesting objects that were strewn with such +profusion in every direction, and which rendered that barren ledge so +choice a spot for the studies of the naturalist. Some ten or fifteen +minutes had been thus employed, and it was beginning to grow dark, so +that Arthur and Johnny, whom I had not yet overtaken, could be but just +distinguished, like two specks in the distance, when I heard the +powerful voice of Browne, raised in a loud and prolonged halloo. +Pausing to listen, I soon heard the cry repeated, in a manner that +showed as I thought, that something unusual had taken place. Hastening +back, I found that Max and Browne had swum off to a coral knoll, in the +lagoon, a stone's throw from the reef, and dared not venture back, being +closely blockaded by a large fish swimming about near the spot, which +they supposed to be a shark. They called loudly for me to come after +them in the boat, and to lose no time about it, as there was water +enough on the knoll, to enable a shark, if tolerably enterprising, to +reach them where they stood. Though it was rapidly getting dark, there +was still sufficient light to enable me to distinguish an enormous fish +of some kind, cruising back and forth, with the regularity of a sentinel +on duty, between the reef, and the shallow where Max and Browne were +standing up to their knees in water. The case appeared to admit of no +delay, and jumping into the boat, I pulled over to the coral patch with +all possible speed, passing the fish close enough to see that it was in +fact a large shark, and he proved also to be an exceedingly fierce and +ravenous one. It almost seemed as though he understood my errand, for +he followed, or rather attended me, closely, keeping so near the bow of +the boat that it was with great difficulty and some danger, that I at +length got the blockaded swimmers aboard. When this was effected, his +disappointment and consequent bad temper were quite apparent; he swam +round and round the boat in the most disturbed and agitated manner as we +returned, making a variety of savage demonstrations, and finally going +so far as to snap spitefully at the oars, which he did not discontinue, +until Browne had two or three times rapped him smartly over the nose. +After landing in safety, Max pelted him with shells and pieces of coral +rock, until he finally swam off. + +Meantime, Arthur and Johnny had returned from their wandering along the +reef; the latter had come across another colony of crabs, and had +succeeded in capturing three of them, or rather two and a half, for +having, as he fondly imagined, disabled one enormous fellow by hacking +him in two with his cutlass, the one half had scrambled into the hole, +while Johnny was securing the other. + +We now placed the chama shells, the crabs, and other shell-fish, +together with Johnny's specimens, to which he had added a splendid +madrepore vase, in the boat, and as soon as the swimmers were dressed, +we pulled over to Palm-islet. Here we arranged a tent in the same +manner as we had done on the memorable night when we first reached these +shores. Max then kindled a fire, and prepared to cook our supper. The +shell-fish were easily managed by placing them upon the embers, but the +crabs, which it was necessary to boil, and which were of the size of +small lobsters, presented a more difficult case. Max's culinary genius, +however, stimulated by a keen appetite, eventually triumphed over every +obstacle. He procured a number of stones, which he heated in the fire; +then filling one of the deep and rounded chama shells with water, he +proceeded to drop the heated stones into it, using a couple of sticks as +a pair of tongs. This process he continued until the water boiled, when +he remorselessly plunged the unhappy crabs therein, and from time to +time dropped in more of the heated stones, until the cookery was +complete. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +ARTHUR'S STORY. + +BROWNE ON "THE KNIGHTLY CHARACTER"--ROKOA--THE CANNIBAL ISLAND OF +ANGATAN. + + "This is no Grecian fable of fountains running wine, + Of hags with snaky tresses, and sailors turned to swine: + On yonder teeming island, under the noon day sun, + In sight of many people, these strange, dark deeds were done." + +Having made a hearty and satisfactory supper, and concluded the meal +with a draught of cocoa-nut milk, we sat down, like the patriarchs of +old, "in the door of our tent" facing the sea, to enjoy the freshness of +the evening breeze. + +Johnny, after having settled it to his own entire satisfaction, that the +shell in which his pearls had been found, was properly a mussel, and not +an oyster; and having also, by Arthur's help, resolved his doubts and +difficulties, touching divers other knotty points in conchology; +successively raised and canvassed the grave and edifying questions-- +whether there actually were such creatures as mermaids?--whether +sea-serpents were indigenous to the neighbourhood of Cape Cod and +Massachusetts Bay?--whether the narratives of ancient and modern +voyagers, in regard to Krakens, and gigantic Polypes, with feelers or +arms as long as a ship's main-mast, had any foundation in fact or were +to be looked upon as sheer fabrications?--and, finally, whether the +hideous and revolting practice of cannibalism, really prevailed among +the inhabitants of certain groups of islands in the Pacific? + +"This puts me in mind, Arthur," said Johnny, suddenly, while the +last-mentioned subject was under discussion, "of a promise you made +during the voyage, to tell me a story about a cannibal island upon which +you were once cast, and the adventures you met with there. This is a +good time to tell it: it is quite early, and the night so beautiful, +that it would be a shame to think of going to bed for two or three hours +yet; for my part, I feel as though I could sit here all night without +getting sleepy." + +"A happy thought, Johnny," said Browne, "it will be the pleasantest +possible way of passing the evening; therefore, Arthur, let us have the +story." + +"O yes, the story! let us have the cannibal story by all means!" cried +Max, "this is just the hour, and the place, to tell it with effect. The +dash of the surf upon the reef; the whispering of the night wind in the +tree-tops; the tall black groves on the shore yonder, and the water +lying blacker still in their shadow, will all harmonise admirably with +the subject." + +"I believe I did promise Johnny an account of an unintentional visit I +once made to a place known as `the Cannibal Island of Angatan,' and I +have no objection to redeem my pledge now, if desired. I wish you to +take notice, however, at the outset, in order to avoid raising false +expectations, that I do not promise you a `Cannibal Story'--how much my +narrative deserves such a title, will appear when you have heard it." + +The call for the story being quite eager and unanimous, Arthur settled +himself into a comfortable position, and after giving one or two of +those preliminary ahems, common to the whole fraternity of story-tellers +from time immemorial, he proceeded as follows:-- + +ARTHUR'S STORY OF THE CANNIBAL ISLAND OF ANGATAN. + +"About a year and a half ago, and just before the time when I was to +sail for the United States to complete my preparation for the seminary, +I was induced to embark upon a voyage to the Palliser Islands, planned +by a young chief of Eimeo, named Rokoa, and a Mr Barton, an American +trader residing at the island. The object of the young chief in this +expedition, was to ascertain the fate of an elder brother, who had +sailed for Anaa, or Chain island, several months before, with the +intention of returning immediately, but who had never since been heard +from: that of Mr Barton, was to engage a number of Hao-divers, for a +pearl-fishing voyage, contemplated by him in connection with another +foreign trader. He did not himself embark with us; but his son, a young +man, two or three years my senior, accompanied us instead, to make the +necessary arrangements for engaging the divers, and also to purchase any +mother-of-pearl, pearls, and tortoise-shell, which the natives might +have to dispose of, at such places as we should visit. With a view to +the latter purpose, he was provided with a supply of trinkets and cheap +goods of various kinds, such as are used in this species of traffic. At +the Society Islands, the natives had learned the fair value of their +commodities, and would no longer exchange even their yams, bread-fruit, +and cocoa-nuts, for beads, spangles, and fragments of looking-glasses; +but among the smaller groups, lying farther to the eastward, where the +intercourse with Europeans was comparatively infrequent, these, and +similar articles, were still in great demand, the simple islanders +readily giving rich shells, and valuable pearls, in barter for them. I +accompanied the expedition, at the request of Rokoa, and with scarcely +any other object than to gratify him; though I was made the bearer of +letters, and some trifling presents to a Tahitian native missionary, who +had recently gone to Hao, to labour there. I had long known both Rokoa +and his brother, now supposed to be lost. The former was a remarkable +and interesting character. He had accompanied my uncle and myself on a +voyage to Hawaii, and visited with us the great volcano of Kilauea, on +that island, said to be by far the grandest and most wonderful in the +world, not excepting Vesuvius itself. In making the descent into the +crater, and while endeavouring to reach what is called the Black Ledge, +he saved my life at the imminent hazard of his own. It was upon that +voyage, that I first became acquainted with him. We afterwards +travelled together, through the most wild and inaccessible parts of the +interior of Tahiti and Eimeo; and in the course of this intimacy, I +discovered much in him to esteem and admire. There was in his +character, such a union of gentleness and courage, such childlike +openness of disposition, and such romantic fidelity to what he +considered the obligations of friendship, as reminds me of young Edmund, +in Johnny's favourite story of Asiauga's Knight. With a chivalrous +daring, that could face the most appalling danger without a tremor, was +united an almost feminine delicacy of character, truly remarkable in a +savage." + +"That," said Browne, "is the true ideal of the knightly character-- +courage, which nothing can daunt, but without roughness or ferocity even +in the hour of mortal combat. The valour of the knight is a high +sentiment of honour, devotion, loyalty; it is calm, gentle, beautiful, +and is thus distinguished from the mere animal courage of the ruffian, +which is brutal, fierce, and cruel." + +"I think I shall like Rokoa," said Johnny, rubbing his hands together in +token of satisfaction, "and I guess this is going to be an interesting +story; there will be some fighting in it, I expect." + +"Of course, there will be plenty of fighting," said Max, "or else what +is the meaning of this preliminary flourish of trumpets, about Rokoa's +chivalrous courage, and all that?" + +"I once more give fair and timely notice, in order to prevent +disappointment, that I am merely relating a sober narrative of facts, +and not improvising one of Max's florid romances about Sooloo pirates, +Spanish bandits, Italian bravos, or the robbers of the Hartz mountains." + +"Or enchanted castles, captive princesses, valiant knights, +fire-breathing dragons, and diabolical old magicians," added Browne, +"which formed the staple of a highly edifying tale with which I +overheard him entertaining Johnny the other afternoon at Castle-hill, as +we were taking our siesta in the shade." + +"And a capital story it was, too," said Johnny, "but go on, Arthur, +please." + +"Well, every thing being arranged for our voyage, we set sail in a large +`Vaa Motu,' or single canoe, furnished with a great outrigger, and +manned by a crew of nine natives. Our cargo consisted of Barton's stock +of goods for trading with the islanders, and a quantity of stained +tappa, fine mats, shark's teeth, etcetera, which Rokoa had laid in for +purposes of his own. + +"The commencement of the voyage was pleasant and auspicious. We set out +in the morning, with a fine westerly breeze, which is of rare occurrence +in that latitude, and early in the afternoon we passed the high island +of Meetia, just in sight to the southward, showing that we had made at +least seventy miles, in about nine hours. The wind continued steady and +fair, and the next day at sunset, we reached Anaa. Here we remained +only long enough to enable Rokoa to obtain all the information to be +had, that promised to throw any light upon the fate of his brother. All +that could be learned was, that a canoe from Tahiti had touched here +several months since, and after obtaining a supply of water, had +immediately sailed for Motutunga, or Adventure Island, but from the +description given us of the canoe, and of the number and appearance of +her company, there was little reason to believe that this was the party +with which Rokoa's brother had embarked. Barton being anxious to +improve the favourable breeze, which still continued to blow with +unwonted steadiness from such a quarter, we resumed our voyage, and +steered eastward for Hao, on the day after our arrival at Anaa. + +"That night the weather suddenly changed, and a storm arose, the wind +blowing strongly from the south-west. Our crew became alarmed, and a +part of them began to clamour to return to Anaa, which we might have +done, by three or four hours' incessant paddling, in the teeth of the +gale. Rokoa, however, believed that the weather would change again in +the morning, and determined to continue on our course; we accordingly +ran before the wind, with barely sufficient sail to keep the canoe +steady, and enable us to steer her. The storm continued without +intermission or abatement for the next twenty-four hours, contrary to +Rokoa's prediction; and to avoid the danger of being swamped, we were +obliged still to keep running before it. The second night, at sunset, +the wind fell, and in the morning, the sea had become tolerably smooth, +with only a moderate breeze blowing. But though the gale had ceased, +the weather was still thick, and the sky so obscured by clouds that we +could not see the sun, or even fix upon the quarter of the heavens in +which he stood. Thus, those means upon which the natives are wont to +rely for directing their course upon their long voyages, wholly failed +us. The canoe was furnished with a small ship's compass, a present to +Rokoa from the missionaries, but this had been broken, by one of our +crew being thrown violently upon it during the storm, while Barton was +consulting it. We did not get even a glimpse of the sun all that day; +nor the next, until late in the afternoon, when it cleared beautifully, +and for the first time since the loss of the compass, we were able to +distinguish north from south, and east from west. We found that we had +got completely `turned round,' as the phrase is, and were heading due +north; and we now put about, and steered in what we supposed to be the +right direction. At dawn the next day, we were surprised to find +ourselves in sight of a strange island, which none of us remembered +having seen before. A remarkable looking black rock, resembling the +hull of a large man-of-war, rose abruptly from the water about half a +mile from the shore. + +"Rokoa, who had sailed a great deal among the islands east of Tahiti, +and had visited most of them, could form no conjecture in regard to the +one now in sight. Presently some of our crew began to whisper +mysteriously together, and the word was passed from one to another, that +this was no other than the ill-famed island of Angatan. I knew that an +island of that name, the subject of a thousand bug-bear stories, to +which I had often incredulously listened, was said to lie somewhere to +the north of Hao; but I had never met with any one who could give me any +definite and satisfactory information respecting it. + +"According to general report, its inhabitants were cannibals, and were +in the habit of murdering and devouring all who were so unfortunate as +to be cast upon their shores, or who had the hardihood or temerity +voluntarily to land upon them. It was also said, that the island had +never been visited by white men; and, owing to the popular belief in +regard to the ferocious and warlike character of its people, it is +certain that the natives of the neighbouring groups could not, as a +general thing, be induced by any consideration to engage in a voyage +having this reputed cannibal island for its destination; voyages of this +kind having been sometimes contemplated, but never to my knowledge +actually undertaken. + +"Among the other marvellous reports concerning Angatan, was one, to the +effect that its inhabitants were possessed of immense hoards of pearls +and shell, of the value of which they were utterly ignorant. + +"One of our crew, a garrulous Hao-man, and an inveterate boaster, +declared that, about a year since, he had embarked for Angatan with a +party of Chain Islanders, in a large double canoe, being tempted to +incur the perils of the enterprise, by the prospect of the enormous +gains that might be realised in trading with the natives, if a friendly +intercourse could once be opened with them. They had succeeded in +reaching the island; but scarcely had they set foot upon the shore, when +they were attacked by a party of the inhabitants, who issued suddenly +from the forest, and, disregarding all their friendly signs and +gestures, fell upon them, and killed the greater part of their number, +the rest making their escape with difficulty, and solely through the +courage, presence of mind, and extraordinary exertions of the narrator, +without which they must all infallibly have perished. He described the +islanders as fierce, wild-looking men, of gigantic stature, armed with +long spears, and heavy clubs set with sharks' teeth, and wearing little +or no clothing; yet, strange to tell, around the necks of these almost +naked savages were strings of the richest pearls, instead of the common +ornaments of ovula-shells. + +"Our veracious Hao-man, most solemnly asseverated the entire and literal +truth of all these particulars, and declared that the island before us +was the veritable cannibal Angatan, the singular black rock enabling +him, as he said, to identify it beyond all doubt. To this story I was +myself disposed to accord about the same degree of credit as to the +adventures of Sinbad the Sailor; but it was easy to perceive that our +crew, far from being so sceptical, were firm and unhesitating believers +in Angatan, its man-eating giants, its treasures of pearl, and the whole +catalogue of marvels current respecting it. + +"I was the less inclined to repose any confidence in the man's +declarations, because all the best accounts located Angatan far to the +north of Hao and Amanu, while we had reason to believe that we were now +to the south-west of them. + +"Barton's curiosity and love of adventure, were stimulated by what he +had heard; perhaps, also, the hints which had been dropped respecting +rich shell and costly pearls, were not without their due share of +influence, and he declared himself desirous of taking a closer look at +this `terra incognita,' respecting which such marvellous tales were +current. Rokoa, too, no sooner heard the first whispered conjecture of +the identity of the place before us with Angatan, than he resolved to +land, notwithstanding the evident reluctance of the crew, and the open +remonstrances and warnings of Sinbad. I suspected, I scarcely know why, +that he cherished a vague hope of being able to gain here some clue to +the fate of his missing brother. On approaching the shore, we found +that a heavy surf broke upon it, but there was a good beach, and a +landing could be effected without much difficulty. We accordingly took +in our sail, and resorting to the paddles, made for what seemed to be a +favourable spot. Soon after passing the black rock before alluded to, I +observed several figures stealing along the shore, in the covert of a +row of mangrove bushes, and apparently watching our movements. When we +had reached the edge of the surf, and were preparing to dash through it, +they came out of the thicket, and with threatening gestures warned us +away. This created such a panic among our crew, that they could not be +prevailed upon to paddle nearer. Rokoa stood up in the bow, and made +such signs and gestures as are used to indicate peaceful and friendly +intentions, while Barton displayed some of his most attractive-looking +trinkets. The people on shore now seemed to confer together, and in a +few moments, one of their number, who, from his stained tiputa of yellow +and crimson, appeared to be a chief or person of consequence, came down +to the water's edge, waving a green bough, and beckoning us to land. +Our Sinbad pronounced this sudden apparent change in their disposition +towards us, to be a treacherous pretence, designed to lure us ashore, in +order that they might plunder, kill, and devour us; but, as he did not +explain why, if such was their object, they should in the first place +have menaced us as they had done, we gave little heed to his warnings. +The party of natives did not seem greatly to outnumber us, and were not +particularly formidable in their appearance. They were, as well as we +could judge at such a distance, of no more than the ordinary stature. +With the exception of the individual already referred to, in the gay +tiputa, they wore nothing but the maro, and were armed with long spears. +Nevertheless, our crew still refused to make any nearer approach, +suspecting that more of the natives were lurking among the mangrove; +ready to sally out upon us at the proper moment if we should venture to +land. + +"Rokoa, finding all attempts to overcome the cowardice of our men +unavailing, took a few trinkets in his hand, and springing overboard, +swam through the surf to the shore. The personage in the tiputa waited +to receive him, continuing to wave the green branch, and to make +amicable signs. Rokoa advanced, and greeted him in the Tahitian +fashion, by rubbing faces. The two then walked together to the skirts +of the wood, where the others still kept themselves, and Rokoa after +distributing his trinkets, came down to the beach again, and beckoned us +to come ashore, supposing that our crew might by this time be so far +reassured as to venture it. Sinbad was about to remonstrate again, when +Barton drew a pocket-pistol, with a pair of which he was provided, and +threatened to shoot him, unless he kept quiet. This effectually +silenced the croakings of the Hao-man, for the time at least and we +finally induced some of the others to take to the paddles, and push +through the surf to the spot where Rokoa awaited us. As soon as the +canoe was beached, and we were all fairly ashore, the natives came +forward, somewhat hastily, from the skirt of the wood, probably in the +expectation of receiving further presents; but our men, mistaking this +sudden advance for a hostile movement, laid hold of the canoe, and would +have put her into the water again, had not Rokoa, armed with a heavy +paddle, and backed by Barton with his pistols, interfered with so much +decision and vigour, that their fears began to take a new direction and +they came to the sensible conclusion, that they had better run the risk +of being roasted and eaten by the cannibals, than encounter the far more +immediate danger of having their heads broken by the club of their +chief, or their bodies bored through by the pistol-balls of the young +Papalangi. + +"On the other hand, the leader of the party of natives spoke to them, +and restrained their impatience; then, advancing before the rest, he +waved his hand, and throwing himself into an oratorical attitude, made a +little speech, thanking Rokoa for his gifts, and welcoming us to the +island. The language which he spoke was a dialect of the Tahitian, +differing from it so slightly that I had no difficulty in understanding +what he said. + +"When he had finished, Rokoa made an appropriate reply, according to the +rules of Polynesian etiquette. He commenced by paying our +gaudily-attired friend some florid compliments. He then gave a graphic +account of our voyage, describing the storm which we had encountered in +such terms, that our escape must have seemed little short of a miracle; +and concluded by stating the manner in which we had been driven from our +course, and finally reached the island. The natives listened +attentively, and signified their sense of Rokoa's eloquence by frequent +exclamations of `Maitai! Maitai!' (good! good!) and by nodding their +heads emphatically at the end of every sentence." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +THE CANNIBAL VILLAGE. + +THE MARAE AND THE PRIEST--MOWNO AT HOME--CANNIBAL YOUNG LADIES--OLLA AND +HER FRIENDS. + + "And there, with awful rites, the hoary priest, + Beside that moss-grown heathen altar stood, + His dusky form in magic cincture dressed, + And made the offering to his hideous god." + +"So then," said Browne, interrupting Arthur's narrative, "these two +parties of savages, instead of going to work, knocking each others' +brains out, as one might naturally have expected, actually commenced +entertaining one another with set speeches, very much like the mayor and +aldermen of a city corporation receiving a deputation of visitors!" + +"There is," replied Arthur, "an almost childish fondness of form and +ceremony among all the Polynesian tribes, as is seen at their high +feasts and festivals, their games, and religious rites. The chiefs and +priests are in the habit of making little orations upon a variety of +occasions, when this is expected of them. Formerly there existed in the +Society Islands, a class of persons called Rautis, or orators of battle, +whose exclusive business it was to exhort the people in time of war, and +on the eve of an engagement. Even during the heat of conflict they +mingled with the combatants, and strove to animate and inflame their +courage, by recounting the exploits of their ancestors, and urging every +motive calculated to excite desperate valour and contempt of death. +Some very remarkable instances of the powerful effect produced by the +eloquence of these Rautis are recorded, showing that they constituted a +by no means useless or ineffective part of a native army. The islanders +almost universally have a taste for oratory, by which they are easily +affected; and they hold those who excel in it in high estimation." + +"It would appear then," said Browne, "that they are not such utter +heathens after all; I should never have given them credit for so much +taste and sensibility." + +"You see, Browne," said Max, "what advantages you will enjoy over the +rest of us, when we get to Eiulo's island, as Johnny is confident we are +destined to do, one of these days. You shall then astonish the simple +inhabitants, with Pitt's reply to Walpole, or `Now is the winter of our +discontent,' and gain advancement in the state, by your oratorical +gifts. Who knows but you may rise to be prime-minister, or chief Rauti, +to his majesty the king!" + +"Pray, let Arthur proceed with his story," said Morton, laughing, "I see +that Johnny is beginning to grow impatient: he probably thinks it high +time for the cannibals to be introduced, and the fighting to commence." + +"Well," resumed Arthur, "as soon as the speech-making was over, the +natives, who seemed thus far, quite friendly and inoffensive, came +forward once more, and we all went through the ceremony of rubbing +faces, with a great show of cordiality, though it was easy to perceive +that our party were still under the influence of secret fears and +misgivings. + +"Barton and I, received more than our due proportion of these +civilities, and from the wondering exclamations of our new acquaintances +as they examined the articles which composed our dress, and their +remarks to one another upon our complexion, I inferred that some of them +at least, had never seen a white person before. Barton, in particular, +attracted a large share of their attention, owing probably to a +complexion rather florid, and uncommonly fair, notwithstanding a two +years' residence within the tropics, which, together with his light hair +and blue eyes, afforded a striking contrast to the tawny skins and long +black elf-locks of the natives. + +"The chief of the party, who had acted as spokesman, was called Mowno. +He was a young man, with a handsome, boyish face, expressive of +good-nature and indolence. Rokoa walked apart with him to make +inquiries, as I had no doubt, connected with the subject of his +brother's fate. Meanwhile Barton produced a piece of tortoise-shell, +and some pearls, which he exhibited to the natives, asking whether they +had any articles of the kind; but after carelessly looking at them, they +shook their heads, and inquired what such things were good for; +whereupon Barton, casting an annihilating glance at the disconcerted +Sinbad, significantly demanded of him what had become of those necklaces +of pearls, worn by the natives of Angatan, and whether these simple, +inoffensive people, were the gigantic cannibals, about whom he had +manufactured such enormous lies. + +"After Mowno had concluded his conference with Rokoa, he led us to a +large building near the beach, in a very ruinous and decayed state, and +completely over-shadowed by aged tamanu-trees. It seemed, from its size +and peculiar structure, to be a deserted marae, or native temple. He +then sent away two of his people, who soon returned with several +clusters of cocoa-nuts, and some bananas, for our refreshment. On +learning that the supply of water which we had taken in for our voyage, +was nearly exhausted, he informed us that there was no spring or stream, +nearer than his village, which was some two miles inland, and promised +to have a supply sent us during the day. They had come down to the +shore, as we now learned, for the purpose of cutting mangrove roots, +from which they make large and powerful bows, and the whole party soon +left us at the marae, and proceeded to the beach; in about an hour we +saw them depart inland, carrying fagots of these roots, without taking +any further notice of us. + +"It had fallen calm soon after sunrise, so that we could not for the +present have resumed our voyage, had we been so inclined. + +"About half an hour before noon, a number of the natives whom we had +seen in the morning, again made their appearance, with several large +calabashes of water, and a quantity of taro and bread-fruit for our use. +Rokoa distributed among them some trifling presents, which they hastily +concealed among the folds of their maros. A few moments afterwards +Mowno himself emerged from the grove, attended by the remainder of the +party we had seen in the morning. There was now a further distribution +of presents, when I perceived the reason why the first comers had so +hastily concealed the trifles which had been given them. All presents, +no matter on whom bestowed, seemed to be regarded as the especial +perquisites of the chief, and a youth, who acted as Mowno's personal +attendant, presently went round among the others, collecting and taking +possession of everything which he had seen them receive. This was +submitted to without remonstrance, and apparently as a matter of course, +though by no means cheerfully. + +"Soon after this somewhat autocratic proceeding, Mowno turned abruptly +to Barton, and saying that he must now return to the village, invited +him to go with him to visit it. Barton appearing to hesitate, the chief +pressed the matter so earnestly that his suspicions were aroused, and he +peremptorily declined. Mowno's angry looks evinced his displeasure, and +after walking about for a quarter of an hour in sullen silence, with +very much the demeanour of a spoiled child thwarted in his whim, he at +length made a similar request of me, letting drop at the same time, some +expression to the effect that one of us _must_ go with him. Fortunately +Rokoa, whose high spirit would have taken instant offence at the least +semblance of a threat, did not hear this. I saw plainly, that for some +reason, the young chief had set his heart upon having either Barton or +myself visit his village, and I suspected this was, in fact, the sole +object of his return. I observed, also, that his party was somewhat +more numerous, and much better armed than it had been in the morning, +and I had no doubt that, rather than suffer himself to be baffled in his +purpose, he would resort to force to accomplish it. + +"After a moment's reflection, I was pretty well satisfied that I had +nothing to fear from acceding to his request, believing, as I did, that +I understood the motive of it. I thought, too, that a refusal would in +all probability lead to an instant hostile collision between the natives +and ourselves, and I finally resolved to accept, or more accurately +speaking, to yield to, the invitation. Having come to this conclusion, +I told Mowno that I would go with him, upon the condition that I should +return before night, to which he readily assented, showing extreme +satisfaction at having finally succeeded in his wishes. I gave no +credit to the alleged cannibal propensities of the islanders, and was +inclined from what I had already seen, to think much more favourably of +them than the event justified. I supposed that the curiosity of the +people of the village had been excited by the reports of those who had +seen us in the morning, respecting the pale-faced strangers, and that +Mowno's only object in insisting as he did, on having Barton or myself +go with him, was to gratify some aged chief who was too infirm to come +down to the shore to see us, or did not want to take the trouble of +doing so." + +"Well, was you right in your conjecture?" inquired Browne. + +"Yes, partially at least; there was, I think, no unfriendly motive as +far as Mowno was concerned. What designs others of the natives may have +entertained I will not at present undertake to say. But instead of some +superannuated chief, it was the curiosity of Mowno's young wife that was +to be gratified. On hearing his account of the white strangers, she had +despatched him forthwith back to the shore, to bring them to the +village; which commission, it seemed, he was resolved faithfully to +execute, at every hazard." + +"Really," said Browne, "civilisation must have made some considerable +progress in Angatan, if the savages there make such docile and +complaisant husbands." + +"This was not an ordinary case," replied Arthur; "in the first place, +Mowno was an uncommonly good-natured sort of a savage; then he had a +very pretty, persuasive little wife, and he had not yet been long enough +married, to have entirely merged the zeal and devotion of the lover, in +the easy indifference, and staid authority of the husband; but this is +anticipating. + +"When I informed Rokoa of the young chief's invitation, and my +acceptance of it, he refused to consent to my going, except upon the +condition that he should accompany me, and share whatever danger might +attend the step. Mowno acquiesced in this arrangement, though I thought +he didn't seem to be altogether pleased with it. Barton, also, on +learning that Rokoa and myself had concluded to go to the village, +resolved to accompany us. Mowno was impatient to have us set out at +once, and Rokoa having given some directions to the crew, as to their +conduct during our absence, we hastily made our preparations, and in a +few moments after the matter had been decided upon, the whole party left +the shore and entered the forest. A quarter of an hour's walk brought +us to a flourishing bread-fruit plantation, which we passed through +without seeing a single dwelling, or any indications of inhabitants. +This was bounded by a wild ravine, crossing which, we entered a dense +and gloomy grove, composed almost entirely of the sacred miro, and one +other kind of tree, the branches of which sprang horizontally from the +trunk, in a series of whorls, one above another, twisting round from +left to right, and clothed with broad leaves of so dark a green as to +seem almost black. Near the centre of this grove, we came suddenly upon +a large marae, built principally of loose stones, overgrown with moss +and lichens. It was a spacious, uncovered inclosure, the front of which +consisted of a strong bamboo fence, while the three remaining sides were +of stone. Within the inclosure, at one side, was a small building, +probably the priest's dwelling, and in the centre arose a solid +pyramidal structure, on the terraced sides of which were ranged the +misshapen figures of several gigantic idols. In front of this, and +between four rude tumuli of broken coral, was a low platform, supported +by stakes, and resembling the altars used for human sacrifices, during +the ancient reign of heathenism in Tahiti. Beneath this platform, or +altar, was a pile of human skulls; and suspended from the trees, were +the shells of enormous turtles, and the skeletons of fishes. A +hideous-looking old man, whom I supposed to be the priest, sat in the +door of the small building, within the inclosure, and looking intently +at me, made strange faces as we passed by. His skin was sallow, and +singularly speckled, probably from some cutaneous disease; he had no +eyebrows, and his eyes were small and glittering like those of a snake; +in his countenance there was a mingled expression of cunning and cruelty +that made me shudder. When we were nearest to him in passing, he struck +himself violently on the breast, and cried out in a strong but dissonant +voice, pointing with his long, skeleton fingers, towards the young +chief:--`Mowno, son of Maloa, rob not the servant of Oro of a priest's +share!' so at least, I understood the words which he uttered; but the +natives hurried on, without seeming to pay any attention to him." + +"That would have frightened me mortally," interrupted Johnny. "I should +have thought that they were going to make a cannibal feast of me, and +that the wicked old priest was speaking for his share." + +"Well, I confess that some notion of the sort flashed across my mind for +a moment. The dark grove, the great idolatrous looking marae, with its +heathen altar, and monstrous images; the pile of skulls; the hideous old +man and his strange words; all tended to suggest vague but startling +suspicions. But another glance at the open and friendly countenances of +our guides reassured me. In answer to a question in regard to the +building which we had just passed, Mowno said, with a natural and +indifferent air, that it was the house of Oro, where a great solemnity +was soon to be celebrated; and although I did not allude to the skulls, +he added that they were a part of the remains of the priests, who had +been buried within the inclosure, and which were now, in accordance with +an established custom, placed beneath the altar. The dark wood was +bounded by a charming valley, with a brook running through it, and I was +glad to escape from its gloomy shade, into the cheerful light. We +forded the shallow stream, which was so clear that every pebble in its +gravelly bed was visible, and found ourselves at the foot of a long, +green slope. Before us, lying partly in the valley, and straggling +half-way up the ascent, was a pretty village. The neat and light-built +native dwellings dotted the side of the slope, or peeped out from among +embowering trees along the banks of the brook, in the most picturesque +manner. The thatching of the cottages, bleached to an almost +snowy-whiteness, offered a pleasing contrast to the surrounding verdure. +Troops of children were pursuing their sports in every direction. Some +were wading in the stream, sailing tiny boats, or actively spattering +one another with water, a recreation which they could enjoy without any +fear of that damage to clothing, which would have rendered it +objectionable in more highly civilised communities. Others again, (many +of them scarcely old enough to walk, as one would suppose), were +swimming about in the deeper places, like amphibious creatures. Some +were swinging on ropes of sennit, suspended from the branches of the +trees, and a few were quietly sitting in the shade, making bouquets and +wreaths of wild-flowers. Among them all, there was not a single +deformed or sickly-looking child. I did not observe any grown persons, +most of them probably being at that hour asleep in their houses. In +passing through the village, our escort closed around us in such a +manner as to screen us from observation, and we reached the top of the +slope without seeming to have attracted notice. Here Mowno dismissed +all his attendants except two, and we then struck into a fine avenue of +well-grown trees, running along the crest of the hill, and leading to a +large native house, of oval form, prettily situated upon a green knoll, +and over-shadowed by wide-branching bread-fruit trees. This, Mowno +informed us, was his dwelling. At a short distance from the house, +beneath a fan-palm, was a group of young girls, so entirely absorbed in +the congenial task of arranging one another's abundant tresses, and +adorning themselves with flowers, that they did not observe our +approach. Mowno seemed intent upon some playful surprise, and laughing +softly to himself like a pleased child, he motioned us to hide ourselves +in a thicket of young casuarinas. From our ambush he pointed out to us +one of the group beneath the palm, having several white buds of the +fragrant gardenia in her hair, and a garland of the rosa cinensis about +her neck; when satisfied that he had drawn our attention to the right +person, he gave us to understand, with an air of great complacency, that +she was `Olla,' his wife. While thus engaged, we were suddenly +discovered, being betrayed by Mowno's gaudy tiputa, seen through the +foliage by the quick eye of his better half, who immediately sprang up +with a clear, ringing laugh, scattering a lapful of flowers upon the +ground, and came running like a fawn towards him; the rest of us still +keeping concealed. She was very pretty, graceful as a bird in every +movement, and had a singularly pleasing expression of countenance. + +"On witnessing the greeting which she bestowed upon Mowno, Barton +whispered me that he ought to consider himself a happy savage, and to do +him justice, he seemed to be of the same opinion himself. She commenced +talking at once, with wonderful vivacity, pouring forth a continuous +torrent of words, with little gushes of laughter interspersed here and +there by way of punctuation, and making no longer or more frequent +pauses than were absolutely necessary for the purpose of taking breath. +Notwithstanding her amazing volubility, I could understand enough of +what she said, to perceive that she was inquiring after `the pale-faced +youths,' and presently she appeared to be scolding her husband in a +pretty lively strain, for having failed to bring them with him according +to his promise. It was amusing to witness Mowno's ludicrous struggles +to look grave, while he made feigned excuses, and explanations of our +absence. His demeanour resembled more that of a boy, whose head has +been turned by becoming, for the first time, the actual and uncontrolled +owner of a watch, or a fowling-piece, than of a stern warrior, or savage +chief. He could not, with all his efforts, maintain sufficient gravity +and self-possession, to carry out the jest, poor as it was, which he had +undertaken; but kept glancing towards our hiding-place, and finally, +burst into a boisterous explosion of laughter; when Olla, peeping into +the thicket, caught sight of us, and instantly darted away with a pretty +half-scream, and rejoined her companions. Mowno now beckoned us forth, +and we approached the group, whereupon they made a show of scampering +off into the grove, but apparently thought better of it, and concluded +to stand their ground. At first, they seemed actually afraid of Barton +and myself, peeping cautiously at us over one another's shoulders from a +safe distance. Presently, one, more enterprising than the rest, +ventured so far as to reach out her hand, and touch Barton on the cheek, +when, finding that no disastrous consequences immediately followed this +act of temerity, they gradually laid aside their apprehensions, and +pressing around us, soon became sufficiently familiar to try a variety +of highly original and interesting experiments upon our complexion and +clothing. These, though somewhat annoying, were accompanied by +questions and observations so irresistibly ludicrous, that we soon found +it entirely out of the question to preserve any sort of gravity, and as +the whole troop always joined in our laughter without stopping to +understand its cause, or instantly led off of themselves, upon the +slightest provocation, the woods resounded with peals of merriment. + +"One of these damsels, after examining Barton's fair skin, and flowing +yellow locks, gravely communicated to a companion, her conviction that +we had come from the moon. A second stoutly maintained our earthly +origin, and attributed our paleness to the influence of some strange +sickness; while a third, being of a sceptical and suspicious turn of +mind, suddenly seized Barton by the wrist and spitting upon the skirt of +her pareu, commenced scrubbing his hand with great vigour, to see +whether the colours were fast. Our tight-fitting garments; too, seemed +to puzzle them exceedingly, and we were listeners to an animated debate, +upon the question whether they were a natural or an artificial covering; +the young lady who upheld the theory of our lunar origin, inclining +strongly to the opinion, that like the feathery coat of birds, our +clothing was a part of ourselves. But the sagacity and penetration of +the one who had endeavoured to wash the paint from Barton's hand, soon +enabled her to discover the unsoundness of this doctrine, and, in order +the more triumphantly to refute it, she insisted upon pulling off my +jacket, and trying it on herself. Finding that nothing less would +satisfy her, I resigned the garment, when having succeeded, with some +assistance, in getting into it, and buttoning it up as far as was +practicable, she snatched Barton's cap to complete her costume, and +commenced parading up and down the avenue, the admiration and envy of +her companions. I fully expected that Barton's coat would next be put +in requisition, and he whispered me that he stood in momentary dread, +lest the now awakened spirit of investigation and experiment, should +prompt our new friends to still more embarrassing extremes. + +"This, however, proved to be a groundless apprehension, for their +curiosity was presently diverted into a new channel by Olla, who +suddenly demanded to know my name. I accordingly repeated it, and she +endeavoured several times to pronounce it after me, but without success. +The `th' seemed to constitute an insuperable difficulty, which, +however, she finally evaded, by softening `Arthur' into `Artua,' and +this, singularly enough, was what Rokoa had always been in the habit of +calling me. He and Barton were now called upon for their names, and in +return, we were favoured with the liquid and vowelly appellatives, by +which our ingenuous and communicative acquaintances were respectively +designated. Barton assumed the alias of Tom, which was straightway +metamorphosed into `Tomma.' + +"While this exchange of names was going on, an old woman came from the +house, and delivered some message to Olla, which from the repetition of +the words `poe, poe,' I conjectured to be a summons to dinner. Mowno +leading the way, we now proceeded towards the dwelling. It was +surrounded by a strong, but neat hedge of the ti-plant some three and a +half feet high, with an ingeniously contrived wicker gate opposite the +door. A path strewn with marine shells, and fragments of white coral, +led from the gate to the door. The space within the inclosure was +chiefly devoted to the cultivation of yams and other vegetables, but +Olla showed me a little plot of ground, near the house, which she said +was her own garden. It was tastefully arranged, and carefully kept, and +a considerable variety of flowers, all of which she had herself +transplanted from the woods, were there in full bloom. Most conspicuous +among them was the native jasmine, and a species of wood-pink, both of +which were fragrant. The building itself was a model of a native +dwelling, and since we are to-morrow to try our own skill in +house-building, I will endeavour to describe it. It was of an oval +shape; the sides were inclosed with handsome mats, with spaces left for +the admission of light and air. The roof was composed of a firm and +durable thatch of pandanus leaves, strung upon small reeds, laid closely +together, and overlapping one another from the eaves to the ridge-pole. + +"From the inside, the appearance was the neatest and prettiest +imaginable, the whiteness of the straight and slender rafters of peeled +hibiscus, contrasting well with the ceiling of shining brown leaves +which they sustained. The furniture of the house consisted of a number +of large sleeping-mats, five or six carved wooden stools, and two narrow +tables, or rather shelves, of wicker-work, fastened against the wall at +opposite sides of the room. Upon one of these were arranged a number of +calabashes, carved wooden dishes, cocoa-nut drinking-cups, and other +domestic utensils. Upon the other was a native drum, several clubs and +spears, a long vivo or native flute, and a hideous-looking wooden image +with four arms and a bunch of red feathers fastened to what was +doubtless meant for its head. The rafters were ornamented with braided +and coloured cords wound round them, the ends of which hung down several +feet, and sustained a number of weapons and various other articles +suspended by them. + +"At the farther end of the room, a woman was pounding taro, or +bread-fruit, in a wooden mortar; another, apparently very old and +infirm, was sitting upon a low stool near the wall, swaying her body +slowly from side to side, and making a low, monotonous noise. I +observed that Olla frequently looked towards the latter, with a mournful +expression of countenance. When we first entered the house, she went +and sat down by her side, and talked with her in a low tone, and when +she turned away, her eyes were full of tears. The old woman did not +evince any corresponding emotion, but muttered something feebly and +indistinctly, as if replying to what Olla had said, of which I could +distinguish the words, `It is best, child; Malola is very old; she is +sick and weak; she cannot work; it is time she should be buried out of +the way.' I instantly suspected that this unhappy creature was to be +destroyed by her own friends, on account of her age and infirmities, +according to a most horrible and unnatural, but too prevalent custom. I +had once been present at a scene of this kind, without the slightest +possibility of successful interference, when a native woman had been +strangled; her own son, pulling at one end of the tappa which encircled +his mother's neck. In that case, the victim, instead of submitting +quietly and willingly to her fate, (as is most usual), suddenly lost her +courage at the moment of reaching the grave, beside which she was to be +strangled, and opposed a frantic and desperate resistance to her +murderers. Her heart-rending cries; her fearful struggles; and, more +than all, the horrid indifference and cruelty of her executioners, have +left upon my mind an indelible impression. I now resolved that if my +suspicions proved just, I would make an earnest effort to prevent the +repetition of so inhuman a deed, and from what I had already seen of the +mild disposition of Mowno, I was inclined to believe that there was +great hope of success in such an endeavour. + +"Rokoa, on hearing the conversation above mentioned, had given me a +significant glance, which sufficiently explained to me how he understood +it. A very few moments sufficed to confirm my worst suspicions: I +learned that the aged female who had spoken of herself as Malola, was +Mowno's aunt and that she was, with her own full consent and approval, +to be destroyed in a few days. From the manner in which Olla alluded to +it, while I inferred that such acts were by no means uncommon among +these people, I at the same time clearly perceived, that custom and +education had not stifled or perverted in her gentle nature, at least, +the ordinary feelings and impulses of humanity, and that she anticipated +the deed with terror and loathing. I determined to watch for an +opportunity to converse with Mowno, and discover, if possible, whether +the cruel insensibility, implied in countenancing such a practice, could +really be concealed beneath so smooth and pleasant an aspect. + +"Meanwhile, the meal, to which we had been summoned, was spread under +the shade trees beside the house. It consisted of baked fish, served up +in banana leaves, roasted yams, poe-poe, a preparation of bread-fruit, +and an excellent kind of pudding, made of cocoa-nut-pulp and taro. It +was easy to perceive that Olla, with all her playfulness and girlish +vivacity, was a notable housekeeper." + +"Let me interrupt you a moment, to ask a single question," said Max. +"Did you get the recipe for making that pudding from Mrs Mowno?--if so, +please impart the same for the general good, and I will try my hand at +it the first convenient opportunity." + +"Heathen!" exclaimed Browne, "can you think of nothing but gormandising? +Pray, Arthur, proceed." + +"And bring on those cannibals forthwith," added Morton, "for unless you +do so, Johnny will despair entirely of any fighting, and go to sleep." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +AN EXPLOSION. + +THE CANNIBALS APPRECIATE MUSIC AND ELOQUENCE, BUT TAKE OFFENCE AT THE +NEW THEOLOGY. + + "Then tumult rose, fierce rage, and wild affright." + +"In the afternoon," resumed Arthur, "we went with our host and hostess, +and our companions at dinner, to a grove on the banks of the stream--a +place of general resort for the villagers during the latter part of +every fine day. The younger people met there, to pursue a variety of +sports and athletic exercises, and the older to gossip and look on. We +had intended to return to the boat, as soon as the repast was over, and +it would have been well had we done so. But our new friends insisted so +strenuously upon our accompanying them to the grove, that we yielded at +last to their playful importunities, so far as to consent to make a +brief pause there on our way. We had gone but a short distance from the +house, when a bird of about the size of a robin, flew down from a tree +beneath which we were passing, and after circling several times around +Olla's head, alighted on her finger, which she held out for it to perch +upon. It was a young wood-pigeon, which she had found in the grove, +when a callow half-fledged thing, the old bird having been captured or +killed by some juvenile depredators. Taking pity on its orphan state, +Olla had adopted and made a pet of it: it was now perfectly tame, and +would come readily at her call of `Lai-evi', (little captive), the name +she had given it, attending her so closely as to be seldom during the +day beyond the sound of her voice. + +"On reaching the grove, we found quite a number of the natives, of all +ages and of both sexes assembled, and though they soon began to gather +about us with inquisitive looks, we were subjected to much less +annoyance than might reasonably have been expected under the +circumstances. We were neither crowded, nor jostled, nor even +offensively stared at, the very children appearing to possess an innate +delicacy and sense of propriety, (though it may have been timidity), +which made them try to gratify their curiosity covertly, seizing those +opportunities to peep at us, when they thought they were themselves +unobserved. + +"Barton, who possessed an enviable faculty of adapting himself to all +sorts of people and circumstances, was in a few moments as much at home +among the villagers as if he had lived for years in their midst. He +gossiped with the old people, romped with the children, and chatted and +frolicked with the prettiest and most lively of the dusky maidens, to +the manifest disapprobation of several grim-looking young savages, who +stalked about in sullen dignity watching these familiar proceedings of +the handsome stranger, with rising jealousy and indignation. + +"At length a bevy of laughing girls, in punishment for some impertinence +with which they charged him, fell to pelting him with jasmine buds and +pandanus cones, the latter of which, in mischievous hands, are capable +of becoming rather formidable missiles. Foremost among the assailants +were our fair acquaintances of the morning, and even Olla, forgetting +her matronly station and dignity, joined zealously in the flowery +warfare; which was maintained with such spirit, that Barton was at +length obliged to beg for quarter, promising at the same time to `make +some music' for them, as a condition of the suspension of hostilities. +This proposition, as soon as it was understood, seemed to afford the +most extravagant delight; the shower of missiles ceased at once, and +Barton was immediately surrounded by as attentive and breathlessly +expectant an audience as artist could desire. Taking his stand upon a +moss-covered fragment of rock, he drew an enormous Jew's-harp from his +pocket, and handed it to me, gravely requesting me to `accompany' him +upon it, while he sang. Then, after clearing his throat, with quite a +professional air, he commenced `Hail Columbia,' and as he had a full, +clear voice, and sang with great spirit, the performance was listened to +with every mark of enjoyment, and was succeeded by rapturous applause. + +"He next gave a solo on the Jew's-harp to the air of `Yankee Doodle,' +with brilliant and original variations, which likewise met with a +flattering reception. But by far the greatest sensation was produced by +`Auld Lang syne,' which we sang together as a grand finale. The natives +really seemed to feel the sentiment of the music, although Barton turned +it into a burlesque by such an exaggerated pathos of tone and +expression, and gesture, that I had much difficulty in getting through +my part of the performance without laughing; but my vexation at being +surprised into taking a part in such a piece of buffoonery, greatly +helped me in resisting my sense of the ludicrous. At the end of every +verse, Barton grasped my hand in the most demonstrative manner, and +commenced shaking it vigorously, looking me all the while solemnly in +the face, and shaking away through the entire chorus, thereby producing +a number of quavers, which, though not set down in the music, greatly +added to its pathetic character. After the last chorus, he spread open +his arms, rushed forward, and gave me a stage embrace. This +performance, including the pantomime, must have been of a very moving +character, for when we had finished, I actually saw tears in the eyes of +several of our audience. This evidence of the gentle and +unsophisticated character of these simple people, affected me almost as +much as our music had moved them, and I could not help thinking to how +much better account such amiable impressibility was capable of being +turned. + +"Having thus performed his promise, Barton now insisted that we ought to +be entertained in our turn with some music, and after a little +persuasion, three young girls sang, or rather chaunted, several +plaintive, but somewhat monotonous airs. Their voices, though neither +strong nor clear, were soft and melodious, like the cooing of their +native wood-pigeons. In vain we asked for something livelier and more +spirited. Barton humming the tune of `Yankee Doodle,' to make them the +better understand what we wanted. All their melodies seemed to be of a +slow and measured character, and those specimens which we heard, +embraced a comparatively narrow range of notes. + +"Just as the native girls finished singing, we were joined by a fresh +party of eight or ten men, who came across the brook, and mingled with +the others. I heard Barton say to Rokoa, `There is the old priest +again,' but on looking around I could not see him. The new-comers did +not appear to be in the same holiday humour as the throng around us; +they walked gravely about without joining in the general mirth and +gaiety, and manifesting none of the curiosity in regard to ourselves, +which the others had evinced. I, however, thought nothing of this at +the time, supposing that they had been of the number of those whom we +had seen in the morning by the sea-shore, although I did not recognise +any of them. + +"Presently, Olla and her companions commenced begging us for more music. +One young lady in particular, (the same who had pronounced us to be +inhabitants of the moon), pressed Barton with unceasing importunities, +mingled with threats of a renewal of hostilities in case of +non-compliance. Finding all attempts at excuse or evasion utterly +unavailing, he suddenly snatched a wreath of yellow candle-nut-blossoms +from the head of his tormentress, crowned himself therewith, and +springing upon the top of the rock, assumed an oratorical attitude, and +waved his hand, as if about to harangue the people. Then, while I was +wondering what was to come next, he fixed his eye sternly upon a +sinister looking man of middle-age, with the head-dress of an inferior +chief, who was standing directly in front of him, and began to declaim +in Latin, with great vehemence--`Quo usque tandem abutere, Catilina, +patientia nostra,' etcetera, which the audience seemed at first, to +consider highly interesting and entertaining. As he proceeded, +delivering the sounding sentences, `ore rotundo,' and emphasising each +thundering polysyllable with a fierce gesture of his clenched fist, I +observed that the individual before mentioned, whom the orator seemed to +have chosen to represent Catiline, and who, without understanding Latin, +could very well perceive that there was something menacing and +vituperative in the language addressed to him, began to look at first +puzzled, and then incensed. He stole two or three hurried and uncertain +glances at those behind and immediately around him, as if to assure +himself whether this torrent of denunciation was not in fact directed +against some other person; but when all doubt on this point seemed to +have been resolved by the unequivocal demonstrations of the orator, his +rigid features assumed an expression of such anger and ferocity, that I +began to fear some violent outbreak of passion, and made several +attempts by signs and gestures, to indicate to Barton the danger of +pursuing so thoughtless and imprudent a pleasantry. But he either did +not perceive my meaning, or else, felt rather flattered than alarmed, by +the effect which his elocution seemed to produce upon Catiline, for he +continued to pour out upon him the torrent of his oratory for several +minutes longer, and it was not until his memory began evidently to fail +him, that he concluded with a last emphatic invective accompanied by a +sufficiently significant pantomime to convey some notion of its meaning, +and bowing to his audience, leaped from the rostrum. + +"This performance, seemed to afford even greater pleasure to the male +part of the assembly, (with a few exceptions), than the previous musical +entertainment had done, and they testified their approbation, by +emphatic nods and shouts of applause. + +"I now thought it time to terminate our visit, and return to the boat, +and was about to speak to Rokoa on the subject, when Barton seized me by +the arm, and pushed me towards the platform of rock. + +"`Now, Arthur, it is your turn,' said he, `you perceive what an effect +my eloquence has produced on old Catiline, there: give him a lecture +upon the sinfulness of indulging the vindictive passions, and exhort him +to repentance.' + +"The younger people pressed about me, and instigated and aided by +Barton, they fairly forced me upon the rocky platform. Though by no +means pleased at being obliged to take a part in a farce so little to my +taste, and for which I possessed none of Barton's talent, I saw plainly +that the shortest and least troublesome way, was to comply with their +wishes, and I accordingly endeavoured to recall some fragment of prose +or verse which might serve the present purpose. Supposing that English +would be quite as intelligible and acceptable to them as Barton's Latin, +I was just about to declaim those noble opening lines of Comus-- + + "`Before the starry threshold of Jove's Court,' etcetera. + +"Which used to be a favourite of mine at school, when suddenly another +impulse seized me. + +"As I glanced around upon the circle of smiling, upturned countenances, +I was struck by the docile and childlike expression of many of them. I +thought of the sad and benighted condition of this simple people, +without the knowledge of God, or the hope of immortality, given up, as +it seemed, a helpless prey to the darkest and most cruel superstitions. +I thought of the moss-grown marae in the dark wood, with its hideous +idols, its piles of human bones, and its hoary priest--fit minister of +such a religion. I remembered the aged woman at Mowno's house, and the +frightful doom in reserve for her. I felt that perhaps to such +impressible spirits, even a passing word, unskilfully and feebly spoken, +might by God's blessing do good; and yielding to the impulse of the +moment, instead of declaiming the verses from Comus, I began to speak to +them in their own language, of those great truths, the most momentous +for civilised or savage man to know, and the most deeply interesting to +every thoughtful mind, of whatever degree of culture--truths so simple, +that even these untutored children of nature could receive, and be made +happy by them. + +"In the plainest and simplest language I could command, and striving to +adapt myself to their habits of thought, and to use those forms of +expression most familiar to them, I announced the great doctrine of the +existence of one God, the sole creator of the world, and the loving +Father of all his creatures. I spoke of his power and his goodness, and +told them that though invisible to our eyes, as the wind which stirred +the tops of the palm-trees above them, he was ever near each one of us, +hearing our words, seeing our actions, reading our thoughts, and caring +for us continually. + +"I endeavoured to illustrate these attributes of God, by references and +allusions to the daily aspects of nature around them, and to ideas and +notions with which their mode of life, and the system of superstition in +which they had been trained, rendered them familiar. My especial aim +was to lead them, unconsciously, as it were, and without making any +direct attack upon their religion, to contrast the benignant character +of Him who has permitted us to call Him `Our Father in Heaven,' with +that of the malignant beings they had been taught to worship. + +"I next spoke of death, and of a future life, and assured them that the +friends whom they had buried, and they themselves, and all who had ever +lived, should awake as from a brief sleep, and live again for ever. But +when I proceeded to declare that most awful and mysterious doctrine of +our religion, and spoke of the worm that dieth not and the fire that is +not quenched, of eternal happiness, and unending woe, I could see by the +earnestness of their attention, and the expression of their +countenances, how powerfully they were impressed. + +"I cannot remember all that I said, or the language I used, but I +endeavoured to set before them in a shape adapted to their +comprehension, the simple elements of the Christian scheme--the great +doctrines of God and immortality, of human sinfulness and +accountability, and of salvation through Jesus Christ. But encouraged +by the attention and apparent interest of the silent and listening +circle, in the glow of the moment, I went beyond this prescribed limit, +and from these vast general truths, I began at last to speak of +particular acts and practices. As I thought once more of the marae in +the forest, and of the unhappy Malola, I told the people that our Father +beyond the sky could alone hear their prayers, and should alone be +worshipped; that he desired no sacrifices of living things; that he was +offended and displeased with all cruelty and bloodshed; and that the +offering of human sacrifices, and the killing of aged persons, were +crimes which he detested, and would be sure to punish; that he had +expressly commanded children to love and honour their parents, and that +it was their duty, the older, the more infirm and helpless they became, +the more faithfully to cherish and protect them. In speaking on this +subject, I grew earnest and excited, and probably my voice and manner +too strongly expressed the abhorrence I felt for such monstrous and +unnatural crimes. + +"At this point, Barton, who had for some time been looking on in +astonishment at the serious turn which the matter had so unexpectedly +taken, interrupted me with the whispered caution-- + +"`Be careful, Arthur! I fear from the black looks of one of your +clerical fathers here, that you are giving offence to the cloth, and +trenching upon perilous ground.' + +"But the warning came too late. Just as I glanced round in search of +the threatening looks, to which Barton alluded, a frightful figure +sprang up on the outer edge of the circle of listeners, directly in +front of me, and with cries of rage forced its way towards the spot +where I stood. I recognised at once the old priest of the marae, but +how changed since I last saw him! Every sign of age and decrepitude had +vanished: his misshapen frame seemed dilated, and instinct with nervous +energy: his face was pale with the intensity of his fury, and his small +eyes flashed fire. + +"`Perish, reviler of Oro, and his priests!' he cried, and hurled at me a +barbed spear, with so true an aim, that if I had not stooped as it left +his hand, it would have struck my face. Whizzing over my head, it +pierced the tough bark of a bread-fruit tree, ten yards behind me, where +it stood quivering. Instantly catching a club from the hands of a +bystander, he rushed forward to renew the attack. He had reached the +foot of the rock where I stood, when Rokoa with a bound placed himself +between us, and though without any weapon, motioned him back, with a +gesture so commanding, and an air at once so quiet, and so fearless, +that the priest paused. But it was for an instant only; then, without +uttering a word, he aimed a blow full at Rokoa's head. The latter +caught it in his open palm, wrenched the weapon from him, and, adroitly +foiling a furious attempt which he made to grapple with him, once more +stood upon the defensive with an unruffled aspect and not the slightest +appearance of excitement in his manner. + +"The baffled priest, livid with rage, looked round for another weapon. +Half a dozen of the men who had arrived upon the ground with him, +uttered a wild yell, and pressed forward with brandished clubs and +spears. Barton and I, placed ourselves by Rokoa's side, the former +handing me one of his pistols. All was tumult and confusion. The +outbreak had been so sudden and unexpected, and what I have just related +had passed so rapidly, that the bystanders had not yet recovered from +the first shock of astonishment and terror. Of the women, some shrieked +and fled from the spot, others threw themselves between us and the armed +natives, or invoked the interference of their brothers and friends for +our protection. Only a few, even of the men, seemed to participate in +the feeling of hostility against us. + +"But however inferior in number, the party of our foes far surpassed +that of our friends in resolution and energy. Foremost among them were +the priest and the hard-featured chief, who had been so deeply incensed +by what he regarded as the wanton insults offered him by Barton. A +number of the young men also, whose anger and jealousy had been aroused +by his sudden popularity, and the attention which had been paid us, +sided zealously with the priest and his party, and joined in the clamour +against us. + +"Meanwhile, Mowno, at Olla's entreaty, strove to calm the tumult, and to +pacify the leader and instigator of it; but his authority was fiercely +spurned, and our good-natured protector quailed before the fury of the +vindictive old man. As yet, however, our enemies, conscious that the +sympathies of a large number of the bystanders were with us, had offered +us no actual violence, confining themselves to menacing cries and +gestures, by which they seemed to be striving to work themselves up to +the requisite pitch of excitement. This was likely to be speedily +attained under the influence of the fierce exhortations and contagious +fury of the priest. Some of the young men, in fact, now commenced a +sort of covert attack, by throwing stones and fragments of wood at us +from the outskirts of the crowd, and Barton was struck violently in the +mouth by one of these missiles, by which his lip was badly cut. In the +midst of all the excitement and tumult, Rokoa stood, with the outward +appearance at least, of perfect composure. Neither the ravings of the +priest, nor the menacing attitude of `Catiline,' nor the brandished +weapons of their followers, deprived him of his coolness and presence of +mind. He steadily confronted them with an unblenching eye, grasping the +club of which he had possessed himself, in readiness to meet the attack, +which he at the same time did nothing, by look or gesture, to provoke. +His calm intrepidity, while it seemed temporarily to restrain our +enemies, served also to reassure and steady Barton and myself; and +endeavouring to emulate his self-possession, we stood ready to act as +circumstances should indicate, looking to him for the example." + +Here Arthur paused, as if about to suspend his narrative. Johnny, who +was now broad awake, and listening eagerly, waited patiently a few +moments, expecting him to recommence. Finding, however, that he did not +do so, he at length asked him to "go on." + +"It is getting quite late," answered Arthur; "see, those three bright +stars which were high in the heavens when we first sat down here, are +now on the very edge of the horizon, about to sink behind the ocean. As +we expect to be up, and on our way to Castle-hill before sunrise +to-morrow. I think we should now go to rest." + +"If we do," replied Johnny, "I am sure I shall not be able to sleep; I +shall be thinking of that terrible old priest, and trying to guess how +you escaped at last." + +"I judge," said Browne, "that you are pretty nearly at the end of your +adventures in Angatan, so pray let us have the remainder now." + +"Do so," added Morton, "and set Johnny's mind at rest, or he will be +dreaming of cannibals and cannibal-priests all night, and disturbing us +by crying out in his sleep." + +"I think it's quite likely," said Johnny, shaking his head in a +threatening manner; "I feel just now very much as if I should." + +"Since that is the case," said Arthur, "I suppose I must `go on,' in +self-defence; and as I believe that twenty minutes will suffice for what +remains, I will finish it." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +THE FLIGHT. + +TE VEA--THE VICTIM FOR SACRIFICE--THE ESCAPE AND PURSUIT--THE PRIEST'S +AMBUSH. + + "For life, for life, their flight they ply, + And shriek, and shout, and battle-cry, + And weapons waving to the sky, + Are maddening in their rear." + +"While the party hostile to us, thus stood hesitating, but to all +appearance rapidly approaching a point where all hesitation would cease, +Olla, with tears streaming down her cheeks, besought us to fly to her +husband's house, where, she seemed to imagine, we should necessarily be +safe from violence. But though no one yet laid hands on us, we were +surrounded on all sides, and could not with any certainty distinguish +friends from foes; and the first movement on our part to escape, would +probably be the signal for an instant and general attack by the priest +and his followers. We thought, therefore, that our best hope of safety +lay in maintaining a firm but quiet attitude, until Mowno, and those +disposed to protect us, could make their influence felt in our behalf. +They, however, confined their efforts to feeble expostulations and +entreaties; and perhaps it was unreasonable to expect them to engage in +a deadly conflict with their own neighbours, relatives, and personal +friends, in the defence of mere strangers like ourselves. They could +not even restrain the younger and more violent portion of the rabble +from carrying on the species of desultory warfare, from which Barton had +already suffered; on the contrary, the stones and other missiles, thrown +by persons on the outskirts of the crowd, fell continually thicker and +faster. At length Rokoa received a staggering blow on the back of the +head, from a clod of earth, thrown by some one who had stolen round +behind the rock for that purpose, and who immediately afterwards +disappeared in the throng. + +"`How much longer are we to endure this?' cried Barton. `Must we stand +here and suffer ourselves to be murdered by these cowardly attacks? Let +us shoot a couple of them, and make a rush for the shore.' + +"But a moment's reflection was enough to show the utter hopelessness of +such an attempt. However much the natives might be astounded for an +instant by the discharge of fire-arms, all fear and hesitation would +vanish upon our taking to flight. Our backs once turned would be the +mark for a score of ready spears; and except perhaps for Rokoa, whose +speed was extraordinary, there would be scarcely the possibility for +escape. Still it was evident that the audacity of our enemies was +steadily increasing, though their attacks were as yet covert and +indirect, and, as I knew that Rokoa would not hesitate to retaliate upon +the first open assailant, in which case we should be massacred upon the +spot, we might soon be compelled to adopt even so desperate a +suggestion, as the only alternative of instant death. + +"At this critical moment, I noticed a sudden movement of surprise or +alarm, on the outskirts of the crowd. A group, directly in front of us, +no longer giving us their exclusive attention, began to whisper among +themselves, glancing and pointing towards the rising ground in our rear, +while a half suppressed and shuddering exclamation of `Te Vea! Te Vea!' +was heard among the people. Turning round, and looking where all eyes +were now directed, I saw a tall native, with a peculiar head-dress of +feathers, and a small basket of cocoa-nut-leaflets in his hand, running +rapidly towards us. His appearance seemed to awaken in those around us, +emotions of terror or aversion, strong enough to swallow up every other +feeling, for, no sooner was he perceived, than all thought of +prosecuting further the present quarrel, appeared to be abandoned. The +priest, alone, evinced none of the general uneasiness or dread, but, on +the contrary, a gleam of exultation lighted up his hard and discoloured +countenance. The people made way to the right and left, as the +new-comer drew near, and a number of them slunk away into the forest or +to their homes. The stranger proceeded directly towards Mowno, and +taking a small parcel wrapped in leaves, from the basket which he +carried, delivered it to him: then, without pausing an instant, or +uttering a word, he passed on, taking his way at a rapid pace straight +through the village. Mowno received the parcel with a reluctant and +gloomy air, though it seemed to consist of nothing but a rough stone, +wrapped in the leaves of the sacred miro. For several minutes he stood +holding it in his hand, like one deprived of consciousness. Several of +those who appeared to be the principal persons present, among whom were +Catiline and the priest, now approached him, and they began to hold a +whispered consultation, in the course of which the priest frequently +pointed towards Rokoa, as though speaking of him. Mowno seemed to be +resisting some proposal urged by the others, and spoke in a more +decisive and resolute manner than I had thought him capable of assuming. +The discussion, whatever was its subject, soon became warm and angry: +the voices of Catiline and the priest were raised, and even threatening. +Every moment I expected to see Mowno relinquish his opposition; but he +remained firm, and at last, with the air of one resolved to put an end +to further debate, he said-- + +"`No! it shall not be either of the strangers; it shall be Terano: he is +an evil man, and it will be well when he is gone.' Then speaking to two +of those who stood near him, he said, `Go quickly to Terano's house, +before he sees the messenger and hides himself in the mountains,' +whereupon they seized their spears, and immediately set off in the +direction of the village. + +"Olla now renewed her entreaties for us to leave the spot, and go with +her to the house; and Mowno,--by a quick gesture, meant to be seen only +by us, indicated his wish to the same effect. Rokoa nodded to me to +comply, and we followed Olla as she bounded lightly through the grove, +no one offering to oppose our departure. But the priest's restless eye +was upon us, and had we set off in the direction of the shore, we should +not have been permitted to escape, without an attempt on his part to +prevent it. As it was, he appeared to give some direction to those +about him, and four or five young men followed us at a distance, keeping +us in sight, and taking care that they were always in such a position as +to enable them to intercept us in any attempt to recross the island. +After having dogged us to Mowno's house and seen us enter, they withdrew +into the forest out of sight, where they probably remained on the watch. +Rokoa now proceeded to select from Mowno's store of weapons, a club, of +more formidable weight and size, than that which he had wrested from the +priest, and requested Barton and myself to follow his example. + +"`We must try to get to the shore,' he said, `there are at present, none +to hinder us, but the young men who followed us hither.' + +"`But that demon of a priest, and the rest of his crew, are not +far-off,' said Barton, `and they will be sure to waylay us. For the +present we are safe here; and perhaps Mowno will be able to get us back +to our boat without danger.' + +"Rokoa shook his head. `There are others here,' he said, `more powerful +than Mowno, and who are our enemies: we must rely upon ourselves.' + +"Olla watched us anxiously during this conversation; and now, as if she +understood its subject at least, she said, with an expression of +intelligence and cordial friendliness in her fine eyes, `Listen to me: +the words of the priest are more powerful with the great chief than the +words of Mowno: to-night, the priest will go to the great chief, and +before he returns you must fly; but not now, for you are watched by the +young men; you must wait until night--until the moon is behind the +grove.' + +"This seemed to me a wiser course than to undertake, at present, to +fight our way to the boat; but Rokoa remained of his former opinion; he +apprehended an attack upon our party at the shore during our absence, by +which we might be cut off from all means of leaving the island. This +certainly was a weighty consideration, and one that had not occurred to +me. We were still hesitating, and uncertain what course to pursue, when +Mowno came in, looking much troubled, and carrying in his hand the +mysterious package, the object and meaning of which I forgot to explain. + +"A stone, folded in the leaves of the miro, sent by the king, or +paramount chief, to the subordinate chiefs of districts or villages, is +the customary method of notifying the latter that they are expected to +furnish a human victim for some approaching sacrifice. The principal +occasions upon which these are required, are at the building of national +maraes, at the commencement of a war, or in cases of the serious illness +of a superior chief. The number of victims sacrificed, is proportioned +to the magnitude of the occasion; as many as a score have sometimes been +offered to propitiate the gods during the severe sickness of a powerful +chief. The priests signify to the chief the number required; the latter +then sends out his runner or messenger, (te vea), who delivers to each +of the subordinate chiefs, one of these packages for each victim to be +furnished from his immediate district. The odious duty of designating +the individuals to be taken, then devolves upon the subordinate, and +having decided upon this, he sends a number of armed men to secure the +destined victims before they secrete themselves or flee into the woods, +as those who have any reason to fear being selected generally do, at the +first appearance of the dreaded messenger, or even as soon as it is +publicly known that an occasion is at hand for which human sacrifices +will be required. When secured, the doomed persons are most commonly +killed on the spot by the chief's men, and the bodies wrapped in +cocoa-nut leaves and carried to the temple. Sometimes, however, they +are preserved alive, and slain by the priests themselves at the altar. + +"Upon the arrival of the messenger, as already related, with a +requisition for one victim from the village, the majority of Mowno's +advisers had insisted upon selecting Rokoa for that purpose, and thus +avoiding the necessity of sacrificing one of their own people. The +priest had gone further still, and proposed to seize upon us all, and +send Barton and myself to the two neighbouring villages, to be furnished +by them as their quota of victims. To these councils, Mowno had opposed +a determined resistance, and he had finally sent his followers to +despatch an old man named Terano, whose death would be considered a +general benefit, as he was a notorious and inveterate thief and +drunkard, who, when not stupefied with ava, was constantly engaged in +desperate broils, or wanton depredations upon the property of his +neighbours. It seemed, however, that the old man had taken the alarm +and fled; several of Mowno's followers were now in pursuit of him, and +unless they should succeed in taking him before morning, another person +would have to be designated, as it was required to furnish the victims +at the great marae, by noon of the following day. + +"I sickened with disgust, as I listened to details like these. Never +before had I so fully realised the darkness and the horrors of +heathenism--all the more striking in the present instance, because of +the many pleasing and amiable natural qualities of the people who groped +amid much darkness, and were a prey to such horrors. + +"Mowno also recommended us to postpone any attempt at flight until a +late hour of the night. He said that he had seen a number of men +lurking in the woods near the stream, and that the priest and others had +remained in the grove after he had left, probably with the intention of +joining them in watching the house. + +"Olla now went out into the garden, where she walked about looking up +among the branches of the tree; and calling out, `Lai-evi!' as if in +search of her tame wood-pigeon. After going round the garden, she +passed out of the gate, and wandered away in the direction of the brook, +still looking among the trees, and repeating at intervals her call of +`Lai-evi!' + +"By-and-bye she returned, and though without her little favourite, she +had accomplished her real object, and ascertained the number and +position of the spies. She had seen seven of them skulking in the wood +along the brook, and watching the house. They seemed anxious to avoid +observation, and she could not, without awaking suspicion, get more than +transient glimpses of them, so that possibly there might be others whom +she had not seen. + +"Rokoa questioned her as to the space along the bank of the stream +occupied by these men, and the distance from one another at which they +were stationed. Then after a moment's reflection he turned to Mowno, +and asked whether he was confident of being able to protect us, while in +his house; to which the latter replied with much earnestness that he +both could and would do so. + +"`Wait here, then,' said Rokoa, addressing Barton and myself, `I will +return before the moon sets:' and without affording us an opportunity to +inquire what he designed to do, he passed through the door, and bounded +into the forest, in the direction opposite to that where the spies of +the priest were lurking. + +"`Is it possible,' said Barton, `that he intends to desert us?' + +"`You should know him better,' I answered, `unless I am mistaken, he is +about to risk his life in an attempt to communicate with our crew, in +order to put them on their guard against a surprise, and to render our +escape the more easy. If he lives, he will return, to incur a second +time with us, the very dangers to which this attempt exposes him.' + +"Knowing as I did Rokoa's great activity, coolness, and presence of +mind, I was sanguine that he would succeed in eluding the vigilance of +our enemies, and accomplishing his purpose. + +"Soon after his departure, Olla set out for our evening meal a light +repast of bananas, baked bread-fruit, and vi-apples, fresh from the +garden. But neither Barton nor I could eat anything: our thoughts were +with Rokoa upon his perilous adventure. When the food had been removed, +Mowno suggested that we should all go out into the inclosure, and walk a +few times around the house in order that those who were on the watch +might be satisfied that we were still there. This we accordingly did, +and continued strolling through the garden until it became quite dark. +Rokoa had now been gone nearly an hour, and Barton began to grow +restless and troubled. Mowno, stationing himself at the end of the walk +leading from the house, leaned upon the gate in a listening attitude. +As I sat in the wide doorway, beneath the vi-apple trees planted on +either side of the entrance, watching the bright constellation of the +Cross, just visible above the outline of the grove in the southern +horizon, Olla began to question me concerning what I had told the people +in the afternoon, of God, and a future life, and the doctrines of +Christianity. I was at once touched and astonished, to perceive the +deep interest she took in the subject, and the readiness with which she +received these truths, as something she had needed and longed for. She +seemed to feel how much better and more consoling they were, than the +superstitions in which she had been educated. + +"I was amazed to find that this young heathen woman, growing up in the +midst of pagan darkness, was nevertheless possessed of deep and strong +religious feelings, which could not be satisfied with the traditions of +her people. As I gazed at her ingenuous countenance, full of +earnestness and sensibility, while she endeavoured to express the vague +thoughts on these subjects which had at times floated through her mind, +I could scarcely believe that this was the same gay and careless being, +whose life had seemed to be as natural, as unconscious, and as joyous, +as that of a bird or a flower. She said, that often when alone in some +secluded spot in the depth of the wood, while all around was so hushed +and peaceful, she had suddenly burst into tears, feeling that what she +had been taught of the gods could not be true, and that if Oro was +indeed the creator of so beautiful a world--if he had made the smiling +groves, the bright flowers, and the multitude of happy living things, he +must be a good being, who could not delight in the cruelties practised +in his name. Often, when a mere girl, thoughts like these had visited +her, wandering by the sea-shore at twilight, or looking up through the +foliage of waving cocoa-nut-groves at the starry skies, when nature +herself, by her harmony and beauty, had seemed to proclaim that God was +a being of light and love, in whom was no darkness at all! + +"Presently Mowno joined us, and I talked with him in regard to the +intended burial of the aged woman, his aunt and endeavoured to make him +see the act in its true light. But with all his natural amiability, +such was the effect of custom and education, that he seemed perfectly +insensible on the subject. He observed, in a cool, matter-of-fact +manner, that when people got very old and could not work, they were of +no use to others or themselves--that it was then time for them to die, +and much best that they should do so at once; and that if they did not, +then their friends ought to bury them. As to Malola, his aunt, he said +that she was quite willing to be buried, and had in fact suggested it +herself; that she was often very sick, and in great pain, so that she +had no pleasure in living any longer; he added, as another grave and +weighty consideration, that she had lost most of her teeth, and could +not chew her food, unless it was prepared differently from that of the +rest of the family, which caused Olla much trouble. + +"Finding that argument and expostulation had not the slightest effect +upon him, I changed my tactics, and suddenly demanded whether he would +be willing to have Olla buried, when _she_ began to get old and infirm? +This seemed at first to startle him. He glanced uneasily at his little +wife, as if it had never before occurred to him that she _could_ grow +old. Then, after staring at me a moment in a half angry manner, as +though offended at my having suggested so disagreeable an idea, he +seemed all at once to recover himself, remarking quickly, that _he_ +should be old then, too, and that they could both be buried together. +This consolatory reflection seemed completely to neutralise the effect +of my last attack, and Mowno's countenance resumed its habitual +expression of calm and somewhat stolid placidity. + +"Baffled, but not discouraged, I next strove, by drawing an imaginary +picture of Olla and himself in their old age, surrounded by their grown +up children, to show how happy and beautiful the relation between the +child and the aged parent might be. I summoned up all my rhetorical +powers, and sketched what I conceived to be a perfect model of an +affectionate and dutiful Angatanese son. After clothing him with all +the virtues and accomplishments of the savage character, I proceeded to +endue him with that filial affection, whose beauty and power it was my +chief object to illustrate. I represented him as loving his father and +mother all the more tenderly on account of the infirmities of age now +stealing over them. Upon the arm of this affectionate son, the +white-haired Mowno supported himself; when at morning and evening he +went forth to take his accustomed walk in the groves. He it was, who +brought home daily to his aged mother, the ripest fruits, and the +freshest flowers. His smiling and happy countenance was the light of +their dwelling; his cheerful voice, its sweetest music. I was +proceeding thus in quite an affecting strain, as it seemed to me, +(though I must in honesty confess that Mowno appeared to be less moved +by it than myself; and somewhat cooled my enthusiasm by giving a great +yawn in the midst of one of the most touching passages), when Olla, who +had been listening with moistened eyes, gently stole her arm around her +husband's neck, and murmured a few words in his ear. Whether it was my +pathetic eloquence, or Olla's caress, that melted his hitherto obdurate +heart, I will not pretend to say, but it is certain that he now yielded +the point, and promised that Malola should be permitted to live. `At +least,' he added, after a moment's reflection, `as long as she can see, +and walk about.' + +"Several times, since it had grown dark, I had heard sounds like the +distant beating of drums, mingled occasionally with the long and +sorrowful note of the buccinum-shell, or native trumpet. Twice, also, +while Mowno was standing at his gate, messengers had arrived, apparently +in haste, and after briefly conferring with him, had posted off again. +When I remarked upon these sounds, Mowno said that they came from the +marae, where preparations for the approaching ceremony were going +forward; but to me, they seemed to proceed from several different +points, at various distances from us. + +"I now began to feel painfully anxious at Rokoa's protracted absence. +It was nearly midnight, and there had been ample time for one less +active than he, to go to the shore and return. The terrible +apprehension, that in spite of all the resources of his skill and +courage, he had fallen into the hands of some of the parties of natives +which seemed to be scattered about in the forest, gained every moment a +stronger hold upon my mind. + +"`He has either been taken, or else he finds that he cannot rejoin us, +without too great risk,' said Barton, breaking a long silence, and +speaking of that which each knew the other to be thinking about; `we +must start for the shore ourselves, if he does not come soon.' + +"`Hark!' whispered Olla, `some one is approaching from the wood.' Her +quick ear had detected stealthy steps crossing the avenue. The next +moment some one bounded lightly over the hedge at the side of the house, +where the shadow of the bread-fruit trees fell darkest. Mowno started, +and seemed agitated, and for an instant a suspicion that he had betrayed +us, and was about to give us up, flashed through my mind. But the +figure which came forward into the light, was that of Rokoa, and I felt +pained at the wrong which my momentary doubts had done our inert, but +well-meaning, host. Rokoa breathed quick and short. Without speaking, +he pointed to the moon, now on the edge of the western horizon of +forest, to intimate that he was punctual to the time set for his return. + +"The sounds which I had before heard, were now borne more plainly than +ever to our ears upon the night breeze. As soon as Rokoa recovered his +breath, he said that we had not a moment to lose, but must commence our +flight at once. He had passed an armed party of more than twenty men, +coming in the direction of the house, with the purpose, as he supposed, +of demanding that we should be given up to them. Mowno seemed more +displeased than alarmed at this intelligence, and earnestly repeated +that no harm should befall us while beneath his roof, if he had to lay +down his life in our defence. But Rokoa urged our immediate departure, +before the arrival of the party which he had seen. Mowno then offered +to accompany, and guide us to our boat, which Rokoa firmly declined, on +the ground that his presence might endanger him, and, in the excited and +determined mood of our enemies, could be no protection to us. + +"We accordingly took a hurried leave of him, and Olla. `Good-bye, +Artua,' said the latter, `Olla will not forget what you have told her of +our great Father in the sky; she will ask him for a new heart that she +too, may go when she dies, to the Christian heaven,' and she pointed +upward, while a happy smile lighted up her intelligent, and, for the +moment, serious countenance. + +"We sprang over the hedge, and, Rokoa leading the way, proceeded swiftly +but silently down the avenue. We passed some distance beyond the point +where we had struck into it in the morning, to avoid the neighbourhood +of the village, then turning towards the shore, descended into the +valley until we reached the stream. At this point, it was deep and +narrow, with a rapid current, but we had no time to look for a ford. +Cries and shouts on the hill above us, showed that we were pursued, and +a confused clamour from the village indicated the existence of some +unusual commotion there. Tum-tums were beating fiercely, and the long +dismal wail of the tuba-conch resounded through the echoing arches of +the forest. We swam the stream as silently as possible, Barton holding +his pistols above his head in one hand to keep the charges dry. As we +climbed the further bank, and plunged into the wood of miros, we could +hear the splashing of the water caused by persons fording the brook a +short distance below us, and opposite the village. In the same +direction a multitude of candle-nut torches gleamed through the foliage, +and revealed dusky forms hurrying hither and thither. We pushed on +through the wood at the top of our speed, until suddenly the outlines of +the marae, illuminated by the glare of a large bonfire, loomed up before +us. A score of half-naked men, were dancing around the fire in front of +the inclosure, with the wildest and most extravagant contortions of +body. Seen by the fitful and wavering light, their painted countenances +scarcely looked like those of human beings, and the grim, immovable +idols, upon their pedestals, seemed vaster and more hideous than ever. + +"As we turned, and plunged into the grove again, resuming our flight in +a somewhat altered direction, an eager shout announced that we had been +seen. But this cry proceeded, not from the group in front of the marae, +who were wholly absorbed in their savage orgies, but from a straggling +party of pursuers from the village, to whom the light of the bonfire had +betrayed us. The chase was now no longer random or uncertain; they came +on like hounds in full view of the game, uttering yells that caused the +blood to curdle in my veins. My strength began to fail, and I felt a +horrible spell creeping over me, like that which often in dreams, +deprives us of the power to fly some appalling danger. Rokoa restrained +his superior speed, and kept beside Barton and myself. `Courage, +Artua!' he said, `we are near the shore,' and he offered me his hand to +assist me, but I would not take it. Notwithstanding our utmost +exertions our pursuers gained upon us. I was very nearly exhausted when +we reached the ravine which divided the miro-grove from the bread-fruit +plantation, and, as we struggled up its steep side, Barton panted and +gasped so painfully for breath, that I dreaded each moment to see him +fall to the ground incapable of proceeding further. But we knew that +our lives were at stake, and forced ourselves to exertions which nature +could not long support; still, the cries of our pursuers, the sound of +their footsteps, and the crashing of branches in their path, drew +continually nearer. + +"At last we had nearly traversed the breadth of the plantation, and the +welcome sound of the waves, breaking upon the beach, greeted our ears. +Safety now seemed within our reach, and we summoned all our remaining +energies for a final effort. The trees, growing more thinly as we +approached the skirt of the wood, let in the light, and between their +trunks I caught a glimpse of the sea. Right before us was a thicket, +tangled with fern, and scarcely twenty yards beyond it lay the beach +shining in the star-light. As we turned a little aside to avoid the +thicket, an appalling yell rang out from it, and half a dozen dark +figures started from their ambush, and sprang into the path before us. +The old priest was at their head: my heart sank, and I gave up all as +host. Rokoa, swinging up his ponderous club, bounded into their midst. +`Onward!' cried he, `it is our only hope of escape.' His movements were +light as those of a bird, and rapid as lightning. His first blow +stretched the priest at his feet. The savages gave way before him, +scattering to the right and left, as if a thunderbolt had fallen among +them. Barton discharged both his pistols at once, and with fatal +effect, as was witnessed by the groans that followed. Before they could +rally or recover themselves, we had burst through their midst. As we +reached the shore, I looked round and missed Barton--he was no longer +beside me. An exulting cry behind us at once explained his absence: at +the same time we could hear him call out in a voice broken by +exhaustion, `Save yourselves, you can do nothing for me!' Without an +instant's hesitation, Rokoa turned, and we rushed back into the midst of +our shouting enemies. Three or four of the party which had been in +pursuit of us, were just coming up. The audacity and desperation of our +attack seemed to confound them, and two of their number fell, almost +without a struggle, beneath Rokoa's rapid and resistless blows. Two +more of them, who were dragging Barton away, were compelled to leave him +at liberty in order to defend themselves. At that moment a sudden shout +from the water raised by our crew, who had either heard our voices, or +seen us when we came out upon the shore, increased their panic by +causing them to suppose that we were leading back our whole party to the +fight. They hastily gave way before us, and we had all turned once +more, and gained the beach before they recovered from their surprise, +and perceived their mistake. + +"Our boat was just outside the surf; where the crew were keeping her +steady with their paddles. We hailed them, and plunged in the water to +swim out to them. The natives, stung with shame and rage at having +their prisoner torn from them in the very moment of triumph, with such +reckless boldness, swarmed down to the beach and pursued us into the +water. They seemed excited almost to frenzy at the prospect of our +escape. Some standing upon the shore assailed the canoe with showers of +stones, by which several of our men were wounded. Others swam out after +us, as if about to endeavour to board the vessel, and did not turn back +until we had hoisted our sail, and began to draw steadily from the land. + +"And thus ends the story of the Cannibal Island of Angatan." + +"Is that all?" inquired Johnny, looking somewhat disappointed. + +"Yes, that is all," answered Arthur, "it comes as near to being a +cannibal story, as any thing I know. I did not see any one actually +roasted and eaten, but if the savages had caught us, I suspect there +would have been more to tell, and probably no one here to tell it." + +"But," persisted Johnny, "the story don't end there. You haven't told +us about the rest of the voyage, and whether Rokoa found his brother at +last." + +"O, that don't properly belong to _this_ story. According to all +artistical rules I ought to end precisely where I have, in order to +preserve the unities. But some other time, if you wish, I will tell you +all about it." + +"Pray don't talk of artistical rules," exclaimed Max, "after showing +yourself such an egregious bungler! You had there all the elements of a +capital story, and you have just spoiled them." + +"`How prove you that, in the great heap of your knowledge,'" cried +Browne, "`come now, unmuzzle your wisdom,' and specify the blunders of +which he has been guilty. I say, with Touchstone, `instance briefly, +shepherd; come, instance.'" + +"Why, in the first place, there was a miserly spirit of economy in +regard to his men. He should have invested the narrative with a tragic +interest, by killing Rokoa and Barton, at least;--being the narrator he +couldn't kill himself conveniently;--but he might, with good effect have +been `dangerously wounded.'" + +"But suppose," said Arthur, "that I wanted Rokoa to figure in a future +story, and so couldn't afford to kill him just yet?" + +"A miserable apology! it evinces a lamentable poverty of imagination to +make one character serve for two distinct tales." + +"Well, a further instance, `gentle shepherd,'" cried Browne, "`a more +sounder instance.'" + +"Then, again," resumed Max, with an oracular air, "it was a capital +error to make Olla a married woman; what business I should like to know, +can a married woman have in a story?--She belongs properly to the dull +prosaic region of common life--not to the fairy land of romance. Now +the charm of sentiment is as necessary to a perfect tale, as the +interest of adventure, or the excitement of conflict, and had Olla been +single, there would have been the elements of something beautifully +sentimental." + +"Enough!" cried Browne, "if you have not `lamed me with reasons,' you +have at least overwhelmed me with words--there now! I believe I am +unconsciously catching the trick of your long-winded sing-song +sentences--it must be contagious." + +"Well," said Arthur, "I give over the `materials' to Max, with full +permission to work them up into a romance after his own fashion, +introducing as much slaughter and sentiment as he shall judge requisite +for the best effect, and when completed, it shall be inserted by way of +episode in our narrative." + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Note. Upon consulting the charts we find an island called "Ahangatan", +(of which Angatan is perhaps a contraction), laid down on some of them, +about one hundred and fifty miles north of Hao. On others the same +island is called Ahangatoff. The US Exploring Expedition visited Hae, +and most of the neighbouring islands, but we have not been able to +discover any mention of Angatan in the published records of the +expedition. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +HOUSE-BUILDING. + +DAWN ON THE LAGOON--THE "SEA-ATTORNEY"--THE "SHARK-EXTERMINATOR"--MAX +"CARRIES THE WAR INTO AFRICA." + + "Another hour must pass ere day grows bright, + And ere the little birds begin discourse + In quick low voices, ere the streaming light + Pours on their nests, just sprung from day's fresh source." + +After the late hours we had kept on the last evening, most of us would +willingly have prolonged our slumbers beyond the time previously fixed +for setting out upon our return to Castle-hill. But before it was +fairly light, Arthur was up, with an unseasonable and provoking +alacrity, calling loudly upon us to bestir ourselves. + +In vain Browne apostrophised him in moving strains as "the rude +disturber of his pillow," remonstrated against such unmerciful +punctuality, and petitioned for another nap; in vain Max protested that +we were not New York shop-boys, obliged to rise at daylight to make +fires, and open and sweep out stores, but free and independent desert +islanders, who had escaped from the bondage of civilised life, and the +shackles of slavish routine, and who need not get up until noon, unless +of our own good pleasure. Arthur was inexorable, and finding that +further sleep was out of the question, we yielded at last to his +despotic pertinacity, and groped our way into the boat, yawning +desperately, and not more than half awake. + +The sea-fowl had not yet begun to stir in their nests, when we pushed +out into the lagoon, and commenced pulling homeward--as we had now +almost come to regard it--holding a course midway between the reef and +the shore. A few moments' exercise at the oars sufficed to dispel our +drowsiness, and to reconcile us somewhat to the early start, which we +had so reluctantly taken. + +The faint grey light revealed the sleeping landscape, invested with the +delicious freshness and repose of the earliest dawn in summer. The +shores of the island, with their dense masses of verdure, were so +perfectly mirrored in the lagoon, that the peculiar characteristics of +the different kinds of foliage could be distinguished in their +reflections. The drooping plumes of the palms, the lance-shaped +pandanus leaves, and the delicate, filmy foliage of the casuarina, were +all accurately imaged there; the inverted shore below, with its fringe +of trees and shrubbery, looking scarcely less substantial and real, than +its counterpart above. But as the light increased, these reflections +lost their softness, and the clearness of their outlines. The gradually +brightening dawn, cast new and rapidly changing lights and shades upon +the waters and the shores; and the latter, which, as we moved onward, we +beheld every moment from a new point of view, charmed the eye with a +perpetual variety. In some places they were abrupt and bold; in others +smoothly rounded, or gently sloping. Now we were opposite a jutting +promontory, which, crowned with verdure, and overgrown with pendulous +and creeping plants, pushed out over the narrow alluvial belt of shore, +to the water's edge; now shooting past it, we caught a sudden and +transient glimpse of some cool valley, opening down to the lagoon, and +stretching away inland through vistas of fine trees. + +Johnny expressed a fervent wish that he was a painter, in order that we +might sail round the island, take sketches of the scenery, and then +paint a panorama, embracing all the best views, by exhibiting which at +twenty-five cents a head, we should all make our fortunes upon getting +home. He appeared to have some doubts, however, whether that particular +time of day could be painted, even by the most accomplished artist. The +lagoon channel wound through fields of branching coral trees of +luxuriant growth, among which, numbers of large fish were moving +sluggishly about, as if they had got up too early, and were more than +half inclined to indulge in another nap. As we passed over a sort of +bar, where there was not more than a fathom and a half of water, we +espied an immense green turtle at the bottom, quietly pursuing his way +across our track, and though by no means a beautiful creature, looking +infinitely happier and more lively than the dull-eyed wretches of his +race, which I have seen lying on their backs, at the doors of the New +York restaurants, ready to be converted into soup and steaks. Johnny +mourned over the impracticability of making any attempt at his capture, +and heaved a sigh which seemed to come from the bottom of his heart, as +the unsightly reptile disappeared among the mazes of the submarine +shrubbery. The hardship of the case, seemed to be greatly aggravated in +his eyes, as he contrasted it with the better fortune of Robinson Crusoe +and the Swiss Family, the former of whom, as he reminded us, caught "any +quantity of turtles" on the beach of his island, with no other trouble +than that of turning them over upon their backs; while the latter, +having surprised an enormous fellow taking an afternoon nap on the +surface of the water, treacherously harpooned him in his sleep, and +then, steering him as easily as one would drive a well-broken nag, +compelled him to tow themselves and their pinnace ashore. + +A somewhat startling incident put an end to these interesting +reminiscences. Johnny was leaning over the gunwale, and with his face +almost touching the surface, and his hands playing in the water, was +peering down into the lagoon, probably on the look-out for another +turtle, when a large shark, coming as it seemed from beneath the boat, +rose suddenly but quietly, and made a snatch at him. Johnny saw the +monster barely in time; for just as he sprang up with a cry of affright, +and fell backwards into the boat the shark's shovel-nose shot four feet +above water at our stern, his jaws snapping together as he disappeared +again, with a sound like the springing of a powerful steel-trap. Though +baffled in his first attack, the voracious fish continued to follow us, +watching closely an opportunity for a more successful attempt. He was a +large brown shark, of the species known to sailors as the +"sea-attorney," which designation, together with his formidable +reputation for keenness, vigilance, and enterprise, shows the estimation +in which the members of the ancient and honourable profession of the +law, are held by the honest sons of Neptune. Max professed to recognise +him, as our acquaintance of the previous evening, by whom himself and +Browne had been for a time kept in a state of blockade: our present +visitor certainly evinced the same uncommon fierceness and audacity +which had astonished us in the individual referred to. He was a trim, +round-bodied, compact fellow with a wonderful display of vigour, and +even of grace, in his movements; but though not without a certain kind +of beauty, I do not wish to be understood as saying that his personal +appearance was upon the whole, prepossessing. On the contrary, his +expression, if I may venture to use the term, (and he certainly had a +good deal of expression), was, if not decidedly bad, at the least +exceedingly sinister. His flattened head, and long leather-like snout +together with a pair of projecting goggle eyes, so situated as to +command a view both in front and rear, and which he kept turning +restlessly on every side, contributed greatly to enhance this forbidding +aspect. Every moment he seemed to grow fiercer and bolder, and at +length he actually laid hold of our keel next the rudder and fairly +shook the boat from stem to stern. To our great relief, he soon +desisted from this, for such was his bulk and strength, that we hardly +knew what he might not effect in his furious efforts. His next move, +was to make a sudden dash at Max's oar, which had probably given him +offence by coming too near his nose, and which he jerked from his hands. + +Max seemed to regard this last exploit as a personal affront, and loudly +declared that, "this was going altogether too far, and that he should +not stand it any longer." He accordingly proceeded with great energy, +to lash his cutlass to the handle of one of the remaining oars, with +some twine which he found in the locker, threatening all sorts of +terrible things against the unsuspecting object of his wrath. Meanwhile +Morton succeeded in fishing up the lost oar, which the vigilance and +activity of our attentive escort rendered a somewhat dangerous +undertaking; when recovered, the marks of six rows of formidable teeth +were found deeply indented upon its blade. + +Max having completed his novel weapon, Browne, who had been engaged in +an unprofitable attempt to strike the shark across the eyes with his +cutlass, inquired, "what he was going to do with that clumsy +contrivance!" + +"That clumsy contrivance, as you rashly term it," replied Max, with +dignity, "is designed as a shark-exterminator, with which I intend +forthwith to pay my respects to this audacious sea-bully. We have stood +on the defensive quite long enough, and I am now about to carry the war +into Africa." + +He accordingly jumped upon the middle seat of the yawl, where, in spite +of all attempts at dissuasion, he stood watching a favourable +opportunity for a thrust. This was soon presented. All unconscious of +the unfriendly designs cherished against him, the shark came propelling +himself carelessly alongside, and directly under Max's nose, with his +back fin quite above water. The temptation was not to be resisted. Max +braced himself as firmly as possible in his position: Arthur +expostulated, and begged him at least to get down and stand in the boat: +Morton exhorted him to caution. But he only answered by a wave of the +hand and a grim smile; then requesting Browne to lay fast hold of his +waist-band, to assist him in preserving the centre of gravity, he raised +his weapon in both hands, and giving it a preliminary flourish, brought +it down with his full force, aiming at the broadest part of the fish's +back, just forward of the dorsal fin. But the weapon was too dull, or +the blow too feeble, to pierce the tough hide of the "sea-attorney," for +it glanced smoothly off and Max losing his balance, went headlong into +the sea. Browne, in a hasty effort to save him came near going over +also, while the boat careened until the water poured in over the +gunwale, and for a moment there was imminent danger of capsizing. Max +came to the surface, almost paralysed with fright, and clutched +convulsively at the side of the boat; when we drew him on board +unharmed, but pale and shivering, as he well might be, after so +extraordinary an escape. The shark had disappeared, and was now nowhere +to be seen. Not being accustomed to Max's system of "carrying the war +into Africa," so sudden and headlong an attack in his own element had +probably somewhat disconcerted him. Max made a great effort to assume +an air of composure. "Well!" said he, looking coolly around, "the enemy +has, I perceive, beaten a retreat. I dare say he was quite as much +frightened as I was, and that is saying a good deal." + +"But what has become of that patent shark-exterminator!" observed +Browne, "I don't see it anywhere: has the enemy carried it off as a +trophy of victory, as conquering knights take possession of the arms of +their vanquished adversaries!" + +"It is much more likely," replied Max with disdain, "that he has carried +it off stuck fast in his carcass." + +But neither supposition proved to be correct, for we presently picked up +the "exterminator," floating near us. Johnny narrowly examined the +blade, and was much disappointed at not finding "any blood on it." + +Max now took an oar to steady his nerves by rowing, for, notwithstanding +his assumed composure and forced pleasantry, they had evidently been a +good deal shaken by his recent narrow escape. + +By the time we came in sight of Sea-bird's Point, the increasing light, +and the rosy glow in the "dappled east," heralded the rising of the sun, +and announced that the heat and glare of the tropical day, were on the +point of succeeding the mild freshness of "incense-breathing morn." Nor +were other tokens wanting, that the reign of night was over. A strange +confusion of indistinct and broken sounds, issuing from myriads of nests +and perches all along the beach, showed that the various tribes of +sea-fowl were beginning to bestir themselves. A few slumbrous, +half-smothered sounds from scattered nests preluded the general concert, +and then the notes were taken up, and repeated by the entire feathered +population for miles along the shore, until the clamour seemed like that +of ten thousand awakening barn-yards. And now the scene began to be +enlivened by immense multitudes of birds, rising in the air, and +hovering in clouds over the lagoon. Some wheeled around us in their +spiral flight; others skimmed the water like swallows, dipping with +marvellous promptness after any ill-starred fish that ventured near the +surface; others again, rose high into the air, from whence, by their +incredible keenness of sight, they seemed readily to discern their prey, +when, poising themselves an instant on expanded wings, they would pounce +perpendicularly downward, and disappearing entirely in the water for an +instant, emerge, clutching securely a struggling victim. But in +carrying on this warfare upon the finny inhabitants of the lagoon the +feathered spoilers were not perfectly united and harmonious; and fierce +domestic contentions occasionally interrupted and diversified their +proceedings. A number of unprincipled man-of-war hawks, who preferred +gaining their livelihood by robbing their neighbours and associates, to +relying upon their own honest industry, would sail lazily around on +wide-spread pinions, watching with the air of unconcerned spectators the +methodical toil of the plodding gannets. But the instant that one of +the latter rose from a successful plunge, with a plump captive writhing +in his grasp, all appearance of indifference would vanish, and some +dark-plumaged pirate of the lagoon, pouncing down like lightning upon +his unwarlike neighbour, would ruthlessly despoil him of his hard-earned +prize. One of these piratical gentry suffered before our eyes a fate +worthy of his rapacity. A gannet had seized upon a fish much larger +than his strength enabled him to manage, and was struggling in vain to +lift it into the air, when a hawk darted upon them, and striking his +talons into the fish, put the gannet to flight. But the greedy victor +had greatly miscalculated the strength of his intended prey. A +desperate conflict, sometimes under water, and sometimes just at the +surface, ensued. The hawk struggled gallantly, but in vain, and was at +length drawn under by his ponderous antagonist, to rise no more. + +We landed a short distance beyond Johnny's row of "Oyster-trees," and by +the time we had climbed the hill, the sun had risen, though not yet +visible above the wooded heights which sheltered us to the eastward. + +We were so intent upon our house-building project that, contenting +ourselves with a self-denying breakfast of cocoa-nuts, we at once set +zealously to work in carrying it out. + +Arthur directed, superintended, and laid out the work in detail. +Morton, having fitted a handle to the hatchet-head, and laboriously +sharpened it upon a rough stone, undertook to supply materials as fast +as called for. While he cut down trees of the kind and size required by +Arthur, Max trimmed off the branches with his cutlass, and prepared them +for use. Johnny and Eiulo dragged them to the site of the building, +where Browne and I assisted Arthur in setting the posts into the ground, +and putting together the frame of the house. Of course, our destitution +of proper tools and implements rendered all this exceedingly laborious, +and, but for Arthur's perseverance and ingenuity, we should more than +once have given up in despair. Instead of spades, we were obliged to +use sharp bivalve shells from the shore, in digging places for the +upright posts of the building, and as it was necessary that these should +be set quite deep, in order to give it firmness and stability, the toil +was severe. Max, who came up occasionally to see how the work was +progressing, and to offer suggestions and criticisms, (more especially +the latter), on finding us upon our knees, patiently grubbing up the +earth with our shells, flatteringly compared us to so many hedge-hogs +excavating their burrows. + +Nevertheless, we persevered; and before night we had nearly completed +the frame of our building, with the exception of the ridge-pole, the +rafters, and cross-pieces. + +The posts at the sides stood six feet out of the ground, and were +stationed about three feet apart. The centre-posts, to support the +ridge-pole, were nine feet high, and made from the trunks of well-grown +trees, some six inches in diameter. This certainly was a good day's +work under the circumstances; at any rate, we were quite unanimous in +considering it so; and towards twilight we went down to the beach for +our evening bath, in an exceedingly complacent and self-satisfied state +of mind, Max enlarging upon the pleasures of industry, and professing to +be in the present enjoyment of those feelings-- + + "Which follow arduous duty well performed." + +Instead of repairing to our usual bathing-place, we proceeded along the +beach to the north-west, until we reached the clump of trees at the edge +of the water, already mentioned as being visible from Castle-hill. As +we approached the spot, we found that what had appeared at a distance to +be but a single group of trees, was, in fact, a small grove extending +along the shore, and fringing a little cove of nearly elliptical form, +which at this point set into the land. The narrow, shelving beach, +rivalled the whiteness of a fresh snow-drift. The trees were mostly +cocoa-palms; indeed, scarcely any others could flourish in such a spot; +and there were no shrubs or undergrowth of any kind. The cove was +perhaps a hundred paces long, and half as wide in the widest part; +contracting to less than fifty feet where it communicated with the +lagoon. The water was clear, the bottom smooth and regularly formed, +and the greatest depth was only eight or ten feet. Max, after viewing +the cove with the eye of a connoisseur, pronounced it a noble spot for +bathing purposes, and fully equal to the basin on the reef in every +respect, except in depth and facilities for diving. + +The impression of his morning's adventure, however, was still fresh, and +he hinted at the possibility that some shark of elegant tastes, and +possessing an eye for the beautiful, might be in the habit of +frequenting the cove. Arthur volunteered to keep watch at the narrow +entrance, while the rest of us were bathing, in order to give timely +notice of the approach of the dreaded enemy; but on walking out to the +edge of the lagoon we found that this precaution would be unnecessary. +A bar, consisting of a coral patch, very near the surface, stretched +across the mouth of the cove, rendering it almost impossible for a shark +to enter. + +Johnny named the spot, "The Mermaid's Cove," but this possessive +designation was merely complimentary, for so far were we from renouncing +the cove in favour of the mermaids, that from the day on which we +discovered it, it became one of our favourite and regular resorts. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +THE CABIN BY THE LAKE. + +A DEMOCRAT IN THE WOODS--ECHO-VALE AND LAKE LAICOMO--THE "WILD +FRENCHMAN" DISCOVERED AT LAST. + + "A few firm stakes they planted in the ground, + Circling a narrow space, but large enow, + These strongly interknit they closed around + With basket-work of many a pliant bough. + The roof was like the sides; the door was low, + And rude the hut, and trimmed with little care, + For little heart had they to dress it now: + Yet was the humble structure fresh and fair. + And soon the inmates found that peace might sojourn there." + +It took us an entire week to complete the frame of our building, and +this alone involved an amount and variety of labour which few of us had +anticipated when we commenced it. One day was consumed in selecting, +felling, and trimming a tree, tall and straight enough to serve as a +ridge-pole. We next had to get out some thirty rafters of hibiscus to +support the roof. Then, as we had no nails, (Max's ship with the +hardware not having yet arrived), we were obliged to adopt the means +used by the Polynesian builders for fastening the rafters to the +ridge-pole and cross-pieces, which consists of tying them firmly in +their places with sennit. To supply the place of sennit, we +manufactured a quantity of cord from twisted hibiscus bark, which +answered the purpose very well. + +At length the skeleton of the house was completed. Twenty-seven strong +posts, (including the three tall centre ones), deeply planted in the +ground, supported the string pieces and the ridge-pole. Fifteen slender +rafters, regularly placed at small intervals, descended from the +ridge-pole to the eaves on either side, and the whole was firmly bound +together with tough and durable withes of our own manufacture. + +The thatching occupied another week, and but for Eiulo's skill and +dexterity, we should never have accomplished this nice and difficult +operation, except after a very bungling and imperfect fashion. Arthur +understood very well how it should be done, but his knowledge was +theoretical rather than practical, while Eiulo had acquired considerable +skill in the art, by building and thatching miniature houses in the +woods, an amusement which he and his young playmates had often practised +at home. The only thing now remaining to be done, was to make a number +of coarse mats, with which to enclose the sides of the house--as far as +in such a climate it is desirable to enclose them--together with an +additional supply, ready to be put up in bad weather, on fastenings +constructed for the purpose. But for this, there seemed to be no +immediate necessity. The sides of the building were low, and the eaves +extended two feet beyond them, and as we had an excellent roof above us, +we considered ourselves tolerably prepared, even for rainy weather. +However, we commenced manufacturing mats, in which, with the instruction +and example of Arthur and Eiulo, we were tolerably successful; but we +proceeded with this very much at our leisure. One or two brief showers, +like that which had exerted so sudden an influence in hastening the +commencement of our building scheme, afforded us the most satisfactory +evidence of the good qualities of our roof, which did not admit a drop +of rain. But at the same time we became aware of another defect in our +house, as a dwelling in wet weather. We had no floor but the bare +earth, and though Arthur had so levelled it, and protected it by a +little trench and embankment, that no water from the adjacent grounds +could reach us, except by the gradual process of saturation, still it +was very damp after a severe rain. To remedy this, Arthur talked from +time to time of making a floor of cement, which would dry to the +hardness of stone, and through which the moisture from the ground could +not penetrate. When asked where lime was to be obtained with which to +make his cement he assumed an air of mystery, and merely said that there +would be no difficulty on that score. One day, after we had got a large +supply of mats completed, and ready for use, he again recurred to the +subject of improving our floor, and explained that he intended to +prepare his mortar or cement, from sand and lime, the latter of which +was to be procured by burning coral rock in a pit. He prevailed upon +Morton, Browne, and myself to set about digging a "lime-pit" in the +gully beside Castle-hill, while he took Eiulo and Johnny with him in the +boat, to go in search of a quantity of the sponge-shaped coral, which, +he said, was the best adapted to his purpose. + +Max pronounced the whole project a humbug, and refusing to have anything +to do with it, equipped himself with club and cutlass, and started off +on a solitary excursion towards the south-easterly part of the island, +which we had not yet explored. He returned in the afternoon with a +glowing account of the discoveries he had made, among which were a +beautiful pond of fresh water, a stream flowing into it, and a +waterfall. + +In two days we completed a lime-pit of proper dimensions. Arthur and +his assistants had in the same time collected and brought to the spot a +sufficient quantity of coral rock; we then covered the bottom of the pit +with fuel, and laid the coral, previously broken into small pieces, upon +it. The pile was next kindled, and when the fuel was consumed, we found +that the coral had yielded a supply of excellent lime, fine and +beautifully white. Without going into further details, it is enough to +say that the rest of Arthur's plan was carried out with the same +success. The cement was made, and a thick layer of it spread over the +floor of the house, as evenly and smoothly as could well be done, with +no better trowels than gigantic oyster-shells. In three days it was +hard as marble, and our house was now as complete as we could make it. +It had cost us a great deal of severe toil; we had found the +construction of it no such holiday employment as we had imagined; but it +was the fruit of our own ingenuity and perseverance, the work of our own +hands, and we regarded it with much complacency. Johnny impartially +compared it with the dwellings of I don't know how many other desert +islanders, and found it superior in some point to each and all of them. + +Being now in a state of complete preparation, as we flattered ourselves, +for all sorts of weather, we began to feel as though a regular +out-and-out storm, would be rather a luxury than otherwise. These +bright skies and sunny days were very well in their way, but it wasn't +in anticipation of them, that we had been planning and working for a +month or more. There was no use at all for our model house in such fine +weather; indeed, while it continued, our old lodgings under the green +forest leaves and the star-light, were far preferable. It took full +half a dozen of our sleeping-mats, (and we had but three apiece), laid +upon the stony floor of our dwelling, to make a couch half as soft as +those heaps of leaves, which we used to pile up beneath the trees for +our beds, and which we could not now introduce into the house for fear +of "making a litter." The prudent citizen--who, having at the +threatened approach of winter laid in a bountiful provision of wood and +coal, put up his hall-stoves and his double windows, now feels quite +ready, in the strength of anthracite and hickory, to snap his fingers in +the face of Jack Frost, and bid him do his worst--is not more impatient +to have the thermometer fall to the neighbourhood of zero, in order that +he may realise the comforts he has paid for, than were we for the advent +of such a storm, as would enable us to say to one another, "Ah! is it +not fortunate that we have a roof over our heads? What should we do +_now_, if we had not made timely preparation?" + +Well, at last we had our wish. A shower came up one day, in the +afternoon, which did not cease in half an hour, as the previous ones had +done. On the contrary, when darkness came on the rain still continued +falling steadily, with no sign of abatement. Johnny was in ecstasies. +This was evidently no night for camping out; it was a night to justify +all our expenditure of labour, in planning and perfecting our dwelling. +We hung up every extra mat, and fastened them securely with the store of +wooden pegs and pins prepared for that purpose. To be sure, we were in +complete darkness, but then we were perfectly snug and comfortable; and +what a luxury, to lie sheltered from the storm, and listen to the +pattering of the rain upon the root and the dismal sound of the water +dripping from the eaves! + +The second morning after this rain-storm, which had so pleasantly tested +the qualities of our dwelling, we started, under Max's guidance, to make +an excursion to that part of the island, to the south-east of +Castle-hill, of which he had given so glowing an account. After half an +hour's toilsome march over uneven ground, we entered a grove, which, to +Johnny's great exultation, was composed almost entirely of bread-fruit +trees. They grew with much regularity, at almost equal distances, so as +to form broad straight avenues, overarched by a canopy of spreading +branches and dark glossy leaves. Vistas of shapely diamond-chequered +trunks stretched away in every direction, in long and shady perspective. +Among the dense masses of foliage, hung a profusion of large globes, of +a light-delicate green, or a golden yellow, the splendid fruit of this +noblest and most stately tree of the tropics. The ripe and the unripe +fruit hung side by side from the same branches, and Johnny could hardly +be persuaded to postpone gathering a supply of it until our return. Our +course had been upon the whole rather an ascending one, so that this +grove must have occupied an elevated situation. The ground over which +it extended was nearly level, with slight wave-like undulations. As we +approached its eastern limit, Max told us to prepare ourselves for the +most charming spectacle that we had ever beheld. He walked on before +with the air of a cicerone when about to exhibit a _chef d'oeuvre_, and +stood waiting and beckoning for us at the border of the grove. On +joining him we found that he had scarcely exaggerated in his +descriptions of the spot. + +We stood at the top of a smooth and gradual descent. Before us lay a +secluded valley, from which the land rose on every side, to about the +elevation of the grove behind us. In some places it ascended in gentle +slopes, in others by abrupt acclivities. In the bosom of the valley +spread a little lake of oval form, fringed in some places with +shrubbery, while in others, groups of casuarinas extended their long +drooping boughs in graceful arches over the water. After pausing a +moment we descended to the margin of the pond, which was so limpid that +we could distinguish every pebble at the bottom. At the upper or +northern end, and near the point at which we had come out of the grove, +a small stream precipitated itself some fifteen feet down a rocky +declivity, and fell into a circular basin a few yards in diameter. +Overflowing this basin, it found its way into the lake by another +descent of a few feet. Around the basin, and on both sides of the +waterfall, were several curious columns of basalt, and irregular +picturesque piles of basaltic rock. The plash of the water, falling +into the rocky basin, was the only sound that broke the Sabbath-like +silence that pervaded the valley. There was, or seemed to be, something +unreal and dream-like about the scene, that made us pause where we +stood, in silence, as though the whole were an illusion, which a word or +a motion would dispel. + +"How beautiful!" exclaimed Browne, at last, and a soft clear echo, like +the voice of the tutelary spirit of the valley, answered, "Beautiful!" + +"Hark!" cried Johnny, "what a charming echo. Listen again," and he +shouted "Hurrah!" + +"Hurrah!" softly responded the echo, and almost in the same breath a +harsh voice, apparently close at hand, and which was evidently not an +echo, cried out, "Hillioh--oh!" + +We started, and gazed around us, and at each other, in astonishment, but +we could see nothing from which this strange exclamation could proceed. + +"That," said Johnny, in a trembling whisper, and seizing Browne's hand, +"that is the voice of the wild Frenchman I heard in the woods near +Castle-hill." + +"Yes," answered Max, gravely, "who knows but there are cannibals here? +You had better be careful, Johnny, how you hurrah in the woods." Max's +manner made me suspect that he possessed some clue to the mystery which +the rest of us lacked. + +"I don't care," answered Johnny, stoutly, while the apprehensive glances +which he cast around on every side, hardly agreed with his valiant +words, "I shall hurrah in spite of all the savages on the island." + +"Hillioh!--Hillioh!" yelled the same voice, more fiercely than before. + +Max burst into a fit of laughter, when following the direction of his +eye, we looked up, and espied an enormous parrot perched upon a purau +branch, directly over our heads, from which he eyed us with a disdainful +and truculent air. + +"There's your wild Frenchman at last, Johnny," said Max, "I expect he'll +call us to account presently for our treatment of his hat." + +"Don't give up de sheep!" screamed the parrot. + +"Come," said Max, "what's the use of trying to talk English: it's quite +plain you're a Parly-vous." + +"Vive l'empereur!" shrieked the parrot. + +"No doubt you can give us a song, monsieur," pursued Max; "favour us +with `Polly put the kettle on,' s'il vous plait." + +The bird twisted his head round, as though giving earnest attention to +what was said; then, after a moment, which from his wise look seemed to +be occupied in profoundly considering the reasonableness of the request, +he burst forth with-- + + "Allons enfants de la Patrie + Le jour de gloire est arrivee!" + +Shrieking out the two lines as though they composed a single word. +Apparently satisfied with this display of his accomplishments, he spread +his wings, and flew heavily across the lake, alighting not far from the +shore, whence we could hear him occasionally uttering a shrill cry. + +"Do you see where the parrot is now?" inquired Morton of me, a moment +afterwards. + +"Yes, I see his green feathers among the foliage, but not very +distinctly." + +"Unless I am much mistaken," pursued he, "there is a shed or building of +some kind among the trees, on the other side of the lake, where he has +alighted." + +On shifting our ground a little, we could all perceive between the +boughs of the trees, something, that did in fact look like a low wooden +building, and after a moment's consultation, it was agreed that Morton +and Max should cross the stream, (which could easily be done where it +poured into the lake), and reconnoitre, while the rest awaited their +report. + +By leaping from stone to stone, and wading occasionally for short +distances, they picked their way to the other side, and presently +disappeared among the casuarinas. After about fifteen minutes they +returned to the shore, and called for us to come over, saying that they +had discovered a building, which appeared, however, to have been long +deserted. Browne took Johnny upon his back, and we forded the rapids as +the others had done. + +Following Max and Morton, we soon reached a kind of landing-place, +half-way between the lake and the top of the ascent, in the centre of +which was a low wooden building, surrounded by a rude fence of pointed +stakes. Entering through a gate, hung upon leather hinges, we found +ourselves in front of the hut. It appeared to be built of timber which +had once composed part of a ship, and was put together with considerable +skill. The yard was full of rank weeds, and damp masses of lichen and +moss hung from the eaves of the house, and covered its roof. The door, +which was furnished with a lock and brass-handle, was closed, but not +fastened; we opened it, and entered a large square-room, lighted by four +windows, two of which had evidently been taken from the stern of a +vessel; the remaining two seemed to have once constituted the upper +parts of sash-doors. These windows were well put into the sides of the +house, and from the appearance of all the work about the room, I +inferred that it had been done by persons accustomed to that kind of +labour. A pine-table, which had lost half of one leg, and two chairs +without backs, composed the entire furniture of this apartment. A rude +shelf was fastened against the wall between two of the windows, upon +which a number of earthen-ware dishes were arranged. A smaller +apartment was partitioned off with rough boards from the first, with +which it communicated by a simple opening or doorway, without any door. + +In this second room were several low wooden frames, probably designed as +bedsteads, ranged side by side, and a large chest stained or painted +blue. In one corner stood a small square writing-table, of some +dark-coloured wood, with several drawers. In another corner, Max +discovered a rusty gridiron and sauce-pan, a small iron pot and a +toasting-fork, upon which he pounced with the eagerness of a miser +lighting upon hidden treasures. The chest was empty, but a small box, +or till, fixed in one end of it, contained a number of vials, a +cork-screw, a tin-canister, and a French Bible, upon the last of which +Arthur seized with as much avidity as Max had evinced in appropriating +the cooking utensils. Johnny pulled open the drawers of the little +writing-table, and found a bunch of quills, a spool of green ribbon, a +file of invoices and bills of lading, a bottle of ink, and about half a +ream of letter-paper, which he declared was just what was wanted for the +purpose of writing "our story." + +The place had a gloomy and deserted air, and we unanimously agreed that +neither the dwelling nor its location was nearly as pleasant as our own +at Castle-hill. + +There were several articles which we wished to carry away with us, but +we concluded to postpone this until a future visit. Max, however, +having once laid hold of the gridiron, seemed extremely loath to part +with it again, and, finally yielding to the irresistible fascination +which it evidently had for him, he threw it over his shoulder as we +started on our return, and brought it away with him. Having been +fastidiously purified by repeated scourings and ablutions, it proved +very useful in preparing our meals, of which fresh fish frequently +formed the principal part. + +In the evening, as we sat at the terraced top of Castle-hill, Johnny +took seriously in hand the important business of finding appropriate +names for the discoveries of the day. + +The valley beyond the grove of bread-fruit, he concluded to call "Echo +Vale." For the lake itself, quite a variety of names was suggested, +none of which, however, seemed to be entirely satisfactory. After +puzzling over the subject a long while without any result, and working +himself into quite a nervous and excited state, a happy thought seemed +all at once to suggest itself and turning to Arthur, he eagerly demanded +what was "the most beautiful lake in all the world?" + +"Loch Katrine, to be sure!" said Browne; "some would say Loch Lomond, +but that is the second." + +"Lake George!" cried Max, decisively. + +"Lake Como, in Switzerland, is said to be, by the tourists and the +poets," answered Arthur, to whom the question had been more particularly +addressed. + +The last name seemed to please Johnny exceedingly, and after repeating +it several times with approbation, he inquired of Arthur, "What it was +that Olla, in the Cannibal story, called her pet wood-pigeon?" + +"Lai-evi," answered Arthur. + +"And you said that meant Little Captive," pursued Johnny with great +animation, "and the `Lai' means `little,' I suppose?" + +"Yes, `Lai' is the diminutive." + +"Well, then, I have it at last! Our lake, though so small, is--" + +"Quite a Como for its size," interrupted Max, "and _so_ it shall be +called--" + +"Lake Laicomo!" cried Johnny, exultingly. + +I am thus particular in mentioning these names, chiefly for the benefit +of all persons engaged in the preparation of new editions of the school +geographies and atlases; and I take this opportunity, at Johnny's +especial request, to call their attention to the matter, in order that +our island and its geographical dimensions may be accurately laid down +and described in future works of the kind referred to. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SIX. + +THE REMOVAL. + +PREPARATIONS FOR THE RAINY SEASON--GOING INTO WINTER-QUARTERS--"MONSIEUR +PAUL"--THE PATRIARCH OF THE LAKE. + + "Now Winter comes to rule the varied year, + Sullen and sad, with all his gloomy train + Of vapours, clouds, and storms." + +We had now been several months upon the island, and notwithstanding our +constant watchfulness, we had not, during all this time, seen a single +sail. Of the vast multitudes of vessels that track the ocean in every +direction, not one had visited the solitary sea that lay within the +boundaries of our horizon; or if any had crossed the verge of the wide +circle, her coming and departure had been alike unobserved by us. + +And now, by a variety of indications, it was manifest that the winter of +the tropical year was at hand. The steady easterly breezes, which, with +occasional variations of south-easterly, had hitherto prevailed, were +succeeded by violent and fickle winds, blowing sometimes from a dozen +different and opposite points of the compass in the course of +twenty-four hours. The brief and sudden showers which we had had at +intervals for some time past gradually became more heavy and frequent. +At length, one calm, sultry day, about noon, a storm, accompanied by +thunder and lightning came up, with so little previous notice, that +although Arthur and myself were at the time scarcely two hundred yards +from the house, we were thoroughly drenched before we could reach it. +And this proved to be no mere thunder shower, such as we had already +been two or three times surprised by. Scarcely had we got under +shelter, when the air grew so dark that it would really have been +difficult to see one's way through the grove. I had never before +witnessed any thing like this, and I began to fear that we were going to +be visited by one of those terrible hurricanes which sometimes devastate +tropical countries. The wind soon commenced blowing with such violence, +that the largest and sturdiest of the old trees that surrounded our +house, bent and swayed before its fury. Their tops lashed each other +overhead, and filled the air with clouds of leaves, whirled away upon +the tempest. Large boughs were twisted off like twigs, and strewed the +ground in every direction. The creaking and groaning of the trees; the +loud flapping of the palm-leaves, like that of a sail loose in the wind; +the howling and shrieking of the gale, as it burst in quick, fierce +gusts through the forest; with the almost total darkness that enveloped +us, were truly appalling. + +The strength of our dwelling was now put to a severer test than its +builders had ever anticipated, and it yielded to the force of the wind, +so that at times the side-posts stood at an angle of forty-five degrees +with the floor; had they been of any material less tough and pliant than +the hibiscus, they must have snapped off in an instant. It was well, +too, that they had been deeply and firmly planted in the ground, or the +whole fabric would have been lifted bodily into the air, and swept away +like a withered leaf. As it was, though wrenched and twisted woefully, +it stood firm. The thatch, of which Arthur was so proud, and which had +hitherto been storm-proof, now opened in many places, and a dozen little +streams began to pour in upon us. + +Before night, the sound of running waters without was like that of a +great spring freshet. Cataracts were leaping on every side from the +edges of the height, and a raging and turbid torrent filled the gully +that separated the forest from Castle-hill. + +The tempest continued for nearly forty-eight hours. By the time it was +over, we had quite come to the conclusion, that if this was to be +regarded as a foretaste and specimen, of what we had to expect during +the rainy season, it would never do to think of remaining in our present +habitation. Considering this as a timely warning, we resolved, after a +formal consultation, to put the deserted cabin by the lake, forthwith +into tenantable condition, so as to be ready to take up our +winter-quarters there, if we should find it expedient to do so. + +On the first fine day, we commenced carrying this resolution into +effect, knowing that we had now but little time to lose. The cabin had +originally been built substantially, and with a good deal of skill, and +it had suffered but little from decay. We had, in fact nothing to do in +the way of repairing it, except to rehang the door, which was loose, and +partially unhinged, and to mend the roof, which leaked in one or two +places. We then cleared the yard from the rank weeds by which it was +overgrown, aired the house thoroughly, by setting door and windows open +for a day or two, and swept out both apartments with cocoa-nut brooms. + +We next, under Arthur's direction, commenced laying in a stock of +provisions. Abundance of ripe bread-fruit could now be procured. We +gathered a considerable quantity, which Arthur and Eiulo baked and +pounded, and prepared, by burying it under ground, wrapped in leaves, in +such a manner that it would keep, as they said, for several months. We +also piled up in one corner of the small room, a great heap of +cocoa-nuts, with the husks on, in which way they can be preserved fresh +a long while. A bushel of candle-nuts, and about the same quantity of +taro and patara roots, completed our winter supplies. + +Johnny was much dissatisfied with the poverty of these preparations for +the rainy season. He thought we ought to have laid in a large stock of +salted or smoked fish, besides catching a score or two of turtle, and +depositing them safely upon their backs in some convenient place, ready +to be converted into soup, at any moment by the magic of Max's culinary +art. + +Arthur thought that we need not anticipate a season of continuous storms +or steady rains--that though the prevailing weather for some months +would be tempestuous, there would nevertheless be some fine days in +nearly every week, during which we could venture forth. + +Another storm, as violent as the last, fully decided us to make the +contemplated removal to the cabin, and that without further delay. +Johnny transported thither his entire collection of shells, corals, +etcetera, which had now grown to be quite extensive. Arthur carried +over an armful of specimens of plants and flowers, which had long been +accumulating for an "herbarium." Max, however, averred that they were a +part of the materials for a treatise on "The Botany of Polynesia," which +Arthur cherished the ambitious design of composing, and which was to be +published with coloured plate, simultaneously with the history of our +adventures. In order that he too might have some indoor occupation +during the anticipated bad weather, Max provided himself with a huge +log, hacked and sawed with great labour, from a bread-fruit tree, blown +down in the last gale, out of which he declared it to be his purpose to +build a miniature ship, destined to convey the aforesaid history, +together with Arthur's botanical treatise, to America. + +The day fixed for our final migration to "Lake Laicomo," at length +arrived, and taking a farewell for "the season," of our deserted +tenement at Castle-hill, we set out for the cabin, to spend our first +night there. It was not without some feelings of regret that we left a +spot now become so familiar, to bury ourselves in the woods out of sight +of the sea. It seemed almost like going again into exile. Johnny, in +particular, felt greatly humiliated, at being obliged to abandon the +house which had cost us so much toil, to take refuge in one constructed +by others. He seemed to look upon this as a kind of tacit admission of +our own utter incapacity to provide for ourselves in that respect. + +On arriving at the cabin, we were somewhat surprised to see our +democratic friend the parrot, perched over the door, as if waiting to +welcome us to our new quarters. He appeared to be in no degree +disturbed at our approach, but greeting us with one or two boisterous +"Vive Napoleons!" maintained his position until we had passed into the +house, when he flew in also, and alighting on the shelf against the +wall, seemed to feel as much at home as any one. Johnny sagely +suggested that he knew that the rainy season was coming on, and was +anxious to establish himself in comfortable quarters until it was over: +possibly this supposition did our visitor injustice, by ascribing to him +motives more selfish and interested, than those by which he was really +actuated. It is more charitable to believe, that having been once +accustomed to human companionship, and being weary of his solitary life +in the woods, where his vocal accomplishments were wasted on the desert +air, he now sought our society, as being more congenial to his tastes +and education, than that of the feathered denizens of the forest. Be +this however as it may, "Monsieur Paul," (as he called himself), from +that time took up his abode with us, and though he would sometimes +disappear for days together, he was sure to come back at last, when, if +he found the door and windows closed, (as sometimes happened), he would +scream, and hurrah for "Sheneral Shackson," until he gained admittance. +One circumstance, which I am sorry to say throws some shade of suspicion +upon the pure disinterestedness of his motives, is, that he generally +went off at the commencement of fine weather, and returned a little +before a storm. This was so uniformly the case, that Max used to +prophesy the character of the weather by his movements, and often, when +to our eyes there was not the slightest indication of a change, he would +say--"There comes Monsieur--look-out for a storm presently"--and it was +rarely that he proved mistaken in such predictions. + +The second day after our removal, there was a gale, in which great trees +were blown down or torn up by the roots. Though shaken by the force of +the wind, the cabin was too firmly built to permit any apprehension of +its being overthrown; and there were no trees of large size near it, by +the fall of which it could be endangered: but we should scarcely have +felt safe in our former dwelling. + +We now improved every pleasant day to the utmost, in completing our +preparations for the period of heavy rains, which Arthur declared to be +close at hand. Browne and Morton made a fish-pond by building a dam of +loose stones across the rapids below the fall, just where the stream +entered the lake. It was soon well-stocked, without any trouble on our +part, with fish resembling roach and perch, numbers of which were +carried over the fall, and prevented by the dam from escaping into the +lake. We also collected a large quantity of bread-fruit bark, and of +the fibrous netting which binds the stalk of the cocoa-nut leaf to the +trunk, to be worked up in various ways. This singular fabric, which in +texture somewhat resembles coarse cotton cloth, is often obtained from +the larger trees in strips two or three feet wide. It is strong and +durable, and is used by the natives for making bags, and for other +similar purposes. Garments too, are sometimes made from it, though for +that purpose tappa is preferred. While the leaves are young and tender, +this remarkable substance is white and transparent, quite flexible, and +altogether a delicate and beautiful fabric, but not sufficiently strong +to be put to any useful purpose: as it becomes older and tougher, it +assumes a yellow colour, and loses much of its flexibility and beauty. +A quantity of hibiscus bark was also collected, to be used in the +manufacture of cord for fishing-lines, nets, etcetera. + +While the rest of us were actively engaged, under Arthur's direction, in +accumulating a stock of these materials, Max devoted all his energies to +the task of capturing an enormous eel which frequented the upper end of +the lake. But he exhausted all his ingenuity in this endeavour without +success. The monster had a secure retreat among the submerged roots of +an old buttress tree, beneath an overhanging bank, from which Max daily +lured him forth by throwing crumbs into the water; but, after devouring +the food that was thrown to him, he would immediately return to his +stronghold under the bank. Max was at great pains to manufacture a +fish-hook out of a part of a cork-screw found in the till of the blue +chest, by means of which he confidently expected to bring matters to a +speedy and satisfactory issue between himself and his wary antagonist. +But the latter would not touch the bait that concealed the hook. Driven +to desperation by this unexpected discomfiture, Max next made sundry +attempts to spear and "harpoon" him, all of which signally failed, so +that at the end of the brief interval of fine weather, this patriarch of +the lake, whose wisdom seemed to be proportioned to his venerable age +and gigantic size, remained proof against all the arts and machinations +of his chagrined and exasperated enemy. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN. + +WINTER EVENINGS AT HOME. + +AMUSEMENTS AND OCCUPATIONS--STORY-TELLING--THE SOUTH-SEA LYCEUM. + + "When the winter nights grow long, + And the winds without blow cold, + We sit in a ring round the warm wood fire, + And listen to stories old." + +Having now brought my story down to the period of our getting into +winter-quarters at Lake Laicomo, (where, during the last few weeks, the +foregoing portion of this narrative has been written), I shall change my +tenses, for the present chapter at least, while I sketch the occupations +and amusements by which we endeavour to fill up the time of our +imprisonment. + +The rainy season is now nearly over, and we have got through it much +more comfortably and pleasantly than we anticipated. The few fine days +during which we finished our preparations for it, as mentioned in the +last chapter, were succeeded, in accordance with Arthur's prediction, by +more than a week of steady rain, and for several weeks there was not a +day without rain. During this time, of course, we were thrown entirely +upon our indoor resources, and, thanks to the forethought which had +provided an abundant store of materials, upon which the ingenuity or +industry of each of us could be variously exercised, we have thus far +managed to keep pretty busy. + +We have twisted a great store of cord for fishing-lines, nets, and other +purposes, from the supply of hibiscus bark previously laid in. We have +also manufactured more than a dozen pairs of serviceable moccasins, with +no other materials than cocoa-nut cotton and bread-fruit bark. Browne +has made a chess-board, and rudely but elaborately carved a complete set +of men, of gigantic size, in which he has evinced much skill and +ingenuity, and a vast deal of perseverance. The castles are mounted +upon the backs of elephants, which Johnny innocently mistook for +enormous swine with two tails apiece. The knights are provided with +shields, bearing Saint Andrew's cross and the thistle for a device, and +would have been arrayed, without doubt, in kilt and tartan had it been +possible. The bishops wear grotesque-looking cocked hats, intended for +mitres, and their countenances are so singularly truculent and +unprepossessing, that Max accuses the artist of having in this petty +way, evinced "his Scottish and Presbyterian spite against Episcopacy." + +Morton has, among other things, made a couple of nets, and a mortar and +pestle for pounding bread-fruit and taro. + +Max's time and attention have been chiefly devoted to the manufacture of +a variety of warlike weapons, among which are four or five formidable +bludgeons, which he styles "Feejee war-clubs," made from the hard and +ponderous wood of the casuarina. He has also worked a good deal, at +intervals, upon the huge log, out of which the "Messenger ship" is to be +constructed. + +Arthur has been more usefully employed in contriving two frames or +stands, designed as candlesticks for holding the native substitute for +candles, which substitute consists simply of a cocoa-nut stalk, some +eighteen inches long, strung with candle-nuts. These nuts are of about +the size of a horse-chestnut, and contain a considerable quantity of +oil: they are the fruit of one of the largest and most magnificent trees +of our island. One nut will burn from five to ten minutes, according to +its size, and if they are pressed closely together upon the stalk, the +flame communicates readily from one to another, affording a tolerably +clear and steady light until the entire string is consumed. + +To supply the place of Johnny's jacket and trousers, which are +completely worn out, Arthur has made, from two or three large strips of +cocoa-nut cotton, a garment resembling the South American "poncho," +being a loose wrapper, with a circular aperture through which the head +of the wearer is to be thrust. It is by no means an elegant article of +apparel, and Johnny was at first inclined to look upon it with +disfavour. But upon being informed that it was in all respects, except +the material of which it was made, like the "tiputa," formerly worn by +the Tahitian chiefs and men of note, he became fully reconciled to it. + +These, (which I mention merely as a sample of our industrial labours), +and similar tasks, furnish us occupation during the day. As soon as it +gets dark, we set out the broken-legged table in the middle of the room, +and lighting three or four skewers of candle-nuts, amuse or employ +ourselves in a variety of ways. Browne and Morton frequently sit down +to a game of chess, or seizing a couple of Max's "Feejee war-clubs," +practise the broad-sword exercise, in which Browne, who has some skill +in fencing, occasionally gives lessons to the rest. + +Arthur has opened an evening-school, in which he teaches Eiulo reading +and writing, and gives Johnny instruction in botany and conchology, +using his "herbarium," and Johnny's collection of shells, for the +purpose of illustration. He also writes a good deal, and asks Eiulo +many questions respecting the customs, ceremonies, and traditions of +Tewa. Occasionally, during such conversations, when he makes a note of +something new or striking, Max laughs, and says, that in addition to the +great work on the botany of Polynesia, Arthur designs to enlighten the +world with a learned treatise on the "Traditions and Superstitions of +the South-Sea Islanders." + +Johnny either re-arranges his "collection," or plays jack straws with +Eiulo, or devotes himself to the education of the parrot. + +As for me, I have hitherto amused myself during the evenings in writing +up "the narrative," and occasionally reading portions of it aloud, +claiming, however, the privilege of skipping such passages as I think +proper. It having been solemnly resolved that the "history of our +adventures" must be written in the form of a "regular desert island +story," to use Johnny's expression, and divided into chapters, Max +insists that the commencement of each chapter should be furnished with a +poetical motto, and offers, in the capacity of a dictionary of +quotations, to furnish scraps of rhyme for that purpose, to order, in +any quantity required, and at the shortest notice, upon merely being +informed of the sentiment with which the motto is desired to harmonise. + +After hearing the narrative thus far, with the exception of such +portions as I have thought proper to omit, Max expresses strong distrust +of my fairness and impartiality as a historian. He accuses me in +particular, of having done him injustice by omitting some of his most +remarkable exploits, as well as many brilliant sayings upon a great +variety of subjects. He declares that I do not understand and +appreciate him--that I am incapable of doing so; and that I have +unjustly, though perhaps unintentionally, represented him as a trifling, +light-minded sort of person. I have, therefore, felt bound to record +this protest of the injured party, but having just read it to him, he +pronounces it unsatisfactory, and an aggravation of the original wrong. + +Sometimes, as a variation of our evening amusements, we put out the +lights, and sit and tell stories in the dark. Browne's memory is stored +with an unfailing supply of marvellous tales and legends, founded upon +Scottish history and tradition, or the habits and superstitions of the +people; some relate to wraiths, warnings, second sight, etcetera; some +illustrate the prowess of Scottish heroes and worthies, from Bruce and +Wallace, right down to Johnny Armstrong and Rob Roy Macgregor; others, +again, are wild and tragical tales of covenanting times, or of the +sufferings endured, and the dangers encountered by his countrymen, for +their religious faith, from the time of the murder of "holy Patrick +Hamilton, the first Scottish martyr," to the forays of prelatical +moss-troopers, and the butcheries of Claverhouse, in later days. + +The chief point of all Browne's narratives, however various their +subjects, is to illustrate the superiority of Scotland, and every thing +Scottish, from martyrs to mendicants, and from heroes to highwaymen, +over all the rest of the world in general, and the sister kingdom in +particular. I was greatly amused by one of his stories, which related +how a Scottish border-robber outwitted and plundered an English +professional brother. In his patriotic resolution to uphold the +superiority of his country in all respects, Browne was not even willing +to allow that the pilferers and marauders south of the Tweed, could at +all compare in address and audacity, with those who enjoyed the +advantage of having been bred to the north of it. + +Max, too, was, (at least in Johnny's estimation), a famous story-teller, +almost equal in fact to Schehezerade, of the Thousand and One Nights. +His stories, however, were of an entirely different character from those +of Browne. They had no savour of historic or traditionary truth,--no +relation to actual life,--and in this consisted their great charm. +Their subject matter, was the wonderful exploits of bold knights-errant, +sallying forth, attended by their trusty esquires, in search of high +adventures; their chivalrous encounters with other knights in mortal +quarrel, or for the honours of the tourney; their incredible feats of +strength and valour in the rescue of captive maidens, wandering +princesses, and distressed damsels, from all sorts of unheard-of perils, +and in the redress of all manner of grievances, by whomsoever suffered. +In his more romantic flights he described exploits yet more perilous +than these,--conflicts with giants and ogres,--the storming and +demolishing of enchanted castles, defended by scaly griffins, and +fire-breathing dragons, backed by the potent spells and incantations of +some hostile magician. To such narratives Johnny would willingly listen +by the hour. Any trifling anachronisms or inconsistencies, which +sometimes occurred, never troubled him in the least. If some of Max's +knights, equipped with sword and shield, and sheathed in mail, were also +expert at fire-arms, and handled a rifle or a revolver, like a +Kentuckian, Johnny respected and admired them all the more on account of +these varied accomplishments, and never troubled the narrator with any +vexatious demand for explanations. + +At first Max had been greatly piqued at the slight interest which Johnny +seemed to feel in the fate of his heroes. The fact was, that he had +become so familiar with that department of literature, and was so +accustomed to see the hero come safely out of the most horrible and +unheard-of dangers, that he regarded it as quite a matter of course, and +there was now no such thing as alarming him for his safety. It was to +no purpose that Max surrounded his heroes with fierce and numerous foes; +Johnny took it quite coolly, expecting him to cut his way out as a hero +should. It was in vain to cover him with wounds--a hero's wounds are +never mortal. Cast him away upon an iron-bound coast in the midst of a +hurricane--Johnny knew that _one_ would escape: drown a hero! who ever +heard of such a thing! Max at length resented this indifference, by +suddenly becoming quite tragical, and actually despatching two or three +heroes with very little ceremony. The first of these unfortunate +gentlemen perished, if I remember correctly, by "a tremendous backstroke +of a two-handed, double-edged sword, that severed his head from his +body." At this sentence, which seemed pretty decisive, Johnny was +somewhat staggered, but, immediately recovering himself, he bade Max "go +on," expecting, I verily believe, that it would turn out that the head +was not in fact _quite_ cut off or that if it was, it would, like that +of the physician Dubin, in the Arabian Nights, be again set upon the +shoulders, and life restored by the healing virtue of some potent +medicament. Great was his astonishment and consternation, on being made +at last to comprehend, that the hero was actually dead; which fact he +did not, however, appear fully to realise, until Max, to put the matter +beyond doubt, buried him with great funereal pomp and ceremony, and +erected over his remains a splendid monument, with an inscription +recording his exploits and his valour. This method of proceeding, Max +judiciously followed up, by giving a tragical termination to his +romances, often enough to keep Johnny reminded that _his_ heroes at any +rate were mortal. + +In addition to these resources for our evenings, we have the semi-weekly +meetings of "The South-Sea Lyceum," which was organised soon after the +commencement of the rainy season, and of which Arthur is the president +having been twice unanimously elected to that dignified and responsible +office. Recitations or declamations, essays, and debates upon questions +previously selected, constitute the regular exercises at these meetings. +Browne possesses quite a talent for dramatic recitation, and he has +Shakespeare almost by heart, which circumstances, early on the voyage +out, earned for him the nickname of "Shaks." At nearly every session of +the "Lyceum," he is either among the regular appointees for a +recitation, or is called out by acclamation for a voluntary one. Max +shines chiefly in debate, in which he is always ready to take either +side, of any question. Indeed he sometimes speaks on both sides of the +same question, and displays his ingenuity by refuting his own arguments. + +These meetings have thus far been exceedingly pleasant, and on many a +night when the driving rain was beating upon roof and window, and the +wind was howling dismally around our solitary cabin, all has seemed +bright and cheerful within, as Max and Morton carried on a spirited +debate, or Browne declaimed Wolsey's soliloquy, or "To be, or not to be, +that is the question." + +The minutes of one meeting of the Lyceum may answer as a sample of their +entertainments:-- + +Recitation, (by Johnny), Lines supposed to have been written by +Alexander Selkirk, "I am monarch of all I survey," etcetera. + +Recitation, (by Browne), Clarence's Dream. + +Essay, (by the President), on the traditions of a Deluge, to be found +among the Polynesian tribes. + +Essay, (by myself), The theory of the formation and structure of Coral +Islands. + +Debate. Question: Is childhood the happiest period of human life? + +Affirmative maintained by Max, negative by Morton. + +Summing up of the arguments by the President and decision by him in the +negative. + +Reading of the Polynesian Intelligencer, by the Editor, (Max). + +Recitation, (by Eiulo), a Tewan War-song, in the original. + +After the first protracted rain was over, there were frequent intervals +of fine weather, which lasted sometimes several days. But we found on +going forth, that a change had taken place in the condition of things, +which rendered any long excursion, even during these intervals, entirely +out of the question. + +Considerable streams poured down from the higher ground toward the +interior, and traversed the island at short distances, presenting +formidable barriers to all travelling. The ground was everywhere so +miry that it was difficult to avoid sinking above the ankles at every +step. + +As the season advanced it became still worse, and at length we confined +ourselves almost entirely to the house. Lately, however, there has been +a very perceptible improvement; the rains have become lighter, and less +frequent, and the season is evidently drawing towards its close. We are +already discussing our plans for the summer, and have resolved upon a +thorough exploration of the island, as soon as the fine weather has been +long enough established to remove the effects of the heavy rains. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT. + +THE SEPARATION. + +OUR SECLUSION INVADED--SPRING IN THE TROPICS--THE EXCURSION AND ITS +CONSEQUENCES. + + "Reviving Nature bounds as from her birth: + The sun is in the heavens, and life on earth; + Flowers in the valley, splendour in the beam, + Health in the breeze, and freshness in the stream." + +I resume my narrative, under circumstances widely different from those +in which the preceding chapter was written. The events of the last few +days have completely changed the aspect of affairs in our little world. +The peace, the seclusion, the security, with which in our minds it had +hitherto been invested, exist no longer. Our quiet life, so free from +vicissitudes and alarms, as to seem almost monotonous, has been rudely +broken into, and in a few days we are to take a step which cannot fail +to be attended with consequences momentous to us, but whether fraught +with good or evil, it is impossible to foresee. This, however, is +anticipating the regular course of events. + +It is scarcely credible, how short a time after the cessation of the +rains, sufficed to remove every trace of their effects. Three or four +days of sunshine seemed to restore things to nearly the condition, in +which we found them on first reaching the island. + +It is true the vegetation now had a fresher look than before, and +slender brooks still murmured through ravines usually dry; the lake, +too, formerly so limpid, was somewhat discoloured by the turbid streams +running into it from the surrounding heights; but the standing pools of +water had evaporated, and the ground had, in most places, become once +more firm and dry. + +As soon as the weather was fairly established, we made several +excursions in various directions, though not to any considerable +distance. On visiting Castle-hill, we found nothing left of our house +there, except the foundation; the entire framework, having been swept +away by the wind. A large candle-nut tree, just before the door, had +been struck by lightning, and the blasted and blackened trunk, sadly +marred the beauty of the spot. + +Arthur had selected a favourable location on the margin of the lake near +the fish-pond, for a taro and patara patch; and we spent several days in +ransacking the neighbouring woods for roots, with which to stock it. +Yams, we had not yet succeeded in finding, though they are indigenous in +most of the Polynesian islands, and we had made diligent search for them +in the localities where they are usually found. + +One fine morning, soon after the cessation of the rains, Arthur proposed +an expedition into the interior, following the course of the stream +upward towards its source. In addition to the general object of +exploration, he had in view the discovery of the much-coveted vegetable +last-mentioned, there being one large variety of it, which is found +growing wild among the mountains, or upon the sides of the hills of the +interior. All received the suggestion with cordial approval, being +particularly pleased with the proposed route, along the banks of the +brook. Johnny, exulting in his recovered liberty, after the long +imprisonment of the winter, and anticipating all sorts of wonderful +discoveries in the vegetable, floral, and ornithological departments, at +once enlisted Eiulo and himself as members of the party of exploration. + +As we were about to enter a region, with the resources of which, in the +way of provisions, we knew nothing, we considered it a measure of wise +precaution to fortify ourselves against the fatigues of the journey, by +a hearty breakfast of broiled fish and roasted taro. This important +duty having been conscientiously attended to, our remaining preparations +occupied but little time, and we set out at an early hour. + +Johnny, equipped with his longest bow, and an abundant stock of arrows, +in readiness for the appearance of anything in the shape of a jackal or +a tiger-cat, marched valiantly in advance, while Eiulo, in the capacity +of armour-bearer, or trusty esquire, followed, carrying his cutlass. +Next, carefully surveying the ground we passed over, came Arthur, with a +bag upon his arm, and a basket of cocoa-nut leaflets in his hand, ready +for the reception of the yams, when found, and of all sorts of roots, +plants, and botanical specimens, that might be discovered in the +meantime. + +Max was armed to the teeth, as though in preparation for a pitched +battle. By his side, in a belt of hibiscus bark, was stuck his cutlass: +in one hand he carried a "spear," and in the other, one of his "Feejee +war-clubs." Morton and myself were provided with a cutlass apiece; and +Browne, without having encumbered himself even to that extent, strolled +leisurely along with his hands in his pockets, whistling "blue-bonnets +over the border." + +It was now the spring of the tropical year: the deciduous trees were +renewing their verdure, and were covered with young shoots, and bursting +leaf-buds. Even the evergreens--though they change but little +throughout the year, and the old leaves and the new, the blossoms and +the ripe fruit, may be seen upon the same tree at almost every season, +looked brighter and fresher than before the rains. The earth was +carpeted with beautiful grasses, mingled with tufts of moss, and bunches +of fern. Blue and white flowers were scattered about almost as +profusely as the "pinkster blossoms," in April, in the woods at home; +and in sheltered places, the modest cape-jasmine was beginning to unfold +its fragrant leaves. A delightful freshness filled the air, and there +was as yet, at this early hour, nothing to remind us that we were +beneath the fervent skies of the burning zone. + +Rejoicing and exhilarated at finding himself in the woods once more, +Johnny ran furiously hither and thither, closely attended by Eiulo, +gathering wild-flowers, ferns and mosses; chasing bugs, beetles, and +butterflies; and letting fly his arrows at every unfortunate member of +the feathered community that came within the range of his archery. In +every thicket and almost at every step, he came upon something to call +forth the most boisterous exclamations of surprise or delight. He was +manifestly in the state of mind declared by the poet to be so eminently +happy and desirable-- + + "To all exhilarating influences, + Of earth and heaven alive!" + +Scarcely a moment passed, that he did not come running all aglow and out +of breath to Arthur, with eager questions about something or other which +he had just seen, and then dash off again into the forest without +waiting for a reply, where fresh explosions of admiration or wonder, +would soon announce new, and if possible, still more astounding +discoveries. + +The shores of the stream were picturesque and varied. For the first +half-mile from our starting-point, it wound between smooth grassy banks, +adorned with scattered clumps of trees. It then entered a dense wood, +where its channel was a rugged ravine, inclosed between steep rocks of +black basalt. Here, the scraggy, ill-conditioned trees were crowded +together, and overgrown with gigantic creepers. The branches, reaching +across from the opposite shores, were interlaced and matted into thick +masses, almost excluding the light of day. Max here displayed his +agility, by laying hold of a long bough which extended from bank to +bank, and walking "hand over hand" across the stream that flowed darkly +and sluggishly some twelve or fifteen feet below. + +We were an hour at the least, in toiling through this tangled wood, +though it did not extend more than half a mile. After leaving it behind +us, frequent rapids showed that we were steadily ascending as we +proceeded. Birds, such as we had not before seen on the island, and +which reminded me of some of my old acquaintances of the New England +woods, perched upon the trees, or flew familiarly around us. One or +two, of the woodpecker tribe, looked wonderfully natural and home-like, +as they sat industriously drumming upon hollow logs. Another, a small, +brown bird, with modest plumage, surprised and delighted me, by a clear, +full whistle, that sounded not unlike that of our own robin redbreast. +We also saw numbers of a species of pigeon with black bills, +slate-coloured bodies, and a ruff of white feathers about the neck. One +of these Johnny brought down with his bow, besides wounding very +seriously, (as he alleged), a considerable number of others. The +woodpeckers and whistlers enjoyed a temporary immunity from his +formidable shafts, reluctantly granted them at my intercession in their +behalf, on the score of old associations. + +About an hour before noon we reached a spot where the stream was divided +by a rocky islet, around which it spread out like a small lake. A +grove, of a very peculiar appearance, and seeming to consist of a single +tree, sheltered and overspread the entire spot. + +Here we concluded to halt, beginning by this time to feel quite tired, +and inclined to rest. The water was shallow at this point, and Max +wading over to the little island, presently called upon us to follow him +if we wished to behold "a veritable banyan tree." Whether a banyan or +not, (Arthur pronounced it to be a species of barren fig), it was +certainly a wonderful specimen of vegetation. The main trunk, springing +up in the centre of the islet, was nearly three feet in diameter. At +the height of some fifteen feet from the ground, large branches extended +horizontally in every direction. From these branches, at regular +intervals, pendulous, vine-like shoots sprouted and grew downwards until +they reached the ground, where they took root, and gradually increasing +in size formed new trunks or pillars, to support a further extension of +the branches. This process of growth had gone on until the tree had +overrun the entire island, resembling a flat roof of green branches, +resting upon rows of columns. Some of the perpendicular shoots had not +yet reached the ground, others had just taken root, and were slender and +flexible, while many of the older ones rivalled the parent stem in size, +and could not easily be distinguished from it. + +While we rested here, a pair of the little brown songsters alighted +among the branches of the "banyan," and entertained us with a vocal +performance, in which they took up the strain alternately, responding to +each other, and occasionally uniting in a chorus. + +Max now declared himself savagely hungry, and commenced exploring the +neighbourhood in search of something eatable. But no fruit-bearing +trees were to be found, and he returned from his foraging expedition +protesting that the country was a perfect desert, and declaring that he +for one would not proceed a step farther until he took up the line of +march for home. We were all of the opinion that we had done enough for +one day, and it was agreed that, after resting ourselves a short time, +we should commence our return. + +Meantime, Arthur caught sight of some trees upon a ridge of land a short +distance further up the stream, whose foliage resembled, as he thought, +that of the "auti," or cloth plant. Saying that he would return in a +few moments, he walked along the west bank of the brook in the direction +of the ridge, followed by Johnny and Eiulo, who seemed as animated and +unwearied as ever. Presently they turned a bend in the stream, and we +lost sight of them. For lack of more interesting occupation, I began to +count the stems of the grove-tree. There were seventeen, of large size, +and a great number of smaller ones. Max discovered a deep pool at the +lower end of the islet, in which were a number of fish, marked like +yellow perch: and as he had a fishing-line of Eiulo's manufacture, in +his pocket he amused himself by angling, using wood-beetles for bait. +Morton and Browne hunted up four flat stones, and commenced pitching +quoits. + +After half an hour passed in these various ways, we began to wonder at +Arthur's long delay, and to grow impatient for his return. I had +counted every stem of the banyan-fig, great and small. Max had become +quite disgusted with angling for fish, which were too wary, or too +well-fed, to favour him with even a nibble. Browne, after being beaten +for five successive games, had very naturally lost his interest in the +sport, and tossed his quoits into the brook. + +Another half-hour passed, and still the absentees failed to make their +appearance. Max now professed to be suffering from the pangs of hunger, +and longed for the sight even of the much-abused cocoa-nut tree. At +last our patience being utterly exhausted, we resolved to go in search +of Arthur and his suite, whose protracted absence greatly surprised us. + +On reaching the point, or bend, behind which they had disappeared, we +hallooed loudly, but there was no answer. As we proceeded, the ground +became very rough and broken, and the bed of the brook was full of loose +rocks. A little further on, the noise of a waterfall was heard, and +after one or two more turns, we reached a spot where the stream leaped +down a precipice some twenty feet. Our further progress in the +direction we were pursuing was barred by a wall of rock; an active and +fearless climber might, it is true, have scaled it by the aid of the +stunted shrubs and jutting crags upon its face, but we knew that Arthur +accompanied by Eiulo and Johnny, could not have passed on by any such +route. + +Proceeding to the left, along the foot of the precipice, and pausing at +short intervals to repeat our halloos, we at last reached a wide fissure +in the rock, by scrambling through which we gained the higher level. +This was in all probability a part of the ridge which Arthur had seen +from the islet. We now returned along the brow of the precipice until +we came to the waterfall, where we shouted again, but still without +getting any answer. To push the search further in this direction seemed +useless, for it was morally certain that Arthur would not have continued +beyond this point up the stream; the understanding with which he had +left us, forbade any such supposition. + +We began now to feel alarmed, and to fear that some accident had +befallen them, though of what nature we were at a loss to conjecture. +Morton suggested the possibility that they had taken the opposite bank +of the brook, and that while we were looking for them, they might have +returned to the islet. This seemed not improbable, and striving hard to +convince ourselves that it must be so, we regained the lower level by +the same pass through which we had ascended, and hastened along the base +of the height, and down the shore of the stream till we reached the +islet again. But our companions were not there. Still, they might have +returned during our absence, and supposing that we had started homeward, +proceeded after us. We were greatly perplexed what course to pursue. +If we delayed our return much longer, we should not be able to reach the +cabin before night set in: the wilderness around seemed to contain +nothing that could serve as food, and we should have to fast as long as +we remained in it. Then, too, our waiting longer could be of no benefit +to the others, even if they had not yet returned to the islet. Upon +finding us gone, they would know at once that we had set out for home, +and there was no possibility of their mistaking their way thither. + +We concluded, accordingly, to return without further delay. Browne cut +a stout stick, and planted it in the sand at the margin of the brook, +arranging a number of large pebbles at its foot, in the form of a hand, +with the index finger pointing homeward. We then set out at a brisk +pace, with some hope, but little actual expectation, of overtaking our +companions on the war. + +We soon reached the thick wood with its matted undergrowth, and the old +and knotted vines twining like enormous reptiles around the trunks of +the trees; and so slow was our progress through it, that, when we +emerged into the open country, it was nearly sunset. The remaining +distance was more rapidly accomplished. As we drew nigh to the cabin, I +began to look anxiously for the appearance of the missing ones. Each +moment I expected to see Johnny rushing towards us with a laughing boast +of having "beaten us home." But no one came forth to meet us, and I +thought that the valley had never before looked so lonely. + +It was not, however, entirely deserted. The parrot was perched in +solitary state upon the eaves of the cabin, and as we opened the gate, +he flapped his wings, and croaked forth in dismal tones a sentence which +Johnny, little dreaming of its present application, had been at much +pains to teach him:--"Poor Paul's lonesome!" he cried, "they're all +gone--all gone!" + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY NINE. + +THE SEARCH. + +HOME SWEET HOME--MAX ON MOONLIGHT--FOLLOWING A TRAIL--THE CONCEALED +CANOE. + + "Where'er thou wanderest, canst thou hope to go + Where skies are brighter, or the earth more fair? + Dost thou not love these aye-blue streams that flow, + These spicy forests, and this golden air? + + "O yes! I love these woods, these streams so clear, + Yet from this fairy region I would roam, + Again to see my native hills--thrice dear! + And seek that country, of all countries,--Home." + +Max hastened to collect fuel, and kindle a fire, in order to prepare +some food. Assuming, as usual, the entire superintendence and control +of the culinary department, and every thing connected therewith, he set +Browne to work washing and scraping tara-roots, despatched me after a +fresh supply of fuel, and sent Morton with the hand-net down to the +fish-pond to take out a couple of fish for a broil. But while thus +freely assigning tasks to the rest of us, with the composed air of one +accustomed to the exercise of unquestioned authority, he by no means +shrunk from his own fair share of the work; and having got the fire +burning cleverly by the time that Morton returned with the fish, he +rolled up his sleeves, and with an air of heroic fortitude, commenced +the necessary, but somewhat unpleasant process of cleaning them. + +Night had now set in, but the sky being perfectly clear, and the moon at +her full, it was scarcely darker than at early twilight. + +Max seemed to prolong his culinary operations to the utmost, either from +pure love of the employment, or with the still lingering hope, that our +companions might yet arrive in time to partake of our supper. + +At last however, it became apparent that the cookery could not, without +serious detriment, be longer protracted. The bursting skin of the taro +revealed the rich mealy interior, and eloquently proclaimed its +readiness to be eaten. The fish were done to a turn, and filled the +cabin with a savoury odour, doubly grateful to our nostrils after a +twelve hours' fast. Max declared with a sigh, that another moment upon +the gridiron would ruin them, and he was reluctantly compelled to serve +up the repast without further delay, when, notwithstanding our growing +anxiety on account of Arthur's absence, we made a hearty meal. After +feeding Monsieur Paul, and setting by some food in readiness for our +companions when they should arrive, as we still hoped they would do in +the course of the evening, we went out to a spot above the cascade, +where Morton and Browne had arranged some rude fragments of basalt, so +as to form a semicircle of seats, which, if less comfortable than +well-cushioned arm-chairs would have been, might at any rate be +considered in decidedly better "rural taste," and in more harmonious +keeping with the character of the surrounding scene. + +From this point we could trace the windings of the brook for some +distance in one direction, while below us, in the opposite one, spread +the moonlit lake, reflecting in its mirror-like surface the dark masses +of foliage that fringed its shores. It was one of those tranquil, +dreamy nights, known only in tropical countries. A subtle fragrance of +fresh buds and blossoms filled the air. The light streamed in a silvery +flood upon the tufted tops of the groves; while in the solemn shade +beneath, the serried trunks reared themselves in long ranks, like the +grey columns of some Gothic ruin. + +As we sat listening to the murmur of the waterfall, the rustling of the +trees, and the distant and muffled booming of the surf, I fell into a +dreamy reverie, which was at length dissipated by Browne's voice-- + +"Can any thing be more beautiful than this scene at this moment!" +exclaimed he, "and yet I do not know when I have experienced such a +weariness of it all--such an intense longing for home, as I feel +to-night." + +"I shall begin to believe in mesmeric sympathy," said Morton, "I was +myself just thinking of home. Home, sweet home!" and he heaved a +long-drawn sigh. + +Yes! the charm and illusion of our island life had long ended. We were +tired of tropical luxuriance, and eternal summer. Glowing skies, and +landscapes like a picture, had almost ceased to gratify even the eye. I +longed for a glimpse of a rugged New England hill once more. A gnarled +New England oak, though stripped by wintry winds of every leaf, would be +a sight more grateful to me, than all those endless groves of waving +palms. + +"I cannot believe," resumed Browne, "that we are destined to waste our +days in this lonely spot, elysium as it is, of external beauty. We have +faculties and desires, which can find no scope here, and which are +perishing for lack of exercise. Still it is possible. But it is a +dreary, dreary thought! I can now feel the pathos of the words of the +ancient mariner on coming in sight of his native land-- + + "`Oh dream of joy! is this indeed + The light-house top I see? + Is this the hill? is this the kirk?-- + Is this mine own countree? + + "`We drifted o'er the harbour bar + And I with sobs did pray-- + O let me be awake, my God! + Or let me sleep away!'" + +Browne recited the lines with a power and feeling, that affected even +the matter-of-fact Morton; Max hastened to show that he was above being +so easily moved. + +"All this comes," cried he, "of lying here under the trees in the +moonlight. Moonlight certainly has a tendency to make people melancholy +and sentimental; it also makes them do foolish things. The most absurd +and unreasonable notions I ever entertained, came into my head by +moonlight, and wouldn't go away. Only twenty-five minutes ago, we were +quite a rational, practical set of persons, eating our supper, (a +well-cooked supper, too, though I say it myself), with a keen appetite, +like Christians. And now, we have fallen to sighing and quoting poetry, +and Browne waxes quite pathetic at the touching thought of getting a +glimpse once more, of the smoky chimneys of Glasgow! Finally, I have +nearly caught the infection myself, and unless I escape out of the +moonlight presently, I dare say I also shall become quite +lack-a-daisical, and commence a poetical apostrophe to my native village +of Hardscrabble--or rather to plump little Susan Somers, my first love, +at the `madam's' school, who affected my weak mind and susceptible heart +to that extent, that in her bewildering presence my tongue clave to the +roof of my mouth, while I grew red in the face like a perplexed turkey +gobbler. But what _can_ have become of Arthur and the rest? Unless +something had happened to them, they must have returned before now." + +A little before midnight we retired to the cabin to sleep, having first +agreed, that in the morning three of us should proceed up the stream +again, to make a thorough search for our companions, the fourth +remaining behind until near noon, when, if the absentees had not yet +returned, he should set out to join the others at the islet below the +falls, which we fixed upon as the rendezvous. + +In the morning, lots were drawn to determine which of us should remain +at the cabin, and that duty fell to Morton. The rest of us, having +armed ourselves, and prepared a supply of taro and bread-fruit, +sufficient, as we supposed, for several days, set out, soon after +sunrise. Our progress was much more rapid than it had been when we +first went over the ground, as we now had a definite object in view, and +pressed steadily forward, without allowing any thing to interrupt or +delay us. In an hour and a half after starting, we came in sight of the +islet. Opposite it was the stake which Browne had planted in the sand, +just as we had left it. We pushed on up the stream to the cascade, and +crossing to the right bank, we began to skirt the base of the rocky wall +on that side, looking carefully around for some traces of our +companions. + +We had proceeded in this way, about one hundred yards from the brook, +when I picked up one of Johnny's arrows in a tuft of fern. This was +conclusive evidence that we were upon the right track. A little farther +on, was a piece of marshy ground, and here we made a startling +discovery. In the soft soil, several foot-prints could be plainly +distinguished. Some were coarse, shapeless impressions, precisely such +as would be made by the rude moccasins worn by Arthur and Johnny. +Others were the prints of naked feet, and some of these were of far too +large a size to be made by either of the three. This discovery affected +us for the moment like an electric shock, and we stood looking at one +another without speaking, and scarcely breathing, while the very beating +of our hearts might be heard. + +Browne was the first to recover himself, when he commenced a close +examination of all the tracks. The piece of ground upon which they +could be traced, extended some thirty yards, and after a careful +scrutiny of the whole of it, we became convinced that at least four +persons, besides our three companions, had recently passed over it. All +the tracks were not in the same direction, and from finding those of +precisely the same size lying in opposite directions, we inferred that +some of these persons, at least, had passed and repassed the spot. + +The most distressing surmises as to the cause of the disappearance of +our companions, now began to suggest themselves. We were so astounded +by this decisive evidence of the presence of strangers upon the island, +that we scarcely knew what to do next, but at last concluded to return +to the islet and await Morton's arrival, being anxious to avoid the risk +of any further division of our numbers. We accordingly retraced our way +thither: supposing that Morton would have set out before we could reach +the cabin, and that we might pass each other on the way without knowing +it, if we should proceed down the stream to meet him, we remained +quietly at the islet, keeping a vigilant and somewhat nervous look-out +on every side. + +He arrived about noon, having started rather sooner than had been agreed +upon. On being informed of the tracks which had been discovered, he +said that we ought at once to trace them as far as we were able. "We +must not rest," said he, "until we know something more of this, even if +we have to traverse every inch of ground on the island." + +Browne was inclined to infer from the foot-prints, that the interior, +and the eastern part of the island, of which we as yet knew nothing, +were inhabited, and that our companions had fallen into the hands of the +natives. + +"Let us, in the first place, find, if possible, where they are. We can +then judge what is to be done, if indeed we can do any thing," said +Morton, "and now for the place where the tracks you speak of are to be +seen." + +Grasping our weapons, which were no longer to be regarded as a useless +incumbrance, we once more proceeded up the brook, and soon reached the +piece of low ground before mentioned. We again narrowly inspected the +tracks: Morton measured them with a twig, and concluded, as we had +previously done, that these were the foot-prints of at least seven +persons--there being that number of clearly different sizes. Three of +these were without doubt the tracks of Arthur, Johnny, and Eiulo. The +impressions made by the moccasins of the two former led only in one +direction, (_from_ the stream), while those of the naked feet, (or of +some of them), were in two opposite directions. Following these tracks +eastward along the rocky ridge, we soon came to firm dry ground, where +footsteps could no longer be traced. But by a minute scrutiny, we were +still able to detect slight but decisive indications of the course of +the party whose trail we were endeavouring to follow. + +In one place, a bunch of spreading ferns had been trodden down, and the +long graceful fronds bruised and broken: in another, a cluster of +crushed wild-flowers betrayed a recent footstep. A little further on, +we came to a wide, meadow-like expanse, where the grass and weeds grew +rank and tall, and through this the path of a considerable party could +be readily traced. Gradually becoming accustomed to this species of +minute investigation, as we continued carefully to practise it, we soon +grew so expert and skilful, that things very slight in themselves, and +which would ordinarily have altogether escaped notice, sufficed to guide +and direct us. + +The path trodden through the meadow, led to the foot of an ascent, up +which we followed the trail slowly and with difficulty, the soil being +hard, and the vegetation scanty. On gaining the top, we found that we +had reached the eastern, or south-eastern extremity of the island, and +the sea spread before us, almost at our feet. The trail led directly +towards the edge of a steep bank, just above the shore, near which we +lost it altogether. Morton leaped down the bank some ten or twelve +feet, while the rest of us were looking round for easier and more +gradual means of descent. Finding a stunted tree springing from the +lower ground, close against the bluff, I leaped among its spreading +branches, and climbed down its trunk to the shore, where I found Morton +searching for some traces of the party which we had tracked almost to +the edge of the height. + +In a moment we were joined by Max and Browne, who had clambered down the +face of the bank by the assistance of the shrubs and bushes growing upon +it. + +"It is useless," said Browne, "to look here for the trail we have lost. +If they descended to the shore, it must have been in some place where +Johnny and Eiulo could have got down." + +"The track seemed to lead directly to the sea," said Morton, "and you +must consider that a party of savages would not find much of an obstacle +in such a bank as this, and would scarcely be as careful as ourselves of +the safety of Johnny and Eiulo. In fact, I suppose they would hand or +drop them down such a height, without scruple or ceremony. What I now +begin to fear is, that our unfortunate companions have fallen into the +hands of a party of savages, landing here for some transient purpose, +and have been carried off by them." + +At this moment an exclamation from Max, who had walked a little way +along the beach, announced some discovery, and turning round we saw him +beckoning to us. + +"What is that?" said he, when we had joined him, stooping down, and +pointing towards a clump of stunted trees, growing in an angle or +indentation, where the bluff fell back for a short distance from the +shore, "is it not a canoe drawn up under the trees?" + +It was not easy to distinguish the object clearly, on account of the +thickness of the foliage. After waiting a moment, and looking carefully +about, being satisfied that there was no one in the vicinity, we +approached the spot. Max was not mistaken; a large canoe, capable of +holding fifteen or twenty persons, was lying among the bushes, where it +had evidently been placed for concealment. In the bottom were a number +of carved paddles, a mast wound about with a mat-sail, several +calabashes containing water, and some cocoa-nuts. + +Having hastily noted these particulars, we withdrew to a short distance, +behind a rock detached from the bank, and surrounded by a dense growth +of tangled shrubbery, to hold a consultation. + +From the position in which we found the canoe, with no dwelling near +that we could see, and from the circumstance of its containing water and +provisions, we inferred that it did not belong to persons inhabiting the +island, or this portion of it at any rate. There was at least a +probability of its belonging to the party which we had tracked so nearly +to the spot, and that they were now somewhere in the neighbourhood. + +"This canoe must be destroyed," said Morton, after a moment of silence, +"and we had better set about it at once." + +This proposition seemed a bold and a somewhat strange one. Browne +demanded the object of such a proceeding. + +"Unless we do this," answered Morton, "our companions, if they are still +alive, and in the power of the savages, may be carried away from the +island before our eyes, and separated from us for ever. As long as they +are here, within our reach, there is hope of our being able to rescue +them; if not by force, then by some device or stratagem. At the worst, +we only run some unnecessary risk, by what I propose. Could we ever +forgive ourselves if Arthur should be carried off through our having +omitted a precaution calculated to prevent it?" + +Morton's decision and earnestness prevailed; while he undertook the work +of destroying the canoe, Max, Browne, and I, stationed ourselves at +different points around the spot, so as to give timely notice of the +approach of any person. He devoted himself to his task with such +vigour, that in a very few moments he had completely broken up the +bottom of the canoe, by repeated blows of a stone as heavy as he could +lift in both hands. Not content with this, he disengaged the outrigger, +and threw it, together with the mast and sail, into the sea. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY. + +THE RENCONTRE. + +THE TWO LEADERS--AN UNEXPECTED MEETING--THE COUNCIL OF WAR--AND WHAT +FOLLOWED. + + "Now screw your courage to the sticking point." + + "With many a stiff thwack, many a bang, + Hard crab-tree and old iron rang; + While none who saw them could divine + To which side conquest would incline." + +I had climbed to the top of the bank as my look-out station, while the +work of demolishing the canoe was going forward, and on perceiving that +Morton had accomplished his task, I was about to descend again, when +taking a final sweeping glance to the north and east, I observed several +figures moving rapidly along the beach, at a point somewhat less than a +quarter of a mile distant, of which my position commanded a view, and +coming towards us. In consequence of the indented character of the +shore, and the height of the bank bordering it for some distance, they +passed out of sight almost instantly. + +Without losing a moment, I sprang down to the shore to communicate what +I had seen. Max, who had been posted upon the beach to keep a look-out +northward, ran up at the same time, having also caught sight of the +persons approaching us, as they came round a projecting point. + +We now looked hurriedly around for some place of concealment, and Morton +pointed out a cluster of shrubs and rank weeds upon the verge of the +bluff just above us, from which, without any risk of being seen +ourselves, we could command a view of the shore and those passing along +it. There was but little time for deliberation or choice, and hastily +summoning Browne from his post, where he was still on the watch, we +scaled the almost perpendicular face of the height, with an ease and +celerity which would have been impossible under circumstances of less +excitement. + +In the spot which Morton had designated, tall grass and flaunting weeds +fringed the edge of the bluff, and we threw ourselves down among them, +and awaited, with almost suspended breath, the approach of the persons I +had seen. + +We were scarcely settled in our hiding-place, when a half-naked figure, +swinging a short club in one hand, rushed into view. Another, and +another followed, until I had counted seven of them. They were +well-made, athletic men, of a fine olive colour, with long straight hair +falling over their shoulders. The maro, which is a sort of fringed +belt, was their only clothing, and they carried spears and clubs of some +dark-grained wood. + +Among them was one striking figure. It was that of an old man, of large +and powerful frame, and a marked and resolute countenance, the +expression of which reminded me of an old lion which I had seen in some +itinerant menagerie, years ago. His massive head was covered with a +tangled mass of iron-grey hair that streamed like a mane over his broad +shoulders. The club which he carried might have served Hercules +himself; it certainly would have severely tasked the strength of an +ordinary man to wield it. I observed that all of them seemed to breathe +quickly as though they had been running, or exerting themselves +violently in some way; and the old man, who came last looked backward +once or twice, as they came opposite us, in a way that caused me to +suppose that they were pursued. The one who had first come in sight, +went towards the spot where the canoe was concealed, and upon seeing its +condition, uttered an exclamation of surprise that quickly brought the +others around him, when they all commenced gesticulating, and talking in +a low key, looking cautiously about every moment, as though apprehensive +that the perpetrators of the mischief might still be lurking near. + +The old man, however, neither talked nor gesticulated, but stooping +down, he examined the canoe narrowly, as if to ascertain the precise +extent of the injury done, and whether it admitted of any remedy. When +he had completed his inspection he arose, and shaking his head +sorrowfully, uttered some expression, which, accompanied as it was by a +threatening gesture with his ponderous club, sounded much like an +emphatic imprecation. Morton, who was crouching close beside me, +peering cautiously through the tufts of grass, at what was going on +below, gave a nervous start, as though the consciousness of the leading +part he had taken in the mischief so recently wrought, made him consider +himself the special object of the old giant's fury. One of them having +gone back a little way along the beach, as if to reconnoitre, now +returned in haste, and made some announcement, upon hearing which the +old man waved his hand, and the others immediately started off upon a +full run along the shore towards the south-west; he then followed them +at a somewhat less hurried pace. + +"They are certainly pursued, judging from their actions," whispered +Morton, "let us keep quiet, and see what comes next." + +But a few minutes had passed, when half a dozen savages, resembling in +their appearance and equipments those we had just seen, came in sight, +running at full speed, but with the air of pursuers rather than of +fugitives. Straggling bands of two or three each followed at short +intervals, all probably belonging to the same party, but scattered in +the heat of the chase. Altogether, there must have been as many as +fifteen or twenty of them. A tall, wild-looking savage, large-framed, +but gaunt as a greyhound, and with a kind of fierce energy in all his +movements, seemed to be the leader of the pursuing party. Just below us +on the beach, he turned and gave some order to a portion of his +followers, speaking with great rapidity, and pointing towards the bluff; +after which he darted off again along the shore at a speed that seemed +really marvellous. Those to whom he had spoken, immediately began, as +if in obedience to the order just given, to climb the bank, not a dozen +yards from the spot where we were lying. + +The object of this movement undoubtedly was, to anticipate and frustrate +any attempt on the part of the fugitives, to escape, by quitting the +shore and making towards the interior. The party thus detached had +probably been directed to continue the chase, keeping to the higher +ground. If so, they would pass quite near our place of concealment, and +there was some danger of our being discovered, to avoid which, we +crouched close to the ground, and remained perfectly silent and +motionless. The point where the savages were attempting to ascend was +steep and difficult, and several of them, apparently to disencumber +themselves for the effort of climbing, threw their clubs and spears +before them to the top. One of these weapons, a short, heavy club, fell +near me, and fearing that the owner might come to seek it, I hastily +cast it to a conspicuous place, free from vegetation, a little distance +from the bank, and nearer the spot where they were scaling it. But the +savage had probably noticed where it first fell, for the next moment +some one came running directly towards the place, and just as I was +expecting to see him stumble into the midst of us, a deep guttural +exclamation announced that we were discovered. Any further attempt at +concealment was clearly idle, and we sprang up at once; the man was +within three yards of us; he seemed quite as much startled as ourselves +at so sudden a rencontre, and after standing for a minute looking at us, +he turned and ran off to his fellows. + +"They will be back directly in a body," said Browne, "and we must decide +quickly what we are to do--whether to trust ourselves in their power, or +to make such resistance as we can, if they undertake to meddle with us." + +"I doubt if it would be safe to trust them," said Morton, "at any rate I +don't like the idea of risking it. There are but five or six of them; +the rest are far enough off by this time." + +"I wish Arthur were here," said Browne, anxiously; "he understands them +and their ways, and could tell us what we ought to do. I don't know +what the probability is of their injuring us if we throw aside our arms +and submit ourselves to them, and therefore I am loth to take the +responsibility of deciding the matter." + +Meantime the savages appeared to be also holding a consultation. They +stood at a short distance talking rapidly, and pointing towards us. At +length they began to approach the spot where we stood, but slowly, and +with some apparent hesitation. + +"Well," said Browne, "we must come to a decision quickly." + +"I distrust them entirely," exclaimed Morton, "I am for acting on the +defensive." + +"And I also," said Max, "I have no faith in them: but perhaps they won't +stop to interfere with us after all." + +"Very well, then," said Browne, "we will fight if we must. But let us +stand strictly on the defensive, and offer them no provocation." + +I could not help regarding this determination as unwise, but it was the +mind of the majority; and the present was no time for divided or +uncertain counsels. I therefore kept my thoughts to myself, and +grasping my cutlass, prepared for what was to follow. + +Browne and Max were armed with the "Feejee war-clubs," of the latter's +manufacture: they were long, heavy bludgeons, of the wood of the +casuarina, rather too ponderous to be wielded with one hand by a person +of ordinary strength. Morton and I were provided with cutlasses, which +we had preferred as being lighter and more convenient to carry. + +The savages were armed with spears and short clubs, the former of which +they presented towards us as they advanced. + +I confess that my heart began to thump against my breast with unwonted +and unpleasant rapidity and violence. I dare say it was the same with +my companions; but externally we were perfectly composed and steady. + +"There are just five of them," said Browne, "two antagonists for me, and +one apiece for the rest of you. If any one interferes with my two I +shall consider it a personal affront." + +"Confound those long spears!" exclaimed Max, with a disturbed air, "they +have a mighty uncomfortable look, with those fish-bone barbs at the end +of them." + +The still more "uncomfortable" thought that those fish-bone barbs were +perhaps poisoned, suggested itself to me, but I considered it expedient +to say nothing on the subject at the present juncture. + +"Pshaw!" cried Browne, "the long spears are easily managed, if you will +only remember my fencing-lessons, and keep your nerves steady. It is +the simplest thing in the world to put aside a thrust from such a +weapon: depend upon it, those short clubs will prove much more +dangerous." + +The savages, having now had a sufficient opportunity to note our +equipments, and our youthful appearance, quickly lost all hesitation, +and came confidently forward until they stood facing us, at the distance +of but ten or twelve feet. Then, seeing that we maintained a defensive +attitude, they paused, and one of them, stepping a little before the +rest, spoke to us in a loud and authoritative voice, at the same time +motioning us to throw aside our weapons. + +"Can't you muster a few words of their heathen talk, Archer?" said +Browne, "perhaps if we could only understand one another, we should find +there is no occasion for us to quarrel. It seems so irrational to run +the risk of having our brains knocked out, if it can be avoided." + +I shook my head: the few phrases which I had picked up from Arthur and +Eiulo, could be of no use for the present purpose, even if they should +be understood. + +The spokesman, a sinewy, hard-favoured savage, whose native ugliness was +enhanced by two scars that seamed his broad squat face, repeated the +words he had before uttered, in a higher key, and with a still more +imperative air, accompanying what he said, with gestures, which +sufficiently explained what he required. + +"If I understand you, my friend," said Browne, appearing to forget in +the excitement of the moment that what he was saying would be utterly +unintelligible to the person he addressed, "If I understand you, your +demand is unreasonable. Throw away your own weapons first; you are the +most numerous party:" and he imitated the gestures which the other had +made use of. + +The savage shook his head impatiently, and keeping his eyes steadfastly +fixed upon Browne, he began to speak in a quiet tone. But I saw that +though looking at Browne, his words were addressed to his companions, +who gradually spread themselves out in front of us and without making +any openly hostile demonstrations, handled their weapons in what seemed +to me a suspicious manner. + +"Be on your guard," said I, speaking in my ordinary tone, and without +looking round, "I am sure they are meditating sudden mischief." + +Scarcely were the words uttered, when, with the quickness of lightning, +the spokesman hurled his club at Browne, narrowly missing his head, then +bringing his spear into a horizontal position, he made a thrust full at +his chest with his whole force. + +Browne, however, was on his guard, and knocking aside the point of the +spear, he swung round his long club; and, before the other could draw +back, brought it down with such effect upon his right shoulder that his +arm fell powerless to his side, and the spear dropped from his grasp. +Browne promptly set his foot upon it, and the owner, astonished and +mortified, rather than intimidated at his repulse, shrunk back without +any attempt to regain it. + +This attack was so sudden, and so soon foiled--being but a blow aimed, +parried, and returned, in a single breath--that no one on either side +had an opportunity to interfere or join in it. The other savages now +uttered a yell, and were about to rush upon us: but the leader, as he +appeared to be, motioned them back, and they drew off to a short +distance. If we were for a moment inclined to hope that we should now +be left unmolested, we soon learned the groundlessness of such an +expectation. The discomfited savage, instead of being discouraged by +the rough treatment he had received, was only rendered more dangerous +and resolute by it; and he prepared to renew the attack at once, having +taken from one of his companions a club somewhat heavier and longer than +his own. + +"I wish," said Max, drawing a long breath as he eyed these ominous +proceedings, "that we had a few of Colt's revolvers, to keep these +fellows at a respectable distance: I confess I don't like the notion of +coming to such close quarters with them as they seem to contemplate." + +"A genuine Yankee wish!" answered Browne, grasping his club with both +hands, and planting himself firmly, to receive the expected onset; "to +make it completely in character you have only to wish, in addition, for +a mud breastwork, or a few cotton bags, between us and our friends +yonder." + +"Which I do, with all my heart!" responded Max, fervently. + +"Let Kaiser Maximilien represent the high Dutch on this occasion," said +Morton, edging himself forward abreast of Browne, who had stationed +himself a trifle in advance of the rest of us; "he has no claim to speak +for the Yankees except the mere accident of birth. Archer and I will +uphold the honour of the stars and stripes without either revolvers or +cotton bags." + +"Fair play!" cried Max, pushing Browne aside, "I won't have you for a +breastwork at any rate, however much I may desire one of turf or cotton +bales." And we arranged ourselves side by side. + +"Really," said Morton, with a faint apology for a smile, "it appears +that we have to do with tacticians--they are going to outflank us." +This remark was caused by our antagonists separating themselves; the +leader advancing directly towards us, while the others approached, two +on the right and two on the left. + +"Well," said Browne, "we shall have to form a hollow square, officers in +the centre, as the Highlanders did at Waterloo, and then I shall claim +the privilege of my rank." + +But our pleasantry was, as may easily be imagined, rather forced. Our +adversaries were now evidently bent upon mischief, and thoroughly in +earnest. We were none of us veterans, and notwithstanding an assumption +of coolness, overstrained and unnatural under the circumstances, our +breath came thick and painfully with the intense excitement of the +moment. + +At a signal from their scarred leader, the savages rushed upon us +together. I can give no very clear account of the confused struggle +that ensued, as I was not at the time in a state of mind favourable to +calm and accurate observation. A few blows and thrusts were exchanged; +at first cautiously, and at as great a distance as our weapons would +reach; then more rapidly and fiercely, until we became all mingled +together, and soon each of us was too fully occupied in defending +himself to be able to pay much attention to any thing else. At the +commencement of the attack I was standing next to Browne, who being +evidently singled out by his former opponent, advanced a step or two to +meet him. He skilfully parried several downright blows from the heavy +club of the latter, who in his turn dodged a swinging stroke which +Browne aimed at his head, and instantly closed with him. The next +moment they went whirling past me towards the edge of the bank, locked +together in a desperate grapple, which was the last that I saw of them. +I was assailed at the outset by an active and athletic savage, armed +with a short club. He was exceedingly anxious to close, which I, quite +naturally, was as desirous to prevent, knowing that I should stand no +chance in such a struggle, against his superior weight and strength. +While I was doing my best to keep him off with my cutlass, and he was +eagerly watching an opportunity to come to closer quarters, Morton, +locked in the grasp of a brawny antagonist, came driving directly +between us, where they fell together, and lay rolling and struggling +upon the ground at our feet. My opponent, abandoning me for a moment, +was in the act of aiming a blow at Morton's head, when I sprang forward, +and cut him across the forehead with my cutlass. The blood instantly +followed the stroke, and gushing in torrents over his face, seemed to +blind him: he struck three or four random blows in the air, then reeled +and fell heavily to the ground. Throwing a hasty glance around, I +perceived Max among some bushes at a little distance defending himself +with difficulty against a savage, who attacked him eagerly with one of +those long spears, towards which he entertained such an aversion. +Browne was nowhere to be seen. Morton and his strong antagonist were +still grappling on the ground, but the latter had gained the advantage, +and was now endeavouring, while he held Morton under him, to reach a +club lying near, with which to put an end to the struggle. Another of +the enemy was sitting a few steps off apparently disabled, with the +blood streaming from a wound in the neck. I hastened to Morton's +assistance, whereupon his opponent, seeing my approach, sprang up and +seized the club which he had been reaching after. But Morton gained his +feet almost as soon as the other, and instantly grappled with him again. +At this moment I heard Max's voice, in a tone of eager warning, +calling, "Look-out, Archer!" and turning, I saw the savage I supposed to +be disabled, with uplifted arm, in the very act of bringing down his +club upon my head. I have a confused recollection of instinctively +putting up my cutlass, in accordance with Browne's instructions for +meeting the "seventh" stroke in the broad-sword exercise. I have since +become convinced by reflection, (to say nothing of experience), that the +principles of the broad-sword exercise, however admirable in themselves, +cannot be applied without some modification when iron-wood clubs, with +huge knobs of several pounds' weight at the ends of them, are +substituted for claymores. However, I had no time then to make the +proper distinctions, and as instead of dodging the blow, I endeavoured +to parry it, my guard was beaten down--and that is all that I can relate +of the conflict, from my own knowledge and personal observation. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY ONE. + +RECONNOITRING BY NIGHT. + +THE SEARCH RENEWED--THE CAPTIVES--ATOLLO AND THE TEWANS. + + "Trembling, they start and glance behind + At every common forest-sound-- + The whispering trees, the moaning wind, + The dead leaves falling to the ground; + As on with stealthy steps they go, + Each thicket seems to hide the foe." + +From the moment when startled by Max's warning cry, I turned and saw the +uplifted club of the savage suspended over my head, all is blank in my +memory, until opening my eyes with a feeling of severe pain, and no +distinct consciousness where I was, I found Browne and Max bending over +me, my head being supported upon the knee of the former. + +"Well, how do you feel?" inquired he. + +I stared at him a minute or two without answering, not understanding +very clearly what was the matter with me, though having at the same time +a vague impression that all was not quite right. Gradually I collected +my ideas, and at length, when Browne repeated his question the third +time, I had formed a pretty correct theory as to the cause of my present +supine attitude, and the unpleasant sensations which I experienced. + +"I feel rather queer about the head and shoulders," I said, in answer to +his inquiry: "I must have got a pretty severe blow. I suppose!" + +"Yes," said Max, whose uneasy look ill agreed with his words and manner, +"see what it is to be blessed with a tough cranium; such a whack would +have crushed mine like an egg-shell; but it has only enlarged your bump +of reverence a little." + +"Nothing serious has happened, then--no one is badly hurt," said I, +trying to look around; but the attempt gave my neck so severe a wrench, +and caused such extreme pain, that I desisted. + +"No one has received any worse injury than yourself," answered +Browne--"at least, none of us." + +"And the savages--what has become of them?" + +"We have nothing to apprehend from them at present, I think--they have +been gone but a short time, and Morton is in the tree yonder, keeping +watch for their return--do you feel now as if you can stand up and +walk?" + +"Certainly, I can; with the exception of the pain in my head, and a +stiffness about the neck and shoulders, I am all right, I believe." And +in order to convince Browne, who seemed somewhat sceptical on the point, +notwithstanding my assurances, I got up and walked about--carrying my +head somewhat rigidly, I dare say, for it gave me a severe twinge at +every movement. + +"Well," said he, "since that is the case, I think the wisest thing we +can do is to leave this neighbourhood at once." + +While Max went to summon Morton from his post of observation, Browne +gave me a brief and hurried account of what had occurred after I had +been felled, as related. + +He, and the leader of the savages, whom I had last seen struggling upon +the brink of the height, had gone over it together; the latter, falling +underneath, had been severely bruised, while Browne himself received but +little injury. + +Leaving his adversary groaning and, as he supposed, mortally hurt by the +fall, he had climbed again to the higher ground, and reached it at a +very critical moment. + +Morton was struggling at disadvantage with the same formidable +antagonist from whom he had before been for a moment in such imminent +danger; and Max was dodging about among the bushes, sorely pressed by +another of the enemy with one of those long spears, against which he +entertained so violent a prejudice. I had just been disposed of in the +manner above hinted at, by the savage who had been wounded in the neck +by Morton, at the very commencement of the affray, and he was now at +liberty to turn his attention either to Max or Morton, each of whom was +already hard bested. + +Browne immediately fell upon my conqueror, almost as unexpectedly as the +latter had attacked me, and by a sudden blow stretched him senseless +upon the ground. He next relieved Morton, by disabling his adversary. +The two, then, hastened to Max's succour, but the savage who was engaged +with him, did not deem it prudent to await the approach of this +reinforcement, and made off into the forest. They then gathered up all +the weapons of the enemy, permitting Morton's recent antagonist to limp +off without molestation. The man whom I had wounded was by this time +sitting up, wiping the blood from his face and eyes; the other, also, +manifested signs of returning consciousness; but having been deprived of +their clubs and spears, no danger was apprehended from them. My three +companions had then carried me to the spot where we now were, from +whence they had witnessed the departure of the rest of our foes. Even +the man whom Browne had left dying on the shore, as he supposed, had +managed to crawl off at last. + +As soon as Max and Morton returned, we set out at once, weary as we +were, for the islet in the brook, without any very definite notion as to +what was to be done next. The prudence of removing from our present +neighbourhood was obvious, but we were still too much discomposed and +excited by what had just taken place, to have been able to decide upon +any further step, even had not the momentary apprehension of the return +of the savages in greater numbers rendered every thing like calm +deliberation entirely out of the question. + +We took the precaution to choose our path over the hardest and dryest +ground, in order to afford the savages the fewest possible facilities +for tracing our course. By the time we reached the islet, we were +completely out by the fatigue and excitement of the day; we must have +walked at least twelve miles since morning. + +After partaking sparingly of the food which we had so fortunately +brought with us, accompanied by copious draughts of water from the +brook, we began to feel somewhat refreshed. Still we were greatly +disheartened by the gloomy and distressing circumstances, in which we +found ourselves so suddenly involved; the great uncertainty as to the +fate of our companions, and the danger that threatened our own lives +from the vindictive pursuit of a numerous body of savages. All our +energy and courage seemed for the present, at least, to be completely +broken. Browne laid down upon a couch of dry fern beneath the +many-pillared Aoa. He looked pale and ill--more so, I thought, than the +mere effects of excitement and over-exertion could account for. + +Morton soon revived the question of what was now to be done. + +"I suppose we must remain here for the present, at least," said Browne, +"and defend ourselves, if attacked, as well as we can." + +Max suggested Palm-Islet as a place of greater security and one where we +should run less risk of discovery. + +"And meantime," said Morton, "are we to give up all attempt to find +Arthur and the rest?" + +"I hardly know what we can do," answered Browne, with a perplexed and +discouraged air; "we have no clue to guide us in a fresh search. If +these savages inhabit the island,--or if they remain here,--we cannot +hope to escape them long, after what has taken place; we must fall into +their hands sooner or later, and if they have captured our companions, I +am willing for my part, that it should be so. I doubt if we acted +wisely in resisting them at all,--but it is now too late to think of +that." + +We continued to talk the matter over for some time, but without coming +to any definite resolution, and at length Browne dropped asleep, while +we were still discussing it. + +As it began to grow dark, Max became disturbed and excited. He was +possessed by a vague conviction, for which he was unable to account, +that our lost companions were in some imminent peril, from which it was +in our power to rescue them. He was anxious to do something, and yet +seemed uncertain what to propose. Morton was equally desirous of making +a further effort to discover our lost friends; he was also quite clear +and explicit, in his notion of what ought to be done. His theory +appeared to be, that they had fallen into the hands of the natives, +whose encampment or place of abode, (temporary or otherwise), was on the +north-eastern side of the island. He further supposed that some feud or +quarrel having arisen among themselves, the worsted party had fled along +the beach as we had witnessed, pursued by their victorious enemies,-- +that in the meantime, their captives had been left, (perhaps unguarded), +at the encampment or landing-place of the natives. Morton was as minute +and detailed in stating this hypothetical case, as if he had either +actually seen or dreamed the whole. He proposed that as soon as the +moon rose, some of us should set off for the shore, and proceed along +the beach, in the direction from which we had seen the natives come, by +pursuing which course, he was confident we should be able to learn +something respecting our companions. This he wished to undertake alone, +saying that one person could prosecute the search as well as four, and +with much less risk of discovery: if successful in ascertaining any +thing definite, he should, he said, immediately return and apprise the +rest of us. Max eagerly embraced this suggestion, and wished to decide +by lot, which of us should carry it into execution, insisting that, +otherwise, he would either set off at once by himself, or accompany +Morton. + +At length Browne awoke; he said that he had derived much benefit from +his two hours' sleep, and was now ready for any necessary exertion. + +He also approved of Morton's plan, but objected to his going alone, and +was at first in favour of setting out all together. At last it was +settled that the search should be undertaken by two of us, the other two +awaiting the result at the islet. Browne then prepared four twigs for +the purpose of deciding the matter by lot, it being agreed that the one +drawing the longest, should have the choice of going or remaining, and +should also select his companion. On comparing lots after we had drawn, +mine proved to be longest; and having decided upon going, I felt bound +to name Morton as my associate, since he had been the first to suggest, +and the most earnest in urging the adventure. + +An hour after dark the moon rose, and soon lighted the forest +sufficiently to enable us to see our way through it. We then armed +ourselves with a cutlass apiece, and taking leave of Max and Browne, +proceeded up the brook to the fall, where we crossed it, and, following +the rocky ridge, which ran at right angles with it, we endeavoured to +hold, as nearly as possible, the course we had taken in the morning. +After leaving the stream, a good part of our way was through the open +country, where there was nothing to prevent us from seeing or being seen +at a considerable distance in the bright moonlight. But the only +alternatives were, either to creep on our hands and knees, the whole +distance from the edge of the forest to the shore, and so avail +ourselves of such concealment as the rank grass and weeds afforded,--or +to push boldly and rapidly forward, at the risk of being seen: we +preferred the latter, and soon got over this dangerous ground, running +part of the time, in the most exposed places. On reaching the bluff, +over the beach, we lay down among the bushes a few moments to recover +our breath, and reconnoitre, before taking a fresh start. All was +perfectly silent around us, and no living thing could be seen. When +sufficiently rested, we proceeded cautiously along the edge of the +height, where we could command a view both of the beach below, and of +the open country inland. The bluff extended about a quarter of a mile, +when it gradually sunk to the level of the beach, and was succeeded by a +low, flat shore, lined with large trees. We had gone but a little way +along it after this change, when we came quite unexpectedly upon an +inlet, or salt-water creek, setting in to the land, and bordered so +thickly with mangroves, that we narrowly escaped going headlong into it, +while endeavouring to force our way through the bushes to continue our +course along the beach. + +It was some twenty yards wide; but I could not see how far inland it +ran, on account of the immense trees that overhung it on every side, +springing up in great numbers just behind the low border of mangroves. +Holding fast by one of these bushes, I was leaning forward over the +water, looking hard into the gloom, to gain, if possible, some notion of +the extent of the inlet and the distance round it, when Morton grasped +my arm suddenly-- + +"What is that, under the trees on the opposite shore?" whispered he; "is +it not a boat?" + +Looking in the direction in which he pointed, I could distinguish some +object on the opposite side of the inlet, that might from its size and +shape be a boat of some kind, as he supposed, and, continuing to gaze +steadily, I made out quite plainly, against the dark masses of foliage +on the further shore, what appeared to be a white mast. A profound +silence reigned all around us, and while I was still peering into the +heavy shadow of the trees, I heard a sound which resembled a deep, and +long-drawn sigh, followed by an exclamation, as of a person in bodily +pain. + +"We must get round to the other side," whispered Morton, "and see what +this means." + +We backed out of the mangroves with the utmost caution, and inch by +inch: when we had got to such a distance as to render this extreme +circumspection no longer necessary, we commenced a wide circuit around +the inlet, which proved to be only a small cove, or indentation in the +shore, extending less than a hundred yards inland. In approaching it +again on the opposite side, we resumed all our former stealthiness of +movement, feeling that our lives in all probability depended upon our +caution. + +When, at last, we had got, as we supposed, quite near the place where we +had seen the boat, we proceeded, by creeping on our hands and knees +through the bushes for short distances, and then rising and looking +about, to ascertain our position. + +It was so dark, and the undergrowth was so dense--the moonlight scarcely +penetrating the thick foliage--that nothing could be distinguished at +the distance even of a few yards, and there was some danger that we +might come suddenly, and before we were aware, upon those whom we +supposed to be already so near us. While thus blindly groping our way +towards the edge of the inlet, I heard a voice almost beside me, which +said-- + +"Will they never come back?--Are they going to leave us here to starve?" + +The voice was that of Johnny's beyond the possibility of mistake. +Turning in the direction from which it proceeded, I saw a little to the +right three figures upon the ground at the foot of a large casuarina. +Another voice, as familiar, almost immediately answered-- + +"I only fear that they will return too soon: have patience! in a little +while I shall have gnawed through this rope, and then I do not despair +of being able to get my hands free also." + +This was enough to show how matters stood. + +"Are you alone?" said I, in a low voice, but loud enough to be heard by +those beneath the casuarina. + +There was an exclamation of joyful surprise from Johnny; then Arthur +answered, "If that is you, Archer, come and help us, for we are tied +hand and foot. You have nothing to fear; our captors have left us quite +alone." + +We now came forward without further hesitation. They were all bound +fast, their hands being tied behind them, in addition to which, each was +fastened to the tree by a rope of sennit. It would be difficult to say +which party seemed most rejoiced at this sudden meeting. As soon as +they were liberated, we embraced one another with tears of joy. + +"Let us leave this place as fast as possible," said Arthur, as soon as +he became a little composed, "I expect the return of the natives every +moment,--and we have more to dread from them than you can guess. But I +find I am so stiff after lying bound here all day, that I can hardly +walk. Now, Johnny, take my hand, and try to get along. How is it with +you, Eiulo--do you feel able to travel fast?" + +The latter appeared to understand the drift of the question, and +answered by frisking and jumping about in exultation at his recovered +liberty. + +Instead of returning by the way by which we had come, along the shore, +we pushed on in a straight line, in the supposed direction of the islet, +in order to avoid the risk of meeting the natives. After toiling for an +hour through the woods, we emerged into the open country to the east of +the rocky ridge that traversed the course of the stream. During this +time, we had been too fully occupied in picking our way with the +necessary caution, besides the constant apprehension of suddenly +encountering the natives, to ask for any explanations. But now we began +to feel somewhat reassured, and as we hastened on towards the islet, +Arthur very briefly informed us, that they had yesterday been suddenly +surprised by a party of six natives, soon after leaving us at the islet, +and hurried off to the shore: that they had been left by their captors +this morning, secured as we had found them, and had remained in that +condition until released by us. He added that he had more to +communicate by-and-bye. + +The joy of Browne and Max at our return, accompanied by the lost ones, +may be imagined--but it can scarcely be described. In fact, I am +obliged to confess that we were such children, as to enact quite "a +scene," at this unexpected meeting. Heartfelt and sincere were the +thanksgivings we that night rendered to Him, who had kept us in perfect +safety, and reunited us, after a separation made so distressing by our +uncertainty as to each other's fate. + +After Arthur, Eiulo, and Johnny, had appeased their hunger with the +scanty remains of our supply of provisions, the two latter lay down upon +a bed of ferns beneath the Aoa, and were soon sleeping as soundly and +peacefully, as though all our troubles and dangers were now at an end. +How easily they put in practice the philosophy that vexes itself not +about the future! Exercising the happy privilege of childhood, they +cast upon others, in whom they placed implicit confidence, the +responsibility of thinking and planning for them--free from all care and +anxiety themselves. + +Arthur now gave us a more detailed account of what had occurred since +our separation. + +"Do you remember," said he, when he had finished, "hearing Eiulo, in +talking of affairs at Tewa, make mention of a person named Atollo?" + +"Atollo?" said Browne, "was not that the name of an uncle of his whom he +made out to be a strange, unnatural sort of monster, even for a heathen, +and who concocted a plot for the murder of his own father and brother, +and afterwards attempted to kill Eiulo by rolling rocks down a precipice +after him in the woods!" + +"The same," answered Arthur. "I hardly supposed that you would have +remembered it, as no one but myself seemed to take much interest in +Eiulo's reminiscences of Tewa, the rest of you being obliged to get them +at second-hand, through me as interpreter. Well, that Atollo has +reached this island in some way, with a band of followers: it was by +them that we were captured yesterday; it is from his power that we have +just escaped." + +"What is this Atollo like?" inquired Browne. "Is he a tall, +large-framed man, but gaunt and spare as a half-starved hound?" + +"Yes, with sharp features, and a wild, restless eye." + +"Why, then," continued Browne, turning to me, "it was he, who was at the +head of the second party of natives that we saw this morning by the +shore." + +We now gave Arthur an account of our rencontre with the savages; but no +particular mention was made of the destruction of the canoe, or of the +lion-like old man who seemed to be the leader of those who fled. + +"And little Eiulo's dread of this strange uncle of his," said Browne, +"is then so great, that he preferred running away to us again, to +remaining with his own people?" + +"Incredible as it may seem," answered Arthur, "I am convinced that his +fears are not without foundation, and I even believe that this man +intended to take his life, and would have done so, had we not escaped." + +"Incredible, indeed!" exclaimed Browne, "and what could be the motive +for so atrocious a crime?" + +"I know of none that seems sufficient to account for it fully, and I am +therefore almost forced to regard the man as a monomaniac." + +Arthur thought that Atollo had probably made some further desperate +attempt against his brother at Tewa, and, having failed in it, had fled +hither with a part of his followers, among whom some quarrel had since +arisen, in the prosecution of which they had been engaged, when we +witnessed the flight and pursuit along the shore. This, however, was +mere conjecture: they had talked but little in his presence, and he had +not been able to learn any thing from the conversation which he had +overheard, as to the cause of their coming hither. Eiulo had been +questioned minutely by them, and from him they had ascertained that +there were four more of us upon the island. + +Morton inquired of Arthur, whether he apprehended that any serious +effort would be made by the savages to find us, and what kind of +treatment we should probably receive in case we should fall into their +power. + +"That search will be made for us," answered the latter, "I have not the +slightest doubt; and I do not think that we can look for any mercy, if +we fall into their hands, since to-day's affray and escape." + +"This feud among themselves," said Browne, "may keep them so busy as to +afford no leisure for troubling themselves about us. I have some hope +that they will use those ugly-looking clubs upon one another, to such +purpose, as to rid us of them altogether." + +"That old giant," said Max, "who ran away, with such an awkward air, as +if he wasn't at all used to it, will certainly do some mischief if they +once come to blows." + +"Ay," pursued Browne, "though he didn't look quite so wicked and like a +warlock, as the gaunt, wild-eyed heathen that led the chase, I will +warrant him his full match in fair and equal fight, man to man." + +"Well," said Arthur, who during the latter part of this conversation had +been apparently engaged in serious and perplexed thought, "for to-night, +at least, we are in no danger. Let us now take our necessary rest, and +to-morrow we shall be fresher and better prepared to decide upon the +course of action to be adopted." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY TWO. + +THE SINGLE COMBAT. + +PREPARATIONS FOR DEFENCE--A DEMAND AND REFUSAL--THE TWO CHAMPIONS. + + "On many a bloody field before-- + Man of the dark and evil heart!-- + We've met--pledged enemies of yore, + But now we meet no more to part-- + Till to my gracious liege and lord, + By thee of broad domains bereft, + From thy red hand and plotting brain, + No fear of future wrong is left." + +The sense of surrounding danger with which we laid down that night upon +our beds of fern beneath the Aoa, continued to press darkly upon our +minds even in sleep, and awake us at an early hour to confront anew, the +perplexities and terrors of our situation. + +Arthur, in whose better understanding of the habits and character of the +savages we confided, far from affording us any additional encouragement, +spoke in a manner calculated to overthrow the very hopes, upon which we +had been resting. + +We had supposed that they could have no motive but the desire of +revenge, for seeking or molesting us, and as none of their number had +been killed, or in all probability even dangerously injured in the +rencontre with us, we trusted that this motive would not prove strong +enough to incite them to any earnest or long-continued search. But +Arthur hinted at another object, more controlling in the mind of their +strange leader than any desire to prosecute a petty revenge, which would +impel him to seek for and pursue us, for the purpose of getting Eiulo +again into his power. This enmity--so fixed and implacable--against a +mere child, seemed incredible, even after all that had been said or +suggested in explanation of it, and the explanations themselves were +far-fetched, and almost destitute of plausibility. + +And how could we hope to escape a pursuit so determined and persevering +as Arthur anticipated? Whither could we flee for safety? To think of +successful resistance to Atollo and his band, if discovered by them, +seemed idle. Max suggested Palm-Islet as the most secure retreat with +which we were acquainted. But Arthur now broached a more startling +plan. "Nowhere upon this island," said he, "can we longer consider +ourselves secure. The only step that holds out any prospect of safety +is to leave it in the yawl, and sail for Tewa." + +"Is there any certainty," said Browne, "that we can find it? Do we even +know positively where, or in what direction from this place it is; and +shall we not incur the risk of getting lost again at sea?" + +"I would rather take that risk," said Max, "than remain here, within +reach of these savages--any thing is preferable to falling into their +power." + +"I confess," said Arthur, "that we know nothing certainly in regard to +the distance, or even the direction of Tewa, but I think we have good +reason to believe that it lies about forty or fifty miles to the +northward." + +We could not, however, bring ourselves thus suddenly to adopt a +resolution so momentous, and it was at last tacitly decided to continue +for the present, at least, at the islet. + +"If we are to remain here," said Arthur, on perceiving that there was no +disposition to act immediately upon any of the suggestions which had +been made, "let us make such preparation as we can, to defend ourselves +if it shall be necessary." + +This surprised us all; it seemed worse than useless to think of forcible +resistance to a party as numerous as that of Atollo; coming from Arthur +such a suggestion was to me doubly surprising. + +"I see," said he, "that the notion of attempting to defend ourselves, if +discovered, seems to you a desperate one--but I believe it to be our +only course--we can expect no mercy from Atollo." + +"Surely," said Morton, "they can have no sufficient motive for murdering +us in cold blood. But, fresh from another conflict with them, we could +not perhaps look for forbearance, if in their power. Against _us_ they +cannot now, it seems to me, cherish any feelings so vindictive as you +imply." + +"And suppose it to be so? Suppose that they merely aim at Eiulo's life, +without wishing to molest us?" + +"I don't fear that I shall be misunderstood, if I speak plainly," +answered Morton, after a pause. "It seems, from what you have +intimated, that for some reason they wish to get Eiulo into their hands; +they are his own people, and their leader is his own uncle; have we any +right to refuse him to them?" + +"Why, Morton!" interposed Browne, warmly, "what cold-blooded doctrine is +this?" + +"Have patience, a minute, and hear me out--I cannot bring myself to +believe that they actually intend him harm; I think there must be some +mistake or misapprehension in regard to this alleged design against his +life, utterly improbable as it is in itself." + +"But Arthur understands all that, far better than you or I," interrupted +Browne, once more, "and it is clear that the poor child stands in mortal +dread of this man." + +"I was going to add," resumed Morton, "that even if this danger does +exist, it is entirely out of our power to afford him protection against +it: we should merely throw away our lives, in a desperate and +unprofitable attempt. It may seem unfeeling to talk of giving him up; +but will not these people be far more likely to act with cruelty, both +towards him and us, after being excited and enraged by a fruitless +opposition? I have spoken frankly: but whatever is soberly determined +upon, however unwise in my view, I will abide by." + +"I admit," answered Arthur, "that there is little prospect of success in +a conflict with them: but I regard our fate as certain if we submit, and +we can but be slain in resisting. I am so fully satisfied of Atollo's +designs in respect to him, that I should feel in giving him up, as if I +were an accessary to his murder." + +"Let us rather defend ourselves to the very last extremity," said +Browne, earnestly, "if we are so unfortunate as to be found." + +"If," said Max, with an excited air,--"if I really believed they would +kill Eiulo, I should say, never give him up, whatever the consequences +may be;--and I do think this Atollo must be an incarnate fiend. I don't +believe it will make any difference in their treatment of us whether we +resist or not." + +"O no!" cried Johnny, who had been listening eagerly to this +conversation, while Eiulo stood looking wistfully on, as if he knew that +it concerned him. "O no! don't give him up to that wicked man. I would +fight, myself, if I had my bow and arrows, but they took them away from +me: can't we hide ourselves in the banyan tree?--they never will think +of looking for us there?" + +"That is not a bad suggestion," said Morton, "and if we should be +discovered, it is a strong place to defend. We can move easily and +quickly about on that strong horizontal framework of branches, and it +will be a hazardous undertaking to climb those straight smooth trunks, +in our faces." + +It seemed, in fact, as if a party stationed upon the roof, (as it might +be termed), of this singular tree, would occupy a vantage-ground from +which it would require strong odds to dislodge them, and the assailants, +unless provided with fire-arms, or missile weapons, would labour under +almost insurmountable difficulties. + +Arthur discovered a place where it was easy to climb quickly into the +tree, and requested us all to note it particularly, in order that we +might effect a retreat without loss of time, if it should become +necessary. Johnny and Eiulo were to take refuge there at the first +alarm. + +Browne proceeded to cut a number of bludgeons from stout saplings, which +he then deposited in different places among the branches, ready to be +used, in defending ourselves, if pursued thither. Max collected a +quantity of large stones, and fragments of rock, along the shore, and +from the bed of the brook, and wrapping them in parcels of leaves, he +hoisted them into the roof of the grove-tree, and secured them there. + +Morton surveyed these preparations with a grave smile, and none of us, I +think, placed much reliance on their efficacy. We trusted that there +would be no occasion to resort to them. + +The supply of provisions which we had brought with us was exhausted, but +the painful suspense, and constant apprehension incident to our present +circumstances, long prevented any thought of hunger. It was not until +the day had passed without any alarm, and it was beginning to grow dark, +that we experienced any inclination to eat. Arthur and I then went in +search of food, but could obtain none, except a quantity of pandanus +cones which we gathered from a group of trees near the waterfall. The +kernels of these were the only food that any of us tasted that day. + +At night, it was deemed best to keep a watch, in order to guard against +any surprise. As we made our arrangements for this purpose, my thoughts +reverted to the time of our sufferings at sea in the boat. But in our +present position, sought and pursued by malignant human beings, bent +upon taking our lives, and who might at that moment be prowling near, +there was something more fearful than any peril from the elements, or +even the dread of starvation itself. + +But the night passed without disturbance or alarm of any kind, and in +the morning we began to indulge the hope that Arthur had overrated the +strength of the feelings by which Atollo was actuated, and to shake off +in some degree the profound depression of the preceding evening. + +With the abatement of our fears and the partial return of tranquillity +of mind, we became more sensible to the demands of hunger. Max and +Morton ventured a little way into the adjoining forest in search of +birds, and returned in less than half an hour with about a dozen +pigeons, which they had knocked down with sticks and stones. Arthur had +in the meantime caught quite a string of the yellow fish which had so +perseveringly rejected all Max's overtures a couple of days since. +Morton then kindled a fire to cook our food, though we felt some +hesitation about this, being aware that the smoke might betray us to the +savages, if they should happen to be at the time in the neighbourhood. +But Max declared that falling into their hands was a fate preferable to +starvation, and that rather than eat raw fish and birds, he would incur +the risk of discovery by means of the fire. In the absence of cooking +utensils, we hastily scooped out a Polynesian oven, and covered the +bottom with a layer of heated stones, upon which the food, carefully +wrapped in leaves, was deposited: another layer of hot stones was placed +on top, and the whole then covered with fresh leaves and earth. This is +the method adopted by the natives for baking bread-fruit and fish, and +with the exception of the trouble and delay involved, it is equal to any +thing that civilised ingenuity has devised for similar purposes, from +the old-fashioned Dutch-oven to the most recent style of "improved +kitchen ranges", with which I am acquainted. The heat being equally +diffused throughout the entire mass, and prevented from escaping by the +wrapping of leaves and earth, the subject operated upon, whether fish, +fowl, or vegetable, is thoroughly and uniformly cooked. + +Max had just opened the oven, and was busily engaged in taking out and +distributing the contents, while the rest of us were gathered in a group +around the spot, when Eiulo suddenly uttered a shrill cry, and springing +up, stood gazing towards the west side of the brook, as if paralysed by +terror. + +Looking up, we saw two natives standing at the edge of the wood quietly +watching us. One of them I at once recognised as the lithe and active +leader, whom I had seen upon the shore in swift pursuit of the +fugitives. + +Our first impulse, was to spring at once into the Aoa, according to the +understanding to which we had partially come, as to what we were to do +if discovered. But a second glance showed that there were but two +enemies in sight, and as Arthur, to whom we looked for an example, gave +no signal for such a retreat, we hastily snatched up our weapons, and +placed ourselves beside him. + +Atollo's quick eye--for it was he--ran from one to another of us, until +it rested upon Eiulo, when coming down to the margin of the brook, he +pronounced his name in a low, clear voice, and beckoned him with his +hand to come over to him. + +Pale and trembling, like a bird under the charm of the serpent, Eiulo +made two or three uncertain steps towards him, as if about mechanically +to obey the summons: then, as Johnny seized the skirt of his wrapper, +and called out to him, "not to mind that wicked man," he paused, and +looked round upon us with a glance, half appealing, half inquiring, +which said more plainly than words--"Must I go?--Can you protect me--and +will you?" + +Arthur now stepped before him, and addressed some words to Atollo in his +own language, the purport of which I could only guess. + +The other listened attentively without evincing any surprise, and then +made answer, speaking rapidly and by jerks as it were, and scanning us +all the while with the eye of a hawk. + +When he had finished, Arthur turned to us. "This man requires us, he +said, to give up Eiulo to him; he claims him as his brother's son, and +says that he wishes to convey him home to Tewa. He promises to leave us +unmolested if we comply, and threatens us with death if we refuse: you +see it concerns us all--what do you say?" + +Arthur was very pale. He looked towards Morton, who said nothing, but +stood leaning against one of the pillars of the Aoa, with his eyes +steadfastly bent upon the ground. + +"Ask Eiulo," said Browne, "if this man is his uncle." + +The question was accordingly put, and the trembling boy answered +hesitatingly, that he did not know--but he believed that he was. + +"Ask him," pursued Browne, "if he is willing to go with him." + +Arthur put the question formally, and Eiulo, grasping his arm, while +Johnny still held fast by his skirt, answered with a shudder that he was +afraid to go with him. + +"Ask him why he is afraid," continued Browne. + +The answer was, that he believed his uncle would kill him. + +These questions were put loud enough to be easily heard by Atollo, and +Arthur deliberately repeated the answers first in Tahitian, and then in +English. + +"Well," said Browne, "I am now quite ready with an answer, as far as I +am concerned. I never will consent to give up the poor boy to be +murdered. He is old enough to choose for himself and I think it would +be right to resist the claim even of a father, under such +circumstances." + +"Is that to be our answer?" said Arthur, looking round. + +It was a bold stand to take, situated as we were, and we felt it to be +so; but it seemed a hard and cruel thing to yield up our little +companion to the tender mercies of his unnatural relative. Though there +were pale cheeks and unsteady hands among us, as we signified our +concurrence in this refusal, (which we all did except Morton, who +remained silent), yet we experienced a strange sense of relief when it +was done, and we stood committed to the result. + +Arthur now motioned Johnny and Eiulo to climb into the tree, then +turning to Atollo, he said that as the boy preferred remaining with us, +we were resolved to protect him to the extent of our ability. + +By this time we had somewhat regained our self-possession, and stood +grasping our weapons, though not anticipating any immediate attack. +Much to my surprise, Atollo had during the conference manifested neither +anger nor impatience. When Arthur announced our refusal to comply with +his demand, he merely noticed with a smile our belligerent attitude, and +advanced into the brook as if about to come over to the islet, swinging +a long curving weapon carelessly by his side, and followed by the other +savage. + +Browne, holding his club in his left hand, and a heavy stone in his +right, stood beside me, breathing hard through his set teeth. + +"The foolish heathen!" exclaimed he, "does he expect to subdue us by his +looks,--that he comes on in this fashion?" + +It did, in fact, seem as though he supposed that we would not dare to +commence an attack upon him, for he continued to advance, eyeing us +steadily. Just as he gained the middle of the brook, three or four more +savages came out of the forest, and one of them ran towards him, with an +exclamation which caused him to turn at once, and on hearing what the +other eagerly uttered, with gestures indicating some intelligence of an +urgent and exciting character, he walked back to the edge of the wood, +and joined the group gathered there. + +A moment afterwards, Atollo, attended by the messenger, as he appeared +to be, plunged into the forest, first giving to the others, who remained +upon the shore, some direction, which from the accompanying gesture, +appeared to have reference to ourselves. + +Johnny and Eiulo had already climbed into the Aoa, whither we stood +ready to follow, at a moment's notice. The group of savages opposite us +seemed to have no other object in view than to prevent our escape, for +they did not offer to molest us. Soon after Atollo disappeared, two +more of his party came out of the wood, and I immediately recognised one +of them, who walked stiffly and with difficulty, seeming but just able +to drag himself about, as the scarred savage with whom Browne had had so +desperate a struggle. We now thought it prudent to effect our retreat +into the tree without further loss of time, but at the first movement +which we made for that purpose, the natives set up a shout, and dashed +into the water towards us, probably thinking that we were about to try +to escape by getting to the further shore. + +They pressed us so closely that we had not a moment to spare, and had +barely climbed beyond their reach when they sprang after us. One active +fellow caught Browne, (who was somewhat behind the rest), by the foot, +and endeavoured to drag him from the trunk he was climbing, in which he +would probably have succeeded, had not Max let fall a leaf-basket of +stones directly upon his head, which stretched him groaning upon the +ground, with the blood gushing from his mouth and nose. + +At this moment Atollo himself, with the rest of his party, joined our +besiegers below, and at a signal from him, the greater part of them +immediately commenced scaling the tree at different points. Our +assailants numbered not more than thirteen or fourteen, including +Browne's former foe, who did not seem to be in a condition to climb, and +the man recently wounded, who was still lying upon the ground, +apparently lifeless. We felt that we were now irrevocably committed to +a struggle of life and death, and we were fully determined to fight +manfully, and to the very last. We stationed ourselves at nearly equal +distances among the branches, armed with the bludgeons previously placed +there, so as to be able to hasten to any point assailed, and to assist +one another as occasion should require. The savages yelled and +screeched hideously, with the hope of intimidating us, but without any +effect, and we kept watching them quietly, and meeting them so promptly +at every point, that they were uniformly obliged to quit their hold and +drop to the ground before they could effect a lodgment among the +branches. Occasionally we addressed a word of encouragement to one +another, or uttered an exclamation of triumph at the discomfiture of +some assailant more than ordinarily fierce and resolute. But with this +exception, we were as quiet as if industriously engaged in some ordinary +occupation. This lasted for full fifteen minutes, without our enemies +having gained the slightest advantage. Atollo himself had not, thus +far, taken any part in the attack, except to direct the others. + +At length, he fixed his eye upon Browne, who stepping about in the top +of the tree with an agility that I should not have expected from him, +and wielding a tremendous club, had been signally successful in +repelling our assailants. After watching him a moment, he suddenly +commenced climbing a large stem near him, with the marvellous rapidity +that characterised all his movements. Browne had just tumbled one of +the savages to the ground howling with pain, from a crushing blow upon +the wrist, and he now hastened to meet this more formidable foe. But he +was too late to prevent him from getting into the tree, and he had +already gained a footing upon the horizontal branches, when Browne +reached the spot. Atollo was without any weapon, and this was a +disadvantage that might have rendered all his strength and address +unavailing, had not the foliage and the lesser branches of the tree, +interfered with the swing of the long and heavy weapon of his adversary, +and the footing being too insecure to permit it to be used with full +effect. As Browne steadied himself and drew back for a sweeping blow, +Atollo shook the boughs upon which he stood, so violently, as greatly to +break the force of the stroke, which he received upon his arm, and +rushing upon him before he could recover his weapon, he wrested it from +his grasp, and hurled him to the ground, where he was instantly seized +and secured by those below. + +While Atollo, armed with Browne's club, advanced upon Max and Arthur, +who were nearest him, several of his followers, taking advantage of the +diversion thus effected, succeeded in ascending also, and in a few +moments they were making their way towards us from all sides. Leaving +them to complete what he had so well begun, Atollo hastened towards the +spot where Johnny and Eiulo were endeavouring to conceal themselves +among the foliage. Though now outnumbered, and hopeless of success, we +continued a desperate resistance. The ferocity of our adversaries was +excited to the highest pitch. There was scarcely one of them who had +not received some injury in the attack, sufficiently severe to +exasperate, without disabling him. We had used our clubs with such +vigour and resolution in opposing their attempts at climbing, that every +second man at least, had a crushed hand or a bruised head, and all had +received more or less hard blows. Smarting with pain, and exulting in +the prospect of speedy and ample revenge, they pressed upon us with +yells and cries that showed that there was no mercy for us if taken. +But even at that trying moment our courage did out fail or falter. We +stood together near the centre of the tree, where the branches were +strong and the footing firm. Only a part of our assailants had weapons, +and, perceiving the utter desperation with which we fought, they drew +back a little distance until clubs could be passed up from below, and +thus afforded us a momentary respite. But we well knew that it was only +momentary, and that in their present state of mind, these men would +dispatch us with as little scruple as they would mischievous wild beasts +hunted and brought to bay. + +"Nothing now remains," said Morton, "but to die courageously: we have +done every thing else that we could do." + +"It does appear to have come to that at last," said Arthur. "If I did +unwisely in advising resistance, and perilling your lives as well as my +own, I now ask your forgiveness; on my own account I do not regret it." + +"There is nothing to forgive," answered Morton, "you did what you +believed was right, and if I counselled otherwise, you will do me the +justice to believe that it was because I differed with you in judgment, +and not because I shrunk from the consequences." + +"I never did you the injustice to think otherwise," answered Arthur. + +"If our friends could but know what has become of us," said Max, +brushing away a tear, "and how we died here, fighting manfully to the +last, I should feel more entirely resigned; but I cannot bear to think +that our fate will never be known." + +"Here they come once more," said Arthur, as the savages, having now +obtained their weapons, advanced to finish their work, "and now, may God +have mercy upon us!" + +We all joined devoutly in Arthur's prayer, for we believed that death +was at hand. We then grasped our weapons, and stood ready for the +attack. + +At this instant a long and joyous cry from Eiulo reached our ears. For +several minutes he had been eluding the pursuit of Atollo with a +wonderful agility, partly the effect of frantic dread. Just when it +seemed as though he could no longer escape, he suddenly uttered this +cry, repeating the words, "Wakatta! Wakatta!"--then springing to the +ground, he ran towards the brook, but was intercepted and seized by one +of the savages below. + +There was an immediate answer to Eiulo's cry, in one of the deepest and +most powerful voices I had ever heard, and which seemed to come from the +west shore of the stream. Looking in that direction I saw, and +recognised at once, the lion-like old man, who had fled along the beach, +pursued by Atollo and his party. Several men, apparently his followers, +stood around him. He now bounded across the stream, towards the spot +where Eiulo was still struggling with his captor, and calling loudly for +help. + +Atollo instantly sprang to the ground, and flew to the spot; then, with +a shrill call, he summoned his men about him. Eiulo's outcry, and the +answer which had been made to it, seemed to have produced a startling +effect upon Atollo and his party. For the moment we appeared to be +entirely forgotten. + +"This must be Wakatta," said Arthur eagerly, "it can be no other. There +is hope yet." With a rapid sign for us to follow, he glided down the +nearest trunk, and, darting past Atollo's party, he succeeded in the +midst of the confusion, in reaching the old man and his band, who stood +upon the shore of the islet. Morton and I were equally successful. +Max, who came last, was observed, and an effort made to intercept him. +But dodging one savage, and bursting from the grasp of another, who +seized him by the arm as he was running at full speed, he also joined +us, and we ranged ourselves beside Wakatta and his men. Browne, Eiulo, +and Johnny, were prisoners. + +It now seemed as though the conflict was about to be renewed upon more +equal terms. Our new and unexpected allies numbered seven, including +their venerable leader. On the other hand, our adversaries were but +twelve, and of these, several showed evident traces of the severe usage +they had recently received, and were hardly in a condition for a fresh +struggle. + +There was a pause of some minutes, during which the two parties stood +confronting each other, with hostile, but hesitating looks. Wakatta +then addressed a few words to Atollo, in the course of which he several +times repeated Eiulo's name, pointing towards him at the same time, and +appearing to demand that he should be released. + +The reply was an unhesitating and decided refusal, as I easily gathered +from the look and manner that accompanied it. + +Wakatta instantly swung up his club, uttering a deep guttural +exclamation, which seemed to be the signal for attack, for his people +raised their weapons and advanced as if about to rush upon the others. +We had in the meantime provided ourselves with clubs, a number of which +were scattered about upon the ground, and we prepared to assist the +party with whom we had become so strangely associated. + +But at a word and gesture from Atollo, Wakatta lowered his weapon again, +and the men on both sides paused in their hostile demonstrations, while +their leaders once more engaged in conference. + +Atollo now seemed to make some proposition to Wakatta, which was eagerly +accepted by the latter. Each then spoke briefly to his followers, who +uttered cries of the wildest excitement, and suddenly became silent +again. The two next crossed together to the opposite shore, and while +we stood gazing in a bewildered manner at these proceedings, and +wondering what could be their meaning, the natives also crossed the +brook, and formed a wide circle around their chiefs, on an open grassy +space at the edge of the forest. We still kept with Wakatta's party, +who arranged themselves in a semicircle behind him. + +"What does this mean!" inquired Morton of Arthur, "it looks as though +they were about to engage in single combat." + +"That is in fact their purpose," answered Arthur. + +"And will that settle the difficulty between these hostile parties?" +said Morton, "will there not be a general fight after all, whichever +leader is victor?" + +"I rather think not," answered Arthur, "the party whose champion falls, +will be too much discouraged to renew the fight--they will probably run +at once." + +"Then our situation will be no better than before, in case the old +warrior should prove unfortunate. Can't you speak to his followers and +get them to stand ready to attack their enemies if their chief falls." + +"I will try what I can do," answered Arthur, "and let us be ready to act +with them." + +Meantime the two principal parties had completed their preparations for +the deadly personal combat, in which they were about to engage. Atollo +took from one of his followers a long-handled curving weapon, the inner +side of which was lined with a row of sharks' teeth, and then placed +himself in the middle of the open space, first carefully kicking out of +the way a number of fallen branches which strewed the ground. His +manner was confident, and clearly bespoke an anticipated triumph. + +Wakatta was armed with the massive club, set with spikes of iron-wood, +which he carried when I first saw him upon the shore. He advanced +deliberately towards his adversary, until they stood face to face, and +within easy reach of one another's weapons. + +The men on both sides remained perfectly quiet, eyeing every movement of +their respective champions with the intensest interest. In the +breathless silence that prevailed, the gentle murmur of the brook +sliding over its pebbly bed, and even the dropping of a withered leaf, +could be heard distinctly. + +Glancing over to the islet, I saw that Browne, although his hands +appeared to be bound behind him, had rolled himself to the edge of the +brook, from which he was watching what was going forward. + +Each of the two combatants regarded the other with the air of a man +conscious that he is about to meet a formidable adversary; but in +Atollo's evil eye, there gleamed an assured and almost exulting +confidence, that increased my anxiety for his aged opponent; his manner, +nevertheless, was cautious and wary, and he did not suffer the slightest +movement of Wakatta to escape him. + +They stood opposite each other, neither seeming to be willing to +commence the conflict, until Wakatta, with an impatient gesture, warned +his adversary to defend himself, and then swinging up his ponderous club +in both hands, aimed a blow at him, which the other avoided by springing +lightly backwards. + +And now the fight commenced in earnest. Atollo made no attempt to guard +or parry the blows levelled at him--which would indeed have been idle-- +but with astonishing agility and quickness of eye, he sprang aside, or +leaped back, always in time to save himself. He kept moving around the +old man, provoking his attacks by feints and half-blows, but making no +serious attack himself. There was a cool, calculating expression upon +his sharp and cruel countenance, and he did not appear to be half so +earnest or excited as his antagonist. I saw plainly that the wily +savage was endeavouring to provoke the other to some careless or +imprudent movement, of which he stood ready to take instant and fatal +advantage. + +At length some such opportunity as he was waiting for, was afforded him. +The old warrior, growing impatient of this indecisive manoeuvring, +began to press his adversary harder, and to follow him up with an +apparent determination to bring matters to a speedy issue. Atollo +retreated before him, until he was driven to the edge of the brook, +where he paused, as if resolved to make a stand. Wakatta now seemed to +think that he had brought his foe to bay, and whirling round his club, +he delivered a sweeping blow full at his head with such fury, that when +Atollo avoided it by dropping upon one knee, the momentum of the +ponderous weapon swung its owner half round, and before he had time to +recover himself, his watchful adversary, springing lightly up, brought +down his keen-edged weapon full upon his grey head, inflicting a ghastly +wound. + +And now Atollo's whole demeanour changed: the time for caution and +coolness was passed; the moment for destroying his disabled foe had +come. While his followers set up an exulting yell, he darted forward to +follow up his advantage: the triumphant ferocity of his look is not to +be described. Wakatta was yet staggering from the effect of the blow +upon his head, when he received a second, which slightly gashed his left +shoulder, and glancing from it, laid open his cheek. But to my +astonishment, the strong old man, cruelly wounded as he was, seemed to +be neither disabled nor dismayed. The keen-edged, but light weapon of +Atollo was better calculated to inflict painful wounds than mortal +injuries. Either blow, had it been from a weapon like that of Wakatta, +would have terminated the combat. + +Before Atollo could follow up his success by a third and decisive +stroke, the old warrior had recovered himself and though bleeding +profusely, he looked more formidable than ever. He at once resumed the +offensive, and with such vigour, that the other, with all his surprising +activity, now found it difficult to elude his rapid but steady attacks. +He was now thoroughly aroused. Atollo seemed gradually to become +confused and distressed, as he was closely followed around the circle +without an instant's respite being allowed him. At last he was forced +into the stream, where he made a desperate stand, with the manifest +determination to conquer or perish there. But Wakatta rushed headlong +upon him, and holding his club in his right hand, he received upon his +left arm, without any attempt to avoid it, a blow which Atollo aimed at +his head: at the same instant he closed, and succeeded in seizing his +adversary by the wrist. Once in the old man's grasp, he was a mere +child, and in spite of his tremendous efforts, his other hand was soon +mastered, and he was thrown to the ground. It was a horrible scene that +followed. I wished that the life of the vanquished man could have been +spared. But his excited foe had no thought of mercy, and shortening his +club, he held him fast with one hand, and despatched him at a single +blow with the other. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY THREE. + +THE MIGRATION. + +A TEWAN MD--EXCHANGE OF CIVILITIES--MAX'S FAREWELL BREAKFAST--A GLANCE +AT THE FUTURE. + + "We go from the shores where those blue billows roll, + But that Isle, and those waters, shall live in my soul." + +As the victor rose to his feet, his followers uttered a fierce yell, and +precipitated themselves upon the opposite party, which instantly +dispersed and fled. + +Wakatta cast a half-remorseful glance at the corpse of his adversary, +and, raising his powerful voice, recalled his men from the pursuit. +Then wading into the brook, he began to wash the gore from his head and +face: one of his people, who from his official air of bustling alacrity, +must have been a professional character, or at least an amateur surgeon, +examined the wounds, and dexterously applied an improvised poultice of +chewed leaves to his gashed face, using broad strips of bark for +bandages. + +Meantime Arthur hastened over to the islet, and released our companions +from the ligatures of tappa which confined their limbs. Eiulo was no +sooner freed, than he ran eagerly to Wakatta, who took him in his arms, +and embraced him tenderly. After a rapid interchange of questions and +replies, during which they both shed tears, they seemed to be speaking +of ourselves, Eiulo looking frequently towards us, and talking with +great animation and earnestness. They then approached the place where +we were standing, and Wakatta spoke a few words, pointing alternately +from Eiulo to us. Arthur made some reply, whereupon the old warrior +went to him, and bending down his gigantic frame gave him a cordial hug; +his fresh bandaged wounds probably caused him to dispense with the usual +ceremony of rubbing faces. + +"I expect it will be our turn next," said Max, with a grimace, "if so, +observe how readily I shall adapt myself to savage etiquette, and +imitate my example." + +It proved as he anticipated, for Wakatta, who must have received a +highly flattering account of us from Eiulo, was not satisfied until he +had bestowed upon each one of us, Johnny included, similar tokens of his +regard, Max rushing forward, with an air of "empressement," and taking +the initiative, as he had promised. The "surgeon," who seemed to think +that some friendly notice might also be expected from him, in virtue of +his official character, now advanced with a patronising air, and in his +turn paid us the same civilities, not omitting the rubbing of faces, as +his chief had done. Another one of our "allies," as Max called them, a +huge, good-natured-looking savage, picked up Johnny, very much as one +would a lap-dog or a pet kitten, and began to chuck him under the chin, +and stroke his hair and cheeks, greatly to the annoyance of the object +of these flattering attentions, who felt his dignity sadly compromised +by such treatment. + +As soon as these friendly advances were over, Arthur entered into a +conversation with Wakatta, which, from the earnest expression of the +countenance of the latter, appeared to relate to something of great +interest. Presently he spoke to his men, who seized their weapons with +an air of alacrity, as if preparing for some instant expedition, and +Arthur, turning to us, said that we must set out in a body for the inlet +where we had seen the canoe of the other party, as it was thought of the +utmost importance to secure it if possible. We started at once, at a +rapid rate, Wakatta leading the way, with tremendous strides, and the +big, good-natured fellow, taking Johnny upon his back, in spite of his +protestations that he could run himself, quite as fast as was necessary. +But on reaching the inlet we found that the other party had been too +quick for us; they were already through the surf, and under sail, +coasting along towards the opening in the reef opposite Palm-Islet, +probably with the intention of returning to Tewa. + +It is now eight days since the events last narrated took place. On the +day succeeding, we buried Atollo on the shore opposite Banyan islet, +together with one of his followers, who had also been killed or mortally +wounded in the conflict with us. Two others of them, who were too badly +hurt to accompany the hasty flight to the inlet, are still living in the +woods, Wakatta having strictly forbidden his people to injure them. + +I ought here to explain the circumstances, as Arthur learned them from +Wakatta, which brought the natives to our island. A civil war had +recently broken out in Tewa, growing out of the plots of the Frenchmen +resident there, and some discontented chiefs who made common cause with +them. One of the foreigners, connected by marriage with the family of a +powerful chief, had been subjected by the authority of Eiulo's father, +to a summary and severe punishment, for an outrage of which he had been +clearly convicted. This was the immediate cause of the outbreak. +Atollo and his followers had issued from their fastnesses and joined the +insurgents; a severe and bloody battle had been fought, in which they +were completely successful, taking the chief himself prisoner, and +dispersing his adherents. + +Wakatta, attended by the six followers now with him, was at this time +absent upon an excursion to a distant part of the island, and the first +intelligence which he received of what had taken place, was accompanied +by the notice that Atollo, with a formidable band, was then in eager +search of him. Knowing well the relentless hatred borne him by that +strange and desperate man, and that Tewa could furnish no lurking-place +where he would be long secure from his indefatigable pursuit, he had +hastily embarked for the island where he had once before taken refuge, +under somewhat similar circumstances. Hither his implacable foe had +pursued him. This statement will sufficiently explain what has been +already related. + +All our plans are yet uncertain. Wakatta meditates a secret return to +Tewa, confident that by his presence there, now that the formidable +Atollo is no more, he can restore his chief to liberty and to his +hereditary rights, if he yet survives. + +An experiment has been made with the yawl, in order to ascertain whether +she can safely convey our entire party, savage and civilised, in case we +should conclude to leave the island. The result showed that it would +scarcely be prudent for so great a number to embark in her upon a voyage +to Tewa, and Wakatta and his people have now commenced building a canoe, +which is to be of sufficient size to carry twenty persons. + +Browne's prejudices against the "heathen savages," have been greatly +softened by what he has seen of these natives, and he says that, "if the +rest of them are equally well-behaved, one might manage to get along +with them quite comfortably." Max has taken a great fancy to Wakatta, +whom he emphatically pronounces "a trump," a "regular brick," besides +bestowing upon him a variety of other elegant and original designations, +of the like complimentary character. This may be owing in part, to the +fact, that the old warrior has promised him a bread-fruit plantation, +and eventually a pretty grand-daughter of his own for a wife, if he will +accompany him to Tewa and settle there. + +As the preparations of our allies advance towards completion, we are +more and more reconciled to the thought of embarking with them. Johnny +has already commenced packing his shells and "specimens" for removal. +Max has ascertained, greatly to his relief, for he had some doubts on +the subject, that the gridiron and other cooking utensils can be stowed +safely in the locker of the yawl, and he anticipates much benevolent +gratification in introducing these civilised "institutions," among the +barbarians of Tewa. + +The intestine feuds which still rage there, and the probability that +"our side," will find themselves in the minority, furnish the chief +grounds of objection to the step contemplated. But we would cheerfully +incur almost any danger that promises to increase our prospect of +ultimately reaching home. + +There is some talk of a preliminary reconnoitring expedition, by Wakatta +and two or three of his people, for the purpose of getting some definite +information as to the present position of affairs at Tewa, before +setting out for it in a body. Max, yesterday, finished his miniature +ship, and exhorted me to "wind up" our history forthwith, with a Homeric +description of the great battle at the islet, and our heroic defence of +the banyan tree. He declares it to be his intention to enclose the +manuscript in the hold of the vessel and launch her when half-way to +Tewa, in the assured confidence that the winds and waves will waft it to +its destination, or to use his own phrase,--"that we shall yet be heard +of in Hardscrabble." + +Five days ago, the canoe was completed, and on the succeeding afternoon, +Wakatta, accompanied by "the doctor," and two other of his people, +sailed for Tewa, for the purpose of endeavouring to learn whether it +would be prudent for us to venture thither at present. + +We have been living of late at the cabin, and our "allies" have made an +encampment by the lake, within a hundred paces of us. The state of +feverish expectation naturally produced by our present circumstances, +prevents any thing like regular occupation. We do nothing all the day +but wander restlessly about among the old haunts which were our +favourites in the peaceful time of our early sojourn here. Max has +endeavoured to relieve the tedium, and get up an interest of some sort, +by renewing his attempts against the great eel. But the patriarch is as +wary, and his stronghold beneath the roots of the buttress tree as +impregnable as ever, and all efforts to his prejudice, whether by force +or stratagem, still prove unavailing. To escape, in some measure, the +humiliation of so mortifying a defeat, Max now affects to be convinced +that his venerable antagonist is no eel after all, but an old +water-snake, inheriting his full share of the ancient wisdom of the +serpent, and by whom it is consequently no disgrace for any mortal man +to be outwitted. + +For several days past we have even neglected preparing any regular +meals, satisfying our hunger as it arose with whatever could be most +readily procured. + +Max pronounces this last, "an alarming indication of the state of utter +demoralisation towards which we are hastening, and, in fact, the +commencement of a relapse into barbarism." + +"One of the chief points of difference," he says, "between civilised and +savage man, is, that the former eats at stated and regular intervals, as +a matter of social duty, whereas the latter only eats when he is +hungry!" + +_Two days later_. Wakatta has returned from his expedition, full of +hope and confidence, and actually looking ten years younger than when I +first saw him. He says that the position of affairs at Tewa is most +promising. The recently victorious rebels have fallen into fierce +contentions among themselves, and a large faction of them, with the +leaders of which he has entered into communication, is willing to unite +with him against the others, upon being assured of indemnity for past +offences. Eiulo's father still lives, and has already gathered the +nucleus of a force capable of retrieving his fortunes. + +All is now finally determined upon, and we only wait for a favourable +breeze to bid adieu to these shores. + +The morning of Wakatta's return, also witnessed another event of nearly +equal importance. I allude to a great farewell breakfast, given by Max +in celebration of our approaching departure, as well as for the purpose +of stemming the current of the demoralising influence above alluded to. +The "founder of the feast," together with Eiulo and Johnny, was up +preparing it with his own hospitable hands, a full hour before the rest +of us were awake. + +It consisted of all the delicacies and luxuries that our island can +afford: there were roasted oysters fresh from the shore, and poached +eggs fresh from the nest, (Max had despatched one of the natives to +Sea-birds' Point after them before daylight); then there were fish +nicely broiled, and mealy taro, and baked bread-fruit hot from a +subterranean Polynesian oven. + +In the enjoyment of this generous fare, our drooping spirits rose, and +Max, as was his wont, became discursive. + +"What a humiliating reflection," exclaimed he, "that we should have +permitted ourselves to be so disturbed and fluttered, by the prospect of +a slight change in our affairs! Why should we distrust our destiny, or +shrink from our mission? Why these nervous apprehensions, and these +unreasonable doubts?"--(Hear! hear!) + + "`There _is_ a providence that shapes our ends, + Rough-hew them how we will.' + +"Let us accept, then, the belief which all things tend to confirm, that +a glorious future awaits us in our new sphere of action at Tewa!" + +"Ah!" sighed Browne, after a momentary pause, "Tewa may be a fine +place--but I doubt if they have any such oysters as these there." The +action accompanying these words must have given Eiulo a clue to their +purport, for he hastened eagerly to protest, through Arthur, as +interpreter, that the oysters at Tewa were much larger and fatter; he +added, "that since we liked them so much, he would have them all +`tabooed,' as soon as we arrived, so that `common people,' wouldn't dare +for their lives to touch one." + +"I used to regard the `taboo,'" said Browne, "as an arbitrary and +oppressive heathen custom. But how ignorant and prejudiced we sometimes +are in regard to foreign institutions! We must be very careful when we +get there about introducing rash innovations upon the settled order of +things." + +"We will establish an enlightened system of common schools," said Max, +"to begin with, and Arthur shall also open a Sunday-school." + +"And in the course of time we will found a college, in which Browne +shall be professor of Elocution and Oratory," said Morton. + +"And you," resumed Max, "shall have a commission as Major-General in the +Republican army of Tewa, which you shall instruct in modern tactics, and +lead to victory against the rebels." + +"In the Royal army, if you please," interrupted Browne; "Republicanism +is one of those crude and pestilent innovations which I shall set my +face against! Can any one breathe so treasonable a suggestion in the +presence of the heir-apparent to the throne?--If such there be, +Major-General Morton, I call upon you to attach him for a traitor!" + +"And I," cried Johnny, "what shall I do!" + +"Why," answered Max, "you shall rejoice the hearts of the Tewan +juveniles, by introducing among them the precious lore of the +story-books. The rising generation shall no longer remain in heathen +ignorance of Cinderella, and Jack of the Bean-stalk, and his still more +illustrious cousin, the Giant-killer! The sufferings of Sinbad, the +voyages of Gulliver, the achievements of Munchausen, the adventures of +Crusoe, shall yet become to them familiar as household words!" + +"And Archer's mission shall be no less dignified and useful," resumed +Browne, "he shall keep the records of the monarchy, and become the +faithful historian of the happy, prosperous, and glorious reign of Eiulo +the First!" + +THE END. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Island Home, by Richard Archer + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ISLAND HOME *** + +***** This file should be named 23117.txt or 23117.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/3/1/1/23117/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |